rtn 980 idu hardware description-(v100r003c00_03)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemV100R003C00

IDU Hardware Description

Issue 03

Date 2011-04-10

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C00

iManager U2000 V100R003C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network planning engineerl Hardware installation engineerl Installation and commissioning engineerl Field maintenance engineerl Data configuration engineerl System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:

l Basics of digital microwave communicationl Basics of the OptiX RTN 980

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description About This Document


iii

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command ConventionsThe command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains allupdates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

This document is the third issue for the V100R003C00 product version.

Compared with the second issue, the content updates are as follows.

Section Description

Entire document Unified the expression structure ofdimensions.

Entire document Modified the description of the PROGindicator.

3.3.4 Front Panel Corrected the mistake in the front paneldiagram.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description About This Document


v

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-01-20) Based on Product Version V100R003C00This document is the second issue for the V100R003C00 product version.

Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows.

Section Description

4.2 PDU Added the descriptions of the PDU.

D Weight and Power Consumption of EachBoard

Updated power consumption values ofspecific boards.

Entire document Optimized the descriptions of workingprinciples for IF boards.

Entire document Fixed known bugs.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00This document is the first issue for the V100R003C00 version.

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-11.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-21.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-31.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-7

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-22.3 Air Flow..........................................................................................................................................................2-32.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-33.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-43.3 CSHN..............................................................................................................................................................3-7

3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-83.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-83.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-143.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-183.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-273.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-293.3.7 Types of SFP Modules.........................................................................................................................3-303.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-313.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-32

3.4 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-353.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-353.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-363.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-373.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-423.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-443.4.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-453.4.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-46

3.5 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-47

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Contents


vii

3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-483.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-483.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-513.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-543.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-563.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-573.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-58

3.6 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-603.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-613.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-613.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-633.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-673.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-693.6.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-713.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-72

3.7 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-743.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-743.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-743.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-773.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-813.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-833.7.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-843.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-85

3.8 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-883.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-893.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-893.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-923.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-963.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-993.8.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-1003.8.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-101

3.9 EM6T/EM6F...............................................................................................................................................3-1043.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-1053.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-1053.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-1083.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-1113.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-1153.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-1173.9.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-1173.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-117

3.10 SL1D.........................................................................................................................................................3-1193.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-120

ContentsOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1203.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1213.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1233.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1253.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1263.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-1263.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-127

3.11 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................3-1283.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1283.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1293.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1303.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1333.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1363.11.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1383.11.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-1383.11.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-138

3.12 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-1393.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1403.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1403.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-1403.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1433.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1473.12.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-1483.12.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-1483.12.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-148

3.13 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-1493.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1493.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1493.13.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1503.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1513.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1543.13.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-155

3.14 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-1573.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1573.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-1573.14.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1583.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1593.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1603.14.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-161

3.15 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-1623.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-1623.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-162



ix

3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-1633.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-1643.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-1663.15.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-167

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-14.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Appearance.............................................................................................................................................4-44.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-54.2.3 Functions and Working Principles.........................................................................................................4-6

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-35.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-4

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-45.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-5

5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-55.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-65.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-75.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9

5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-105.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-13

5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-155.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-16

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................A-2A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................A-7A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................A-9A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.........................................................................A-10A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...............................................A-13A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...............................................................A-14A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.................................................................................A-15A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs...........................................A-16A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting......................................................A-18A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...........................................A-19A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..........A-20A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.....................................A-22A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.......................................................................A-23A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management...........................A-24



x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.............A-26A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................A-27A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................A-31A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting....................................................................................A-32A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter.........................................A-32A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table............................................................A-33A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel................................................................A-34A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management.........................................A-38A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..............................................................A-39A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting.......................................................A-40A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control........................................................A-40A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control.........................................................................................A-41A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-42A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management...............................................................................A-42A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation................................................................A-43A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..................................................................................A-45

A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-61A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-63A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-66

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-80A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation......................................................................................A-84A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP.....................................................................................................A-86

A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-87A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-88A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-90A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services......................................................................................................................................................................A-94A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-98A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control................................................................................A-100A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion.......................................................................................A-103

A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces................................................................................................................A-104A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters........................................................................................................................A-105A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-105A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.............................................................A-106A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-110A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.........................................................A-110



xi

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.............................................................A-114A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................A-116A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.............................................................A-119A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................A-120A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters......................................................................................................................A-122A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-123A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.........................................................A-124A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters......................................................................................................A-125A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes....................................................A-125A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes................................................A-126A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes................................................A-129A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.............................................A-130A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.........................................................................................................................A-134A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute.........................................................................A-134A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute...................................................................A-142A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes...................................A-143A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records.....................................................................A-144A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-145A.5.6 ODU Parameters...............................................................................................................................A-146A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute............................................A-146A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes............................................................A-148A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information..................................................A-151A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................A-152A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-153A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-154A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown.....................................................................A-155A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-156A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-156A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-158A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead..................................................................................................................A-159A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead................................................................A-160A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..............................................................................................A-161A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs............................................................................................A-162

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane..........................................A-163A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-164A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation.........................................................................A-164A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.........................................................................................A-184A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation................................................A-195A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation........................................................................A-196A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service........................................................................................A-202A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation................................................................................A-213A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-213



xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation..................................................................A-214A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management..................................................................................A-216A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.............................................A-222A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration....................................A-224A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...............................................A-224A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters..................................................A-230A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.................A-232A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.......................A-240A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation........................................A-248A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT.................................................A-249A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT...................................A-251A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................A-251A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..........................A-254A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-258A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation...A-259A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation....................................................................................................................................................................A-260A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation.............................A-260A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation................A-262A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...............................A-263A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling................................A-263A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling................................A-265A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter...............................A-267A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.........A-269A.6.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-270A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management................................................................A-271A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create...................................................A-277A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.........................................A-284A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.................................................................................A-286A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy...............................................................................................A-291A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration....................................A-296A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.......................................................A-307

A.7 RMON Parameters....................................................................................................................................A-309A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.......................................................A-309A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..........................................................A-310A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group............................................A-311A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting........................................................A-312

A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services......................................................................................................A-314A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.................................................................................................................A-314A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels..................................................A-315A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel...........................................A-316A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.........A-321A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...........A-326



xiii

A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.....................................A-331A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI..........................................................A-336A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping..................................................A-337A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute........................................A-340A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management.......................................................A-343A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation.....................................................A-348A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.................................................................A-359A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping...................................................................A-363A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.........................................................A-366A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.....................................................A-368A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation.......................................................A-371A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation....................................................A-376A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...........A-387A.8.2 CES Parameters................................................................................................................................A-393A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.......................................................................A-393A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.......................................................A-403A.8.3 ATM Parameters..............................................................................................................................A-416A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...............................A-417A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration.............................A-422A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..........................................A-424A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.............................................A-425A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..........................A-425A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table............................A-427A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.............A-429A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.......................................................................A-431A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation.......................................................A-435A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management...................................................................A-440A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation....................................................A-449A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.......................A-461A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status..................................A-465A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status....................A-468A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...........................................................A-471

A.9 Clock Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-472A.9.1 Physical Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................A-472A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table....................................................................A-473A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port......A-475A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet.......................................................A-477A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.......................................................A-480A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control............................................A-483A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.....................................A-484A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters............A-485A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching.................................A-487



xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...............A-488A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.................A-489A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status................................................................A-492A.9.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters............................................................................................................A-493A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..................................................................................A-494A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain..........................................................................................A-494A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation..........................................................................A-495A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports............................................................................................A-496

A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-496A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-497A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-498A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-499A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-500A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-501

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................C-1

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board...............................................................D-1

E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1E.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................E-2E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................E-2E.3 F-J.................................................................................................................................................................E-11E.4 K-O...............................................................................................................................................................E-16E.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................E-22E.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................E-31



xv

Figures

Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980..................................................1-3Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980................................................................................................................1-4Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980........................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis..........................................................................................................2-3Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels..........................................................................................................2-6Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN...........................................................................................3-15Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-17Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN..................................................................................................................3-18Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-21Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port...........................................3-23Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module.......................................................................................................3-26Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-28Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-30Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN...........................................................................3-30Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-38Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-42Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-44Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS..............................................................................................3-45Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2...........................................................................................3-51Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-54Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-56Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-57Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2...........................................................................................3-64Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-67Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-70Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-71Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2...........................................................................................3-78Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2..................................................................................................................3-81

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Figures


xvii

Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-83Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-84Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2...........................................................................................3-93Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2..................................................................................................................3-96Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-99Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-100Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-109Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-111Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-111Figure 3-36 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-113Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-115Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-116Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-116Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-121Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-123Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-125Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS........................................................................................3-126Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1................................................................................3-131Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1.................................................................................................................3-133Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1................................................................................................................3-133Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-134Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis..................................................................................3-137Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS................................................................................3-137Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-141Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-143Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-143Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-145Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis................................................................................3-147Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS...............................................................................3-147Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-150Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-151Figure 3-58 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-152Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-154Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS.........................................................................................3-155Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-158Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-159Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-161Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS...........................................................................................3-161Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-163Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-165Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-166Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS...........................................................................................3-166

FiguresOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals.....................................4-6Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU.........................................................................................4-7Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 XPIC cable..........................................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment................................................................................. 5-10Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable.............................................................................................................................. 5-16Figure 5-12 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-18

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Figures


xix

Tables

Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 980.......................................................................................................................1-4Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980.............................................................................1-5Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980..........................................................................1-5Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 980............................................................................1-7Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-4Table 3-1 List of IDU boards...............................................................................................................................3-5Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports..................................................................................3-8Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions......................................................................................................................3-10Table 3-4 QoS functions.....................................................................................................................................3-10Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions..................................................................................................................3-11Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions.................................................................................................................3-13Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN................................................................................. 3-19Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.............................................3-21Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-21Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-22Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-22Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-23Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port.......................................................................................3-24Table 3-14 Buttons............................................................................................................................................. 3-25Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN.................................................................................3-26Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode....................................................................3-27Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode............................................................... 3-27Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-28Table 3-19 Slot allocation...................................................................................................................................3-30Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports............................................................................3-31Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports.......................................................3-31Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-32Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-33Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-33Table 3-25 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-34Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-34Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-35Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports....................................................................................3-36

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description Tables


xxi

Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-38Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-40Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1....................................................................................3-42Table 3-32 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-43Table 3-33 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-45Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-46Table 3-35 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-46Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-47Table 3-37 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-47Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.................................................................................3-48Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports...........................................................................3-50Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2....................................................................3-51Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..................................................................3-53Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..................................................................................3-54Table 3-43 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-55Table 3-44 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-57Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board).......................................................................3-58Table 3-46 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-59Table 3-47 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-60Table 3-48 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-60Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports.................................................................................3-61Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports...........................................................................3-63Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2....................................................................3-64Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2..................................................................3-66Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2..................................................................................3-67Table 3-54 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-69Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-71Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board).......................................................................3-72Table 3-57 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-73Table 3-58 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-73Table 3-59 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-74Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports.................................................................................3-75Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports...........................................................................3-76Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2....................................................................3-78Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2..................................................................3-80Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2..................................................................................3-81Table 3-65 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-82Table 3-66 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-84Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board).................................................................3-85Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)..............3-85Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)................3-87Table 3-70 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-87

TablesOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-71 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-88Table 3-72 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-88Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports.................................................................................3-89Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports...........................................................................3-91Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2....................................................................3-93Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2..................................................................3-95Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2..................................................................................3-97Table 3-78 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-98Table 3-79 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-100Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)...............................................................3-101Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)............3-101Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)..............3-103Table 3-83 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-103Table 3-84 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-104Table 3-85 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-104Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports.................................................................3-105Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction......................................................................................3-109Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction....................................................................................3-110Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..................................................................3-111Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T............................................................................................3-113Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F............................................................................................3-113Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode..................................................................3-114Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode.............................................................3-114Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..........................................................3-115Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-116Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-117Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-117Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118Table 3-100 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-119Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports............................................................................3-120Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D...............................................................3-122Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D.............................................................3-123Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D............................................................................3-124Table 3-105 Description of the ports ...............................................................................................................3-124Table 3-106 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-126Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-126Table 3-108 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-127Table 3-109 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-128Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports....................................................................3-129Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1.......................................................3-131Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1.....................................................3-132



xxiii

Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1....................................................................3-133Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1............................................................................................3-134Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1............................................................................................3-134Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-135Table 3-117 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-137Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1...........................................................................................3-138Table 3-119 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-138Table 3-120 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-139Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports..................................................................3-140Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D..................................................... 3-141Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D....................................................3-142Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................3-143Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S........................................................................................... 3-144Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D...........................................................................................3-144Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-145Table 3-128 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-148Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-148Table 3-130 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-148Table 3-131 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-149Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports............................................................................ 3-150Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX............................................................................. 3-152Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports............................................................3-152Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.............................................................................................. 3-153Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port..............................................................................................3-153Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port............................................................................................3-153Table 3-138 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-155Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-155Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-156Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-156Table 3-142 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-156Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports...............................................................................3-157Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU................................................................................3-159Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU..............................................................................................3-160Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU............................................................................................3-161Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports.............................................................................3-162Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-164Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN..............................................................................3-165Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-167Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel............................................................................................................4-2Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU...................................................................................................4-5Table 5-1 Power cable specifications...................................................................................................................5-3



xxiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector.............................................................................................................................................................................5-14Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable............................................................................................5-16Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs..................................................................................................................5-16Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs..............................................................................................................5-17Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable..................................................................................5-18Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable...........................................................................................5-18Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-104Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-118Table A-3 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-128Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI........................................................................................................A-164Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)............................................................................A-169Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)..................................................................A-172Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI........................................................................................................A-174Table A-8 CES services...................................................................................................................................A-344Table A-9 E-Line services...............................................................................................................................A-345Table A-10 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-346Table A-11 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-346Table A-12 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-347Table A-13 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-348Table A-14 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-353Table A-15 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-377Table A-16 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-378Table A-17 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-379Table A-18 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-380Table A-19 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-381Table A-20 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-381Table A-21 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-388Table A-22 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-389Table A-23 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-390Table A-24 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-391Table A-25 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-392Table A-26 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-392Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters...........A-434Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters..........................................................................................................................................................................A-439Table A-29 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-454Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support........................................................................B-1Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN..................................................................................C-1Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1.......................................................................................C-3



xxv

Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-4Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2....................................................................................C-5Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2....................................................................................C-6Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2....................................................................................C-8Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................C-9Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D.................................................................................C-10Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.......................................................................C-11Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.......................................................................C-11Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX................................................................................C-12Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU..................................................................................C-12Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN................................................................................C-13Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board..................................................................................D-1



xxvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

1 Introduction

About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 980 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmissionsystem developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for amobile communication network or private network.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.

1.3 Radio Link FormsThe OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards andODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction


1-1

1.1 Network ApplicationThe OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmissionsystem developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for amobile communication network or private network.

OptiX RTN 900 Product FamilyThe OptiX RTN 900 products are available in three types: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950,and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements.l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 900 product series uses the same types of IF boards and service interface boards.

The OptiX RTN 900 products provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easilyand configured flexibly. It provides a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports thesmooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybridmicrowave to the Packet microwave. The solution is able to adapt to changing service scenariosdue to evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmissionrequirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.

OptiX RTN 980Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980.

The OptiX RTN 980 is large-capacity nodal microwave equipment deployed at the convergencelayer. It supports the convergence of up to 14 radio links, and supports multiple protectionschemes.Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN980.

1 IntroductionOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980

TDM Network(SDH)

STM-1/4STM-1/4

GE

OptiX RTN 980 BSCRNCOptiX RTN 910/950

Radio link Cable/fiber

Regionalbackhaulnetwork

Ethernet Network(Metro)

Raido trassmission network

FE/GE

FE/GE

STM-1/4

ATM

FE/GE

Packet Network(PTN)

NOTE

l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 980 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaulnetwork.

l The OptiX RTN 980 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to theregional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)network or packet switching network (PSN).

The OptiX RTN 980 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and thereforeTDM and ATM services can be backhauled through a PSN.

1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.



1-3

IDU 980The IDU 980 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 980 system. It receives and multiplexesservices, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control andcommunications function.

Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 980.

Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 980

Item Description

Chassis height 5U

Pluggable Supported

Number of microwavedirections

1 to 14

RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configurationN+0 non-protection configuration1+1 protection configurationN+1 protection configuration(N ≤ 7)XPIC configuration

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 980




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

ODU

The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifiessignals.

The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.

NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHzfrequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980

Item Description

Standard PowerODU

High Power ODU Low Capacity forPDH ODU

ODU type SP, SPA HP LP

Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz (SPODU)6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (SPA ODU)

6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38 GHz

7/8/11/13/15/18/23GHz

Microwavemodulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM(SP)QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM (SPA)

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/18/23/26/28/32/38GHz)7/14/28 MHz (10.5GHz)

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980

Item Description

High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDHODU

ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1

Frequency band 7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz



1-5

Item Description

High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDHODU

Microwave modulationmode

QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/256QAM

QPSK/16QAM

Channel spacing 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separatemounting.

l The direct mounting method is usually used when a small-diameter and single-polarizedantenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU isdirectly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna,an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mountedto connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method.

Figure 1-3 Direct mounting

l The separate mounting method is used when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameterand single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate method. In thissituation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 1-4 Separate mounting

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarizedantenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.

1.3 Radio Link FormsThe OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards andODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.

Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 980

Radio Link Form Control,Switching, andTiming Board

IF Board ODU

Low-capacity PDHmicrowave

CSHN IF1 Low capacity forPDH ODU

SDH/PDHmicrowave

CSHN IF1 Standard powerODU or high powerODU

High-capacity SDHmicrowave

CSHN ISU2 Standard powerODU or high powerODU

High-capacity SDHmicrowavesupporting XPIC

CSHN ISX2 Standard powerODU or high powerODU

Hybrid/Packetmicrowave

CSHN IFU2/ISU2 Standard powerODU or high powerODU



1-7

Radio Link Form Control,Switching, andTiming Board

IF Board ODU

Hybrid/Packetmicrowavesupporting XPIC

CSHN IFX2/ISX2 Standard powerODU or high powerODU




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

2 Chassis

About This Chapter

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is a 5U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios andon several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,cabinets, and surfaces.

2.3 Air FlowAn IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.

2.4 IDU LabelsProduct nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, andother types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhereto the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in orderto avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis


2-1

2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.

Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980.

Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980

2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,cabinets, and surfaces.

The IDU 980 can be installed:l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinetl In a 600 mm ETSI cabinetl In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinetl In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

2 ChassisOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System



Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

l In a 19-inch open rackl In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment

2.3 Air FlowAn IDU 980 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.

Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 980 chassis.

Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 980 chassis

2.4 IDU LabelsProduct nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, andother types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhereto the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in orderto avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.



2-3

Label DescriptionTable 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labelsmay vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.

Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description

ESD protectionlabel

Indicates that theequipment issensitive to staticelectricity.

Grounding label Indicates thegrounding positionof the IDU chassis.

Fan warning label Warns you not totouch fan leaveswhen the fan isrotating.

High temperaturewarning label

Indicates that theboard surfacetemperature mayexceed 70°C whenthe ambienttemperature ishigher than 55°C.Wear protectivegloves to handlethe board.

Power caution label Instructs you toread relatedinstructions beforeperforming anypower-relatedtasks.For details, seeLabels in 3.14.4Front Panel.

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Qualification cardlabel

Indicates that theequipment hasbeen qualitychecked.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Label Label Name Description

RoHS label Indicates that theequipmentcomplies with therelatedrequirementsspecified in theRoHS directive.

Product nameplatelabel

Indicates theproduct name andcertification.

PULL

Operation guidancelabel

Instructs you toslightly pull theswitch leveroutwards beforesetting the switchto the "I" or "O"position.

Label PositionFigure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980.



2-5

Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 980 labels

! 22kg(48.41b)

CAUTION

Hazardous moving parts,keep fingers and other body parts away.严禁在风扇旋转时接触扇叶！

WARNING-48V OUTPUTTURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3 Boards

About This Chapter

The IDU 980 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timingboards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fanboards.

3.1 Board AppearanceThe dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.

3.2 Board ListThe IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.

3.3 CSHNThe CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.

3.4 IF1The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.5 IFU2The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses theDC-I power distribution mode.

3.6 IFX2The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7 ISU2The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio modeat the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8 ISX2The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I powerdistribution mode.

3.9 EM6T/EM6FThe EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and twoGE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 3 Boards


3-1

GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFPmodules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports onthe EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.

3.10 SL1DThe SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.

3.11 ML1/MD1The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 serviceprocessing board.

3.12 SP3S/SP3DThe SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohmtributary board.

3.13 AUXThe AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can houseonly one AUX.

3.14 PIUThe PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of whichaccesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

3.15 FANThe FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3 BoardsOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System



Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.1 Board AppearanceThe dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.

NOTEThe depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Board AppearanceFigure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 980 chassis.

Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

Bar CodeThe front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers helpyou remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.

Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code

②Internal code

③④

Board versionBoard nameBoard feature code

①

0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01① ② ③ ④



3-3

NOTEOnly the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP modulebeing used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate theimpedance of E1 ports.

3.2 Board ListThe IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.

Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout

Slot 15 (CSHN)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT)

Slot 13 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT)

Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 20 (CSHN)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

NOTE

“EXT” represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-1 List of IDU boards

BoardAcronym

BoardName Valid Slot Description

CSHN Hybridcontrol,switching,and timingboard

Slot 15/20 l Supports the TDM cross-connectfunction, provides 128x128 VC-4 higherorder cross-connections and VC-12/VC-3lower order cross-connections equivalentto 32x32 VC-4s.

l Supports the 22 Gbit/s packet switchingfunction.

l Performs system communications andcontrol.

l Processes clocks and provides one clockinput/output interface.

l Provides one network managementinterface, one network management serialport, and one NE cascading interface.

l Uses the SFP module to provide twoSTM-1 or STM-4 optical interfaces.

l Provides two GE interfaces (Each GEinterface can use an RJ45 electricalinterface or an SFP optical interfaceindependently.)

ISU2 Universal IFboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides one IF interfacel Supports integrated IP microwave and

SDH microwave. The supported servicemodes can be Native E1+Ethernet, NativeSTM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1).

l Supports the AM function.l Supports highly efficient encapsulation

technology

ISX2 UniversalXPIC IFboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides one IF interfacel Supports integrated IP microwave and

SDH microwave. The supported servicemodes can be Native E1+Ethernet, NativeSTM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or2xSTM-1).

l Supports the XPIC function.l Supports the AM function.l Supports highly efficient encapsulation

technology



3-5

BoardAcronym


IF1 SDH IFboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides one IF interface.l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave

solution and the STM-1-based SDHmicrowave solution.

IFU2 Universal IFboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides one IF interface.l Supports the integrated IP microwave.l Supports the AM function.

IFX2 UniversalXPIC IFboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides one IF interface.l Supports the integrated IP microwave.l Supports the XPIC function.l Supports the AM function.

SL1D 2xSTM-1interfaceboard

Slot 1 to slot14

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1optical interfaces.

EM6T 6 Port RJ45Ethernet/GigabitEthernetInterfaceBoard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that

are compatible with the FE electricalinterface.

EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +2 Port SFPFastEthernet/GigabitEthernetInterfaceBoard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE

optical or electrical interfaces. The GEelectrical interfaces are compatible withthe FE electrical interfaces.

ML1 16xE1(smart)tributaryboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohmsmart E1 interfaces.

l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, andfractional E1.

MD1 32xE1(smart)tributaryboard

Slot 1 to slot14

l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohmsmart E1 interfaces.

l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, andfractional E1.

SP3S 16xE1tributaryboard

Slot 1 to slot14

Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDME1 interfaces.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

BoardAcronym


SP3D 32xE1tributaryboard

Slot 1 to slot14

Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohmTDM E1 interfaces.

AUX Auxiliaryinterfaceboard

Slot 1 to slot14

Provides one orderwire interface, oneasynchronous data interface, onesynchronous data interface, and four-inputand two-output external alarm interfaces.

PIU Power board Slot 26 orslot 27

Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.

FAN Fan board Slot 28 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSHNThe CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, systemcontrol and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE serviceports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.

3.3.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and managementports on the front panel.

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.

3.3.6 Valid SlotsThe CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on theCSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logicalslots on the NMS.

3.3.7 Types of SFP ModulesThe GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFPmodules.

3.3.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.

3.3.9 Technical Specifications



3-7

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and waysideservice port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.

3.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, systemcontrol and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE serviceports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.

Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CSHN supports.

Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports

Function and Feature CSHN

Basic functions Switchingcapability

Supports 22 Gbit/s packet switching function.

Cross-connectcapacity

l Supports higher order cross-connections, which areequivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.

l Supports full time division lower order cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at theVC-12 or VC-3 level.

System controlandcommunication

Manages, monitors, and controls the running status ofthe IDU, and works as a communication service unitbetween the NMS and boards to help the NMS tocontrol and manage the NE.

Clock Clocksynchronizationat the physicallayer

Provides the system clock and frame headers forservice signals and overhead signals for the otherboards when tracing an appropriate clock source.The traced clock source can be any of the following:l External clockl SDH line clockl PDH tributary clockl Clock at the air interfacel Synchronous Ethernet clock

Clockprotection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:l Protection based on clock source prioritiesl Protection by running the SSM protocoll Protection by running the extended SSM protocoll 1+1 backup for the system clock

DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 33 DCCs.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCNbandwidth is configurable.

Protection 1+1 hot backup Supported

MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported

See Table 3-3.

QoS functions Supported

See Table 3-4.

Ethernet service functions Supported

See Table 3-5.

STM-1/4 service functions Supported

See Table 3-6.

Auxiliary portsandmanagementports

Ethernet NMport

1

NM serial port 1

NE cascadingport

1

OM Warm reset andcold reset

Supported

In-serviceFPGA loading

Supported

Boardmanufacturinginformationquery

Supported

Boardtemperaturedetection

Supported

Board voltagedetection

Supported

Detection ofindicators on theother boards

Supported

Hot swappingfunction

Supported

Pluggable CFcard

Supported



3-9

The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service boardto implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-3 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions


MPLS tunnel Setup mode Static LSPs

Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS

OAM Supports the following OAM functions:l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions

PWE3 Servicecategories

Supports the following service categories:l CES servicesl ATM PWE3 servicesl ETH PWE3 services

Setup mode Static PWs

Protection 1:1 PW APS

OAM Supports the following OAM functions:l VCCVl PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.l PW ping and PW traceroute functions

MS-PW Supported

Configurablebandwidth

Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service boardto implement QoS functions. Table 3-4 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-4 QoS functions

Function andFeature

CSHN

DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB serviceclasses for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLANpriorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)carried by the packets.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Function andFeature

CSHN

Ethernet complextraffic classification

Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLANpriorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carriedby packets.

CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or trafficflow.

Queue schedulingpolicies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies:l SPl WRRl SP+WRR

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHN works with its packet switching unit toimplement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-5 provides details about these functions.

Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions


Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works withthe packet switching unit to process the received GEservice signals.

Portspecifications

GE electricalport (fixed):10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

2

GE port: SFPoptical module(1000BASE-SXand 1000BASE-LX)

2

Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplexand auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernetport.

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,or hybrid.



3-11


Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame lengthof 9600 bytes.

Traffic controlfunction

Supports the port-based traffic control function thatcomplies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:l E-Line services based on portsl E-Line services based on port+VLANl E-Line services carried by QinQ linksl E-Line services carried by PWs

E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridgesl E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridgesl E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG Inter-boardLAG

Supported

Intra-boardLAG

Supported

ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-TG.8032/Y.1344.

Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only theCIST. The MSTP protocol provides functionsequivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.

LPT Supported

ETH OAM IEEE 802.1agOAM

Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions:l Management of OAM maintenance pointsl Continuity check testl Loopback testl Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ahOAM

Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions:l OAM automatic discoveryl Link performance monitoringl Fault detectionl Remote loopback testl Loopback detection and blocking of a port being

looped back

RMON Supported




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFPelectrical module)

Clockprotection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:l Protection based on clock source prioritiesl Protection by running the SSM protocoll Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN Inband DCN Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet portsl Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset Supported

Query of SFPmoduleinformation

Supported

Table 3-6 provides details about the STM-1/4 service functions that the CSHN supports.

Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions


Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals.

Service categories l STM-1l STM-4

Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2l The performance characteristics of the ports comply

with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of theports complies with ITU-T G.823.

DCN Outband DCN Supported

Protection Linearmultiplexsectionprotection(MSP)

Supported

Ring MSP Supported

SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.



3-13


Clockprotection


OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 pathsl Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports

Cold reset andwarm reset

Supported

Setting of theon/off state of alaser

Supported

ALS functiona Supported

Query of SFPoptical moduleinformation

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.

l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two secondsand stops emission for 60 seconds.

l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.3.3 Working PrincipleThe CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN

Clock/Time port

Ethernet NM portNM serial port

NE cascading port

Backplane

System control and communication unit

Cross-connect unit

Clock unitClock signal provided to other boards

External clock signal

STM-1/4 signal processing unit

STM-1/4 signal

Control bus

VC-4 signal

-48 V 1

-48 V 23.3 V power supplied to the

other units on the board

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Packet switching unit

GE signal access unit

GE signal GE bus

Clock signal received from other boards

Clock signal received from

the service unit on the

board

Ethernet service board/Packet switching unit of the paired board

TDM service unit/Cross-connect unit of the paired board

FE signalSystem control and communication unit

VC-4 signal

GE bus

Power supply

unit

System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. Thesystem control and communication unit performs the following functions:

l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms andperformance events using the control bus.

l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms andperformance events using the control bus.

l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal tothe SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.

l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernetservice packets.

l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using thecontrol bus.



3-15

l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic controlunit.

l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascadingport.

l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card withthe bus.

l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enablesFPGA loading.

l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit– Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

l The system control and communication unit on a CSHN board communicates with thesystem control and communication unit on the paired CSHN board by carrying FE signalsover the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup betweenpaired boards is achieved.

Packet Switching UnitThe packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).

l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board,the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are deliveredby the system control and communication unit.

l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a serviceboard, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control andcommunication unit for processing. After processing, the system control andcommunication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. Thepacket switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or theservice board.

l The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit ofthe paired board over the GE pass-through bus.

Cross-Connect UnitThe cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functionalblock diagram of the cross-connect unit.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Source TDMservice unit Higher order

cross-connectmoduleHOXC

Lower ordercross-connect

moduleLOXC

Sink TDMservice unit

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect moduleover VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connectmodule processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect modulegrooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower ordercross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the servicesback to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processesthe services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the pairedboard over the TDM pass-through bus.

GE Signal Access UnitThe GE signal access unit allows access of two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signalsand works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions.

l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, andserial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extractsframed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unitalso performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.

l In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRCcodes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port orthe GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.

STM-1/4 Signal Processing UnitThe STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals,extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, andprocesses pointers.

l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the followingfunctions:



3-17

– Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion.

– Restores and descrambles clock data.

– Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indicationsignals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit.

l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the followingfunctions:

– Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit andprocesses clock signals.

– Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes.

– Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.

Clock Unit

The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clocksources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of thephase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signalsand overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and theother boards.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supplyrequired by the chips of the other units on the local board.

3.3.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, buttons, service ports, latches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and managementports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN

2 3 4 5 6 7

CF RCV RST

CSH

N

STA

TP

RO

GS

YN

CS

RV

AC

TLO

S1

LOS

2LI

NK

1A

CT1

LIN

K2

AC

T2C

RIT

MA

JM

IN

GE SYS LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2

RX

STM-1/4

1 2 GE1

GE2

TX

1 2 1 2

GE

1

1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Clock ports, auxiliaryports, and management ports

4. STM-1/4 optical ports(using SFP optical modules)

5. GE optical service ports(using SFP optical modules)

6. GE electrical service ports(fixed)

7. Latches - -




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Indicators

Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN

Indicator State Meaning

STAT On (green) The board is working properly.

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the

board.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at100 ms intervals

Software is being loaded to the boardduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.

Blinks on (green) and off at300 ms intervals

The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered onor being reset, the upper layersoftware is being initialized.

l When the board is running, thesoftware is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.

On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.

On (red) The clock source is lost or a clockswitchover occurs.

SRV On (green) The system is working properly.

On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in thesystem.



3-19


Off There is no power supplied to the system.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port on the line is free ofR_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port on the line is freeof R_LOS alarms.

LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port isworking properly.

Off The connection at the GE1 port isinterrupted.

ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received atthe GE1 port.

Off No data is being transmitted or receivedat the GE1 port.





CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.

MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.

MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports

Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports

Port Description Connector Type

NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port

RJ45EXT NE cascading port

CLK/TOD1 External clock port(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),external time port 1 , or wayside E1 port

MON/TOD2 RS485 monitoring port/Time port 2

NOTE

l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparentlytransmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.

l The RS485 monitoring port and time port 2 share one port physically.

l The RS485 monitoring port is reserved and is not used in this product version.

l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588protocol) and are not used in this product version.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.

Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port

Port Pin Signal

NMS/COM

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

4 Grounding end of the NM serial port

5 Receive end of the NM serial port

6 Receiving data (-)



3-21

Port Pin Signal

7 Not defined

8 Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port Pin Signal

EXT

1 Transmitting data (+)

2 Transmitting data (-)

3 Receiving data (+)

6 Receiving data (-)

4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTEThe EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmitdata through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-11 provides status explanation for theseindicators.

Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector


LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receivingdata.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no externalEthernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, anEthernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeatedresetting of NEs.

Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

LAN

CF RCV RSTC

SHN

STA

TPR

OG

SYN

CSR

VAC

TLO

S1LO

S2LI

NK

1AC

T1LI

NK

2AC

T2C

RIT

MAJ

MIN


RX

STM-1/4

1 2 GE1

GE2

TX

1 2 1 2

GE

CF RCV RST

CSH

N

STA

TPR

OG

SYN

CSR

VAC

TLO

S1LO

S2LI

NK

1AC

T1LI

NK

2AC

T2C

RIT

MAJ

MIN


RX

STM-1/4

1 2 GE1

GE2

TX

1 2 1 2

GE

The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the sameRJ45 connector. Table 3-12 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.The CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or moremodes at the same time.

Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port

Pin Working Mode

ExternalClock

ExternalTimeInput(1PPS +TimeInformation)

ExternalTimeOutput(1PPS +TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input(DCLS)

ExternalTimeOutput(DCLS)

1 CLKreceiving (-)

Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

2 CLKreceiving (+)

Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

3 Not defined 1PPS signalinput (-)(RS-422level)

1PPS signaloutput (-)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal input(-)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal output(-)(RS-422level)

4 CLKtransmitting(-)

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

5 CLKtransmitting(+)

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend



3-23

Pin Working Mode

ExternalClock





6 Not defined 1PPS signalinput (+)(RS-422level)

1PPS signaloutput (+)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal input(+)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal output(+)(RS-422level)

7 Not defined Timeinformationinput (-)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (-)(RS-422level)

Not defined Not defined

8 Not defined Timeinformationinput (+)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (+)(RS-422level)

Not defined Not defined

The RS485 monitoring port and the external time port share the MON/TOD2 port physically.Table 3-13 provides details about the pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port.

Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port

Pin Working Mode





RS485MonitoringPort

1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Pin Working Mode





RS485MonitoringPort

3 1PPS signalinput (-)(RS-422level)

1PPS signaloutput (-)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal input(-)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal output(-)(RS-422level)

RS485receivingsignal (-)(RS-422level)

4 Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

5 Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

Groundingend

6 1PPS signalinput (+)(RS-422level)

1PPS signaloutput (+)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal input(+)(RS-422level)

DCLS timesignal output(+)(RS-422level)

RS485receivingsignal (+)(RS-422level)

7 Timeinformationinput (-)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (-)(RS-422level)

Not defined Not defined RS485transmittingsignal (-)(RS-422level)

8 Timeinformationinput (+)(RS-422level)

Timeinformationoutput (+)(RS-422level)

Not defined Not defined RS485transmittingsignal (+)(RS-422level)

Buttons

Table 3-14 Buttons

Button Name Description

CF RCV CF configuration restorationbutton

After this button is pressed and held for8 seconds, the board automaticallyrestores the NE database from the CFcard.



3-25

Button Name Description

RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warmreset is performed on the board.

LAMP Indicator test button After this button is pressed, theindicators on all the boards of the NEbecome on.

LatchesThere is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/protection switching.

Service Ports

Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN


2xSTM-1 STM-1/4 optical port LC SFP optical module

2xGE GE optical port LC SFP optical module

2xGE GE electrical ports (fixed) RJ45

NOTE

l The four GE ports share two GE channels. That is, the GE1 ports share one GE channel and the GE2ports share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports that share one GE channel can transmit/receive services at one time.

l On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFPoptical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TXrepresents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.

Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module

TX RX

The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-16and Table 3-17 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 1000BASE-T

Signal Function

1 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)

2 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)

3 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)

4 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)

5 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)

6 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)

7 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)

8 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin 1000BASE-T

Signal Function

1 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)

2 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)

3 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)

4 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)

5 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)

6 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)

7 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)

8 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the sameas that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.

NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), softwarepackages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the systemcontrol, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF cardwill be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs



3-27

on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backupfunction.

NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timingboard during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not neededto synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If thesystem control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, theSWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

O

ND

IP

12

34

1

2

1. DIP switches 2. CF card

Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning

1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 Indicates that the board works with thewatchdog enabled.

0 0 0 1 The value is reserved.

0 0 1 0 Indicates that a memory self-check isrunning.

0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.

0 1 0 0 Indicates that the board works with thewatchdog disabled and a full memory checkis running.

0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning

1 2 3 4

0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.

0 1 1 1 The value is reserved. (By default, this valueindicates that the board works with thewatchdog enabled.)

1 0 0 0 The value is reserved. (By default, this valueindicates that the board works with thewatchdog enabled.)

1 0 0 1 Restores the data of the CF card.

1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.

1 0 1 1 Erases databases.

1 1 0 0 Erases NE software, including patches.

1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software, includingpatches.

1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.

1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for the boardmanufacturing information.

NOTEa: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When aDIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.3.6 Valid SlotsThe CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on theCSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logicalslots on the NMS.



3-29

Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 7 (EXT)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Slot 20 (CSHN)

Slot 15 (CSHN)

Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN

Slot 15 (CSHN) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 17 (EG2D)

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 7 (EXT)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Slot 20 (CSHN) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 22 (EG2D)

Table 3-19 Slot allocation

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slot 15 > Slot 20

3.3.7 Types of SFP ModulesThe GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFPmodules.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports

Part Number Type

34060286 1000BASE-SX

34060473 1000BASE-LX

Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports

Part Number Type

34060287 Ie-1

34060276 S-1.1

34060281 L-1.1

34060282 L-1.2

34060277 S-4.1

34060280 L-4.1

34060284 L-4.2

3.3.8 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.

Related ReferencesA.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingA.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableA.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusA.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralA.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortA.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortA.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceA.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlA.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced AttributesA.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesA.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadA.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs



3-31

3.3.9 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and waysideservice port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching CapacityThe CSHN supports a 22 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capabilityl Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.l Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.

Ethernet Port PerformanceEthernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide thespecifications of GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, and FE electrical ports.

Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 1000

Classification code 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode opticalfiber

Single-mode opticalfiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFPmodules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance

Item Performance


Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFPmodules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.



3-33

STM-4 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The followingtable provides the typical performance of the interface.


Item Performance


Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2

Fiber type Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80

Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2

Minimum receiver sensitivity(dBm)

-28 -28 -28

Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different typesof SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.

Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item Performance

External synchronizationsource

2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)

Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Pull-in and pull-out ranges

Noise generation

Noise tolerance

Noise transfer




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Item Performance

Transient response andholdover performance

Mechanical Behavior

Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance

Dimensions (H x W x D) 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm

Weight 1.60 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 36.6 W

3.4 IF1The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the IF1.

3.4.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same asthe physical slots.

3.4.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

3.4.7 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IF1 is SL91.



3-35

3.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-28 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.

Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports

Function and Feature IF1

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.l Provides management channels to the ODU.l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.

Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection

Supported

N+1 protection Supported

SNCP Supported

License Supports control on the air interface capacity by usingthe license file.

Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface

Clockprotection

Supports the following clock protection schemes:l Protection based on clock source prioritiesl Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported

only in SDH radio mode)l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

(supported only in SDH radio mode)

DCN Inband DCN Not supported

Outband DCN l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that iscomposed of one DCC byte if the capacity is lessthan 16xE1.

l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that iscomposed of three DCC bytes if the capacity isequal to or more than 16xE1.

l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that iscomposed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, ortwelve DCC bytes.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Function and Feature IF1

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops at IF portsl Outloops at IF portsl Inloops at composite portsl Outloops at composite ports

Warm reset andcold reset

Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Board powerdetection

Supported

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the IF1.



3-37


Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1Backplane

Cross-connect unitI F

IF processing unit



MODEM unit

Power supply

unit

SMODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board

Microwave frame signal

HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead bus

Control bus

System clock signal

-48 V

+3.3 V

-48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board


Logic processing unit

MU

X/D

EM

UX

unit

Com

binerInterface

unit

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1

Step Function Unit Processing Flow

1 Combiner interfaceunit

Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signalsand microwave service signals.

2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system

control and communication unit.

3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through theautomatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters signals.l Performs A/D conversion.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific

alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOFalarms.

l Performs descrambling.l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms

and performance events.l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and

generates specific alarms and performance events.l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports the SSM status to the system control andcommunication unit.

l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returnedmicrowave messages and reports the changes to thesystem control and communication unit over thecontrol bus.

l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and Kbytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overheadsignal to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specificperformance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signalsto the logic processing unit.



3-39


MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio modeand generates specific alarms and performance events.

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radiomode and generates specific alarms and performanceevents.

l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radiomode and generates specific alarms and performanceevents.

l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returnedmicrowave messages in PDH radio mode and reportsthe changes to the system control and communicationunit over the control bus.

l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes inmicrowave frames in PDH radio mode and transmitsthe overhead signals to the logic processing unit.

l Adjusts TU pointers.l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio

mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.

6 Logic processingunit

l Processes clock signals.l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and

communication unit.l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUXunit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequentprocessing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1



l Processes clock signals.l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/

s overhead signals.l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

from the cross-connect unit.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


2 MUX/DEMUX unit(for SDH microwavesignal processing)

l Sets higher order path overheads.l Sets AU pointers.l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit(for PDH microwavesignal processing)

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio

mode.

3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.l Performs digital modulation.

4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.l Performs analog modulation.

5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from thesystem control and communication unit.


Combines the ODU control signals, microwave servicesignals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits thecombined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over thecontrol bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to theCPU unit over the control bus.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the systemcontrol and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the powersupply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-DC conversion.

l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

Clock Unit

This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clocksignals to the other units on the board.



3-41


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1

PULL

IF1 IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TS

RV

LIN

KO

DU

RM

TA

CT


IF1

Indicators

Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1


STAT On (green) The board is workingproperly.


Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power

supplied to the board.

SRV On (green) The services are normal.

On (red) A critical or major alarmoccurs in the services.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.

LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.

ODU On (green) The ODU is workingproperly.

On (red) l The ODU is reportingcritical or major alarms.

l There is no powersupplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minoralarms.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Blinks on (yellow) and off at300 ms intervals

The antennas are not aligned.

RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment isreporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is freeof defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as theactive one.

l In an unprotected system,the board has beenactivated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system,the board works as thestandby one.

l In an unprotected system,the board is not activated.

Ports

Table 3-32 Description of the Ports

Port Description Connector Type CorrespondingCable

IF IF port TNC IF jumperb

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need tofirst pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit isopen. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches thislevel, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.



3-43

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before theIF cable is removed.

The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards beforethe switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.4.5 Valid SlotsThe IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same asthe physical slots.

Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IF1)

Slot 11 (IF1)

Slot 9 (IF1)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IF1)

Slot 12 (IF1)

Slot 10 (IF1)

Slot 7 (IF1)

Slot 5 (IF1)

Slot 8 (IF1)

Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1)

Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 2 (IF1)

Slot 20

Slot 15

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slotnumber of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to theODU plus 50.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS

Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IF1)

Slot 11 (IF1)

Slot 9 (IF1)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IF1)

Slot 12 (IF1)

Slot 10 (IF1)

Slot 7 (IF1)

Slot 5 (IF1)

Slot 8 (IF1)

Slot 6 (IF1)

Slot 3 (IF1)

Slot 1 (IF1)

Slot 4 (IF1)

Slot 2 (IF1)


Slot 57 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU)

Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 63 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU)

Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 60 (ODU)


Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 8and 10 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 12 and14

NOTEUse two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots 12 and 14 are pairedslots respectively.

3.4.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related ReferencesA.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute



3-45

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs


Radio Work Modes

Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)

Service Capacity Modulation Mode Channel Spacing (MHz)

4xE1 QPSK 7

4xE1 16QAM 3.5

8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)

8xE1 16QAM 7

16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)

16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)

22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)

26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)

35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)

44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)

53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)

STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. Thechannel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

IF Performance

Table 3-35 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal Transmit frequencyof the IF board(MHz)

350




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Item Performance

Receive frequency ofthe IF board (MHz)

140

ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequencyof the IF board(MHz)

5.5


10

Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signalsl Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH microwave signals

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.72 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption: < 12 W

3.5 IFU2The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses theDC-I power distribution mode.



3-47

3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.


3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.5.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.


3.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

Table 3-38 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work withthe packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports

Function and Feature IFU2


Radio type Integrated IP radioNOTE

The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radioand the Packet radio.

Service categories Native E1 + EthernetNOTE

Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packetservices that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


AM Supported

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with nativeTDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.


Supported


SNCP for TDMservices

Supported

License Air interfacecapacity license

Supported

AM license Supported

Clock at thephysical layer

Clock source Clock at the air interface

Clockprotection


DCN Inband DCN Supported.The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCCbytes.

Ethernet service functions See Table 3-39.

MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions providedin the section for the system control, switching, andtiming board.PWE3 functions

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops and outloops at IF portsl Inloops and outloops at composite portsl Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH portsNOTE

An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF boardoperating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receiveor transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IPradio mode.


Supported



3-49



Supported

PRBS BER testat IF ports

Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports


Ethernetservices

E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:l E-Line services based on portsl E-Line services based on port+VLANl E-Line services carried by QinQ linksl E-Line services carried by PWs



OAM Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ahOAM.

LAG Supported


QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in thesection for the system control, switching, and timingboard.

RMON Supported




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.


Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

MU

X/D

EM

UX

unit

Backplane

Cross-connect unit

I F



MODEM unit

Power supply

unit

SMODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board


HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead bus

GE busPacket switching unit

Control bus

Ethernet processing

unit




+3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit

System clock signal

-48 V1

-48 V2

+3.3 V

Logic processing

unit

IF processing unit

Com

biner interface unit


Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2








3-51


3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.l Performs A/D conversion.


alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IPradio mode and generates specific alarms andperformance events.

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in IntegratedIP radio mode and generates specific alarms andperformance events.

l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IPradio mode and generates specific alarms andperformance events.

l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returnedmicrowave messages in Integrated IP radio mode andreports the changes to the system control andcommunication unit over the control bus.

l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwirebytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCCbytes in microwave frames and transmits the overheadsignals to the logic processing unit.

l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio modeto the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmitsthe VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwaveframs and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6 Ethernet processingunit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/DEMUX unit.

l Sends the processed signals to the main and standbypacket switching units.


l Processes clock signals.l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control

and communication unit.l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2



l Processes clock signals.l Processes overhead signals.l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals



l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP

radio mode.l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.


6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.l Performs analog modulation.l Filters signals.l Amplifies signals.







Power Supply Unit




3-53


l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the powersupply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 afterperforming DC-DC conversion.

Clock UnitThis unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clocksignals to the other units on the board.


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2

IFU

2

PULL

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TSR

VLI

NK

OD

UR

MT

ACT


IFU

2

Indicators

Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2




Off l The board is not working.l The board is not created.l There is no power supplied to the board.


On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.



ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or majoralarms.

l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Blinks on (yellow)and off at 300 msintervals


RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.

l In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.

l In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.

Ports





NOTE



LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.



3-55




3.5.5 Valid SlotsThe IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFU2)

Slot 11 (IFU2)

Slot 9 (IFU2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IFU2)

Slot 12 (IFU2)

Slot 10 (IFU2)

Slot 7 (IFU2)

Slot 5 (IFU2)

Slot 8 (IFU2)

Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2)

Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 2 (IFU2)

Slot 20

Slot 15





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFU2)

Slot 11 (IFU2)

Slot 9 (IFU2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IFU2)

Slot 12 (IFU2)

Slot 10 (IFU2)

Slot 7 (IFU2)

Slot 5 (IFU2)

Slot 8 (IFU2)

Slot 6 (IFU2)

Slot 3 (IFU2)

Slot 1 (IFU2)

Slot 4 (IFU2)

Slot 2 (IFU2)


Slot 57 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU)

Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 63 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU)

Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 60 (ODU)


Item Description



3.5.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.



3-57

Related ReferencesA.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesA.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes

Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)

Channel Spacing(MHz) Modulation Mode

MaximumNumber of E1s inHybridMicrowave

Native EthernetThroughput(Mbit/s)

7 QPSK 5 9 to 12

7 16QAM 10 20 to 24

7 32QAM 12 24 to 29

7 64QAM 15 31 to 37

7 128QAM 18 37 to 44

7 256QAM 21 43 to 51

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 23

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 48

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 76

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 90

14 (13.75) 256QAM 43 90 to 104

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 108 to 125




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)




28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 75 208 to 240

56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 310

56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 420

NOTE



l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames.

l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidthremaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided forEthernet services.

IF Performance


Item Performance


350


140



5.5


10



3-59

Item Performance




Item Performance

Encoding mode LDPC encoding


Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

Dimensions (H x Wx D)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.79 kg


3.6 IFX2The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interferencecancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.6.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on thefront panel.

3.6.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.6.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.


3.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interferencecancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.

Table 3-49 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.

Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports

Function and Feature IFX2


Radio type Integrated IP radioNOTE

Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packetradio.

Service categories Native E1 + EthernetNOTE

Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packetservices that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM Supported

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in whichnative TDM services are E1 services

XPIC Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.



3-61



Supported


SNCP for TDMservices

Supported


Supported



Clock source Clock at an air interface

Clockprotection


DCN Inband DCN Supported.The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCCbytes.

Ethernet service features See Table 3-50.

MPLS functions See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions thatthe system control, switching, and timing boardsupports.PWE3 functions

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops and outloops at IF portsl Inloops and outloops at multiplexing portsl Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH portsNOTE

An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF boardoperating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receiveor transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IPradio mode.


Supported


Supported


Supported




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Supported


Supported


Supported

Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports


Ethernetservices




ETH-OAM Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ahOAM.

LAG Supported


QoS See the description of the QoS functions that the systemcontrol, switching, and timing board supports.

RMON Supported

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.



3-63


Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2Backplane

Cross-connect unit

IF



MODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board


HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead bus


Control bus

Ethernet processing

unitXPIC signal

SMODEM unit





System clock signal

-48 V1

-48 V2

+3.3 V

Paired XPIC board

Power supply

unit

Logic processing

unit

MU

X/D

EM

UX

unit

IF processing

unit

Com

biner interface

unit


Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to twochannels of signals.– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of

filtered signals and transmits the converted signalsto the MODEM unit.

– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as theXPIC signals.

l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signalstransmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits theconverted signals to the MODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IFsignals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as referencesignals.

l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific

alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IPradio mode and generates specific alarms andperformance events.

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in IntegratedIP radio mode and generates specific alarms andperformance events.

l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IPradio mode and generates specific alarms.

l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returnedmicrowave messages in Integrated IP radio mode andreports the changes to the system control andcommunication unit over the control bus.

l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSMbytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio modeand transmits the overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio modeto the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmitsthe VC-4s to the logic processing unit.

l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwaveframes in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits tothe Ethernet processing unit.






3-65






NOTE



Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2






l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.l Processes GE signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP

radio mode.l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and

microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)




Power Supply Unit



l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the powersupply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 afterperforming DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit



Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2

IFX

2

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TSR

VLI

NK

OD

UR

MT

ACT


IFX

2

X-IN X-OUTPULL XPIC

Indicators

Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2


XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal isnormal.

On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.



3-67


Off The XPIC function isdisabled.























Issue 03 (2011-04-10)




Ports

Table 3-54 Description of the ports




X-IN XPIC signal inputport

SMA XPIC cable

X-OUT XPIC signal outputport

SMA

NOTE







3.6.5 Valid SlotsThe IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.



3-69

Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFX2)

Slot 11 (IFX2)

Slot 9 (IFX2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IFX2)

Slot 12 (IFX2)

Slot 10 (IFX2)

Slot 7 (IFX2)

Slot 5 (IFX2)

Slot 8 (IFX2)

Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2)

Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 2 (IFX2)

Slot 20

Slot 15





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (IFX2)

Slot 11 (IFX2)

Slot 9 (IFX2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (IFX2)

Slot 12 (IFX2)

Slot 10 (IFX2)

Slot 7 (IFX2)

Slot 5 (IFX2)

Slot 8 (IFX2)

Slot 6 (IFX2)

Slot 3 (IFX2)

Slot 1 (IFX2)

Slot 4 (IFX2)

Slot 2 (IFX2)


Slot 57 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU)

Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 63 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU)

Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 60 (ODU)


Item Description



NOTEOne IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.6.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.



3-71

Related ReferencesA.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesA.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes

Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)




28 (27.5) QPSK 19 41 to 48

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 84 to 97

28 (27.5) 32QAM 49 103 to 120

28 (27.5) 64QAM 63 130 to 150

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210

56 (55) QPSK 39 83 to 97

56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190

56 (55) 32QAM 75 210 to 245

56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 305

56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 410




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE





IF Performance


Item Performance


350


140



5.5


10




Item Performance



Supported



3-73

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.80 kg


3.7 ISU2The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio modeat the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.


3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.7.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.


3.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-60 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work withthe packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports

Function and Feature ISU2


Radio type l Integrated IP radiol SDH radioNOTE

The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radioand the Packet radio.

Service categories in Integrated IPradio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernetl Native STM-1 + EthernetNOTE


Service categories in SDH radiomode

l STM-1l 2xSTM-1

AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode

High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernetpackets and L3 IP packets.

E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with nativeTDM services being E1 services

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.

Link-levelprotection

1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection

Supported


LAG protectionat air interfaces

Supported

Service protection SNCP




Supported




3-75




Clockprotection


DCN Inband DCN Supported

Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCCbytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.

l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for eachchannel in SDH radio mode.

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops and outloops at IF portsl Inloops and outloops at composite ports


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports


Ethernetservices





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)





LAG Supported



RMON Supported

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.

NOTE

The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio modeand signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave framestructure and processed service categories.



3-77


Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2

Backplane

Cross-connect unit

IF

IF processing unit

Logic processing

unit

MU

X/D

EM

UX

unit

MO

DE

M unit

Com

biner interface unit

Power supply

unit

SMODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board


HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead bus


Control bus

-48 V2



System clock signalClock signal provided to the other units on the board

Ethernet

processing unit

+3.3 V

-48 V1





Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2






3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.l Performs A/D conversion.


alarms.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.


l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes inmicrowave frames and transmits to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions inVC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logicprocessing unit, if native TDM services in IntegratedIP radio mode are E1 services.

l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and thentransmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, ifnative TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode areSTM-1 services.









NOTE




3-79


Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2







3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that arefrom the logic processing unit, if native TDM servicesin Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.

l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from thelogic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if nativeTDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1services.

l Sets microwave frame overheads.l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,

and microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.












Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Power Supply Unit



l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the powersupply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 afterperforming DC-DC conversion.

Clock Unit



Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2

ISU

2

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TSR

VLI

NK

OD

UR

MT

ACT


ISU

2

PULL

Indicators

Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2










3-81

















Ports








Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE







3.7.5 Valid SlotsThe ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISU2)

Slot 11 (ISU2)

Slot 9 (ISU2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ISU2)

Slot 12 (ISU2)

Slot 10 (ISU2)

Slot 7 (ISU2)

Slot 5 (ISU2)

Slot 8 (ISU2)

Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2)

Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 2 (ISU2)

Slot 20

Slot 15




3-83

Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISU2)

Slot 11 (ISU2)

Slot 9 (ISU2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ISU2)

Slot 12 (ISU2)

Slot 10 (ISU2)

Slot 7 (ISU2)

Slot 5 (ISU2)

Slot 8 (ISU2)

Slot 6 (ISU2)

Slot 3 (ISU2)

Slot 1 (ISU2)

Slot 4 (ISU2)

Slot 2 (ISU2)


Slot 57 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU)

Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 63 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU)

Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 60 (ODU)


Item Description



3.7.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Related ReferencesA.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesA.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHsA.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes

Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)


STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode

MaximumNumber ofE1s in HybridMicrowave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

NotAccelerated

With L2BandwidthAccelerated

With L2+L3BandwidthAccelerated(IPv4)

7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22

7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44

7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54

7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67

7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80

7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44

14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89



3-85

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode



NotAccelerated



14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165

14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122

40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247

40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318

40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456

40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178

56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356

56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437

56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567

56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTEThe ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode isadopted.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode

Number ofSTM-1Services inHybridMicrowave


NotAccelerated



28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456

40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538

56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356

56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437

56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567

56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656

56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE





IF Performance


Item Performance


350


140




3-87

Item Performance


5.5


10




Item Performance



Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.60 kg


3.8 ISX2The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I powerdistribution mode.

3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and Features




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receivingXPIC reference signals.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.


3.8.5 Valid SlotsThe ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.8.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.


3.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, andsupplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receivingXPIC reference signals.

Table 3-73 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work withthe packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.

Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports

Function and Feature ISX2


Radio type l Integrated IP radiol SDH radioNOTE

The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radioand the Packet radio.



3-89


Service categories in Integrated IPradio mode

l Native E1 + Ethernetl Native STM-1 + EthernetNOTE


Service categories in SDH radiomode

l STM-1l 2xSTM-1

AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode

High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernetpackets and L3 IP packets.

E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with nativeTDM services being E1 services

XPIC Supported

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.

Link-levelprotection

1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection

Supported


LAG protectionat air interfaces

Supported

Native TDMservices

Servicecategories

E1 services and STM-1 services

Serviceprotection

SNCP




Supported




Clockprotection


DCN Inband DCN Supported




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCCbytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.

l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for eachchannel in SDH radio mode.

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops and outloops at IF portsl Inloops and outloops at composite ports


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported


Supported

Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports


Ethernetservices






3-91



LAG Supported



RMON Supported

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it servesas an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.

NOTE

The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio modeand signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave framestructure and processed service types.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2Backplane

Cross-connect unit

IF



MODEM unit

Clock unit

Logic control unit

ODU control signal

Paired board


HSM signal bus

Service bus

Overhead bus


Control bus

Ethernet processing

unitXPIC signal

SMODEM unit





System clock signal

-48 V1

-48 V2

+3.3 V

Paired XPIC board

Power supply

unit

Logic processing

unit

MU

X/D

EM

UX

unit

IF processing

unit

Com

biner interface

unit


Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2








3-93


3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to twochannels of signals.– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of

filtered signals and transmits the converted signalsto the MODEM unit.

– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as theXPIC signals.

l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signalstransmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits theconverted signals to the MODEM unit.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IFsignals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as referencesignals.

l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific

alarms.

5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.


l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwirebytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes inmicrowave frames and transmits to the logicprocessing unit.

l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions inVC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logicprocessing unit, if native TDM services in IntegratedIP radio mode are E1 services.

l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and thentransmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, ifnative TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode areSTM-1 services.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)









NOTE



Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2







3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that arefrom the logic processing unit, if native TDM servicesin Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.

l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from thelogic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if nativeTDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1services.

l Sets microwave frame overheads.l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,

and microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.




3-95






Control Signal ProcessingThe board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over thecontrol bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to theCPU unit over the control bus.


Power Supply UnitThe power supply unit performs the following functions:


l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the powersupply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 afterperforming DC-DC conversion.

Clock UnitThis unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clocksignals to the other units on the board.


Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2

ISX

2

IF I O

ODU-PWR

STA

TSR

VLI

NK

OD

UR

MT

ACT


ISX

2

X-IN X-OUTPULL XPIC




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Indicators

Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2























3-97







Ports





X-IN XPIC signal inputport

SMA XPIC cable

X-OUT XPIC signal outputport

SMA

NOTE



Labels

There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



3.8.5 Valid SlotsThe ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISX2)

Slot 11 (ISX2)

Slot 9 (ISX2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ISX2)

Slot 12 (ISX2)

Slot 10 (ISX2)

Slot 7 (ISX2)

Slot 5 (ISX2)

Slot 8 (ISX2)

Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2)

Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 2 (ISX2)

Slot 20

Slot 15




3-99

Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ISX2)

Slot 11 (ISX2)

Slot 9 (ISX2)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ISX2)

Slot 12 (ISX2)

Slot 10 (ISX2)

Slot 7 (ISX2)

Slot 5 (ISX2)

Slot 8 (ISX2)

Slot 6 (ISX2)

Slot 3 (ISX2)

Slot 1 (ISX2)

Slot 4 (ISX2)

Slot 2 (ISX2)


Slot 57 (ODU)

Slot 55 (ODU)

Slot 53 (ODU)

Slot 51 (ODU)

Slot 58 (ODU)

Slot 56 (ODU)

Slot 54 (ODU)

Slot 52 (ODU)

Slot 63 (ODU)

Slot 61 (ODU)

Slot 59 (ODU)

Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot 62 (ODU)

Slot 60 (ODU)


Item Description



NOTEOne ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in thesame column.

3.8.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Related ReferencesA.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeA.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeA.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesA.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHsA.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHsA.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes


Radio Work Modes

Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)


STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode



NotAccelerated



7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22

7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44

7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54

7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67

7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80

7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90

14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44



3-101

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode



NotAccelerated



14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89

14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110

14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140

14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165

14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189

28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89

28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178

28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230

28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283

28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333

28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122

40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247

40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318

40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456

40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538

56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178

56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356

56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437

56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567

56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656

56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTEThe ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode isadopted.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)

ChannelSpacing(MHz)

ModulationMode

Number ofSTM-1Services inHybridMicrowave


NotAccelerated



28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333

28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388

40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456

40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538

56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356

56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437

56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567

56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656

56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE





IF Performance


Item Performance


350


140




3-103

Item Performance


5.5


10




Item Performance



Supported

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Weight 0.60 kg


3.9 EM6T/EM6FThe EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and twoGE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: TheGE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFPmodules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports onthe EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.

3.9.1 Version Description




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GEsignals.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an exampleto describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

3.9.5 Valid SlotsThe EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on theNMS are the same as the physical slots.

3.9.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature coderefers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a featurecode.

3.9.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

3.9.8 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GEsignals.

Table 3-86 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6Fneeds to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing boardto implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports

Function and Feature Board

EM6T EM6F

Basic functions Receives/transmits FE/GE service signals and workswith the packet switching unit to process the receivedFE/GE service signals.

Portspecifications

FE electricalport

Provides four10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

Provides four10/100BASE-T(X) ports.



3-105


EM6T EM6F

GE port Provides two10/100/1000BASE-T(X)ports (fixed).

Provides two GE ports byusing SFP modules of anyof the following types:l 1000BASE-SXl 1000BASE-LXl 10/100/1000BASE-T

(X)

Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s

Port attributes Working mode l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, andauto-negotiation.

l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplexand auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,or hybrid.

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernetport.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame lengthof 9600 bytes.

Traffic controlfunction

Supports the port-based traffic control function thatcomplies with IEEE 802.3x.

Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:l E-Line services based on portsl E-Line services based on port+VLANl E-Line services based on port+QinQ


LAG Inter-boardLAG

Supported Supported

Intra-boardLAG

Supported Supported





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


EM6T EM6F


LPT Supported Supported

QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifyingPHB service classes for service flows based on theirQoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLANpriorities, DSCP values, and MPLS EXP values)carried by the packets.

Complex trafficclassification

Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports basedon C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP valuescarried by packets.

CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.

Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritizedqueue, or traffic flow.

Queueschedulingpolicies

Supports the following queue scheduling policies:l SPl WRRl SP+WRR

ETH OAM IEEE 802.1agOAM

Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions:l Management of OAM maintenance pointsl Continuity check testl Loopback testl Link trace test

IEEE 802.3ahOAM

Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions:l OAM automatic discoveryl Link performance monitoringl Fault detectionl Remote loopback testl Loopback detection and blocking of a port being

looped back

RMON Supported Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet(not supported by the SFPelectrical module)



3-107


EM6T EM6F

Clockprotection


DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.

OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet portsl Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports


Supported Supported


Supported Supported


Supported Supported


Supported Supported

Query of SFPmoduleinformation

Not supported Supported

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an exampleto describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram

GE signal access unit

FE signal access unit

Ethernet processing

unit

Logic processing

unit

Logic control unit

Clock unit

Backplane

Control bus of the board



GE signal

FE signal

Ethernet signal

Ethernet signal

Control bus

Control signal

Control signal

Power supply unit

System clock signal

-48 V1

-48 V2

+3.3 V

+3.3 V power supplied to the board


+3.3 V backup power supplied to the board


Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction


1 GE signal accessunit/FE signal accessunit

l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for GE/FE signals.l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,

CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurementfor frame signals.


l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet dataframes.

l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification

and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing

unit.



3-109



Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standbypacket switching units.


Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction


1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packetswitching unit.

l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernetprocessing unit.


l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and

queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports

based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet dataframes.

3 GE signal accessunit/FE signal accessunit

l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRCcode computing, and Ethernet performancemeasurement.

l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding forEthernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/FE signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal ProcessingThe Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management controlsignals.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over thecontrol bus on the board.

The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control andcommunication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commandsfrom the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the boardthrough the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, andthe alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unitalso through the logic control unit.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power suppliesinto +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V powerbackup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit


3.9.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T

EM

6 TST

AT

SR

V

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4GE2 EM

6 T

GE1PRO

G

Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F

EM

6FST

AT

SR

V

GE2 EM

6F

GE1LIN

K1LI

NK2

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4PR

OG

Indicators

Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F









3-111


On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.



Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.


The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the upper layer software isbeing initialized.

l When the board is running, the softwareis running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.

On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.The logic file or upper layer software is lostduring the running process of the board.The pluggable storage card is faulty.

LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and isnot receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmittingdata.

Off The GE1 port is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.




NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE ports.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Ports

Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T


FE1 FE service port

RJ45 Network cable

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE1 GE service port (fixedelectrical port)

GE2

Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F


FE1 FE service port

RJ45 5.8 Network CableFE2

FE3

FE4

GE1 GE service port (using SFPmodules)

RJ45 SFP electricalmodule or LC SFP

optical module

5.5 Fiber Jumper/5.8Network Cable

GE2

NOTEOn the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond toPORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6Fcomplies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. Allservice ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignmentsfor the ports, see Table 3-92 and Table 3-93. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, seeFigure 3-36.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1



3-113

Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode

Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T

Signal Function Signal Function

1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A(+)

2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A(-)

3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B(+)

4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C(+)

5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C(-)

6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B(-)

7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D(-)

Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode












Issue 03 (2011-04-10)





The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table3-94.

Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector


LINK (green) On The link is working properly.

Off The link is interrupted.

ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receivingdata.

Off The port is not transmitting orreceiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical moduleprovides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-37, in which TX represents thetransmit port and RX represents the receive port.

Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module

TX RX

Labels

There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.9.5 Valid SlotsThe EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on theNMS are the same as the physical slots.



3-115

Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 20

Slot 15

Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 7 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 8 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)

Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)


Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F

Item Description

Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 1 and 2 >Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 12 and 14 >Slots 11 and 13




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.9.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature coderefers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a featurecode.

Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F

Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of theModule

01 1000BASE-SX 34060286

02 1000BASE-LX 34060473

03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

3.9.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

Related ReferencesA.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesA.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlA.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesA.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 AttributesA.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.9.8 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE portperformance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of GE Optical PortsThe GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table liststhe main specifications for the GE optical ports.

Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface

Item Performance


Classification code 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX

Fiber type Multiple-mode opticalfiber

Single-mode opticalfiber

Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10



3-117

Item Performance

Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355

Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3

Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20

Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFPmodules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical PortsThe GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table liststhe main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)1000 (1000BASE-T)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)

Interface type RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical PortsThe FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table liststhe main specifications for the FE electrical ports.

Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance

Item Performance

Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)100 (100BASE-TX)

Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Item Performance

Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

EM6T EM6F


Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg

Power ConsumptionPower consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W

Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W

3.10 SL1DThe SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.

3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.

3.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.10.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board featurecode refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

3.10.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.

3.10.8 Technical Specifications



3-119

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

3.10.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Table 3-101 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports.

Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports

Function and Feature SL1D

Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Optical port specifications l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports theoptical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.

l The characteristics of all the optical ports complywith ITU-T G.957.

Protection Linear MSP Supported

SNCP Supported

Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

Clockprotection


DCN Outband DCN Supported

OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:l Outloops at optical portsl Inloops at optical portsl Outloops on VC-4 pathsl Inloops on VC-4 paths


Supported

Setting of theon/off state of alaser

Supported

ALS functiona Supported




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Function and Feature SL1D


Supported


Supported

Detection andquery of SFPoptical moduleinformation

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500

ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds

and stops emission for 60 seconds.l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describethe working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.


Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D

O/E

conversion unit

Overhead

processing unit


STM-1

STM-1

Service bus

Overhead bus

Control bus

Logic control unit

Power supplied to the other units on the board

Backplane


Cross-connect unit


+3.3 V

System clock signal


Clock unit



3-121


Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D


1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.l Detects R_LOS alarms.l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

2 Overhead processingunit

l Restores clock signals.l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.l Performs descrambling.l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms

and performance events.l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and

generates specific alarms and performance events.l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports the SSM status to the system control andcommunication unit.

l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and Kbytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logicprocessing unit.

l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specificperformance events.

l Checks higher order path overheads and generatesspecific alarms and performance events.

l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signalsto the logic processing unit.


l Processes clock signals.l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control


to the cross-connect unit.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D





2 Overhead processingunit

l Sets higher order path overheads.l Sets AU pointers.l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.l Performs scrambling.

3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.



The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the systemcontrol and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.

Clock Unit


3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D

SL1D

TX1/RX1

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

SL1D

STAT

SR

VLO

S1

LOS

2

TX2/RX2



3-123

Indicators

Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D









Off The services are notconfigured.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of theSL1D is reporting theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port of theSL1D is free of R_LOSalarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of theSL1D is reporting theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port of theSL1D is free of R_LOSalarms.

Ports



TX1 Transmit port of thefirst STM-1 opticalport

LC (SFP) Fiber jumper




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


RX1 Receive port of thefirst STM-1 opticalport

TX2 Transmit port of thesecond STM-1optical port

LC (SFP)

RX2 Receive port of thesecond STM-1optical port

LabelsThere is a laser safety class label on the front panel.

The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SL1D)

Slot 11 (SL1D)

Slot 9 (SL1D)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (SL1D)

Slot 12 (SL1D)

Slot 10 (SL1D)

Slot 7 (SL1D)

Slot 5 (SL1D)

Slot 8 (SL1D)

Slot 6 (SL1D)

Slot 3 (SL1D)

Slot 1 (SL1D)

Slot 4 (SL1D)

Slot 2 (SL1D)

Slot 20

Slot 15



3-125

Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SL1D)

Slot 11 (SL1D)

Slot 9 (SL1D)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (SL1D)

Slot 12 (SL1D)

Slot 10 (SL1D)

Slot 7 (SL1D)

Slot 5 (SL1D)

Slot 8 (SL1D)

Slot 6 (SL1D)

Slot 3 (SL1D)

Slot 1 (SL1D)

Slot 4 (SL1D)

Slot 2 (SL1D)



Item Description


3.10.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board featurecode refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D

Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of theOptical Module

01 Ie-1 34060287

02 S-1.1 34060276

03 L-1.1 34060281

04 L-1.2 34060282

3.10.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Related ReferencesA.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesA.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadA.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.10.8 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface PerformanceThe performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the typical performance of the interface.


Item Performance


Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Fiber type Multi-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Single-modefiber

Transmission distance(km)

2 15 40 80

Operating wavelength(nm)

1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launched power(dBm)

-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

-30 -28 -34 -34

Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFPmodules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.



3-127

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.30 kg

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 3.4 W

3.11 ML1/MD1The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 serviceprocessing board.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

3.11.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

3.11.5 Valid SlotsThe ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMSare the same as the physical slots.

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature coderefers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

3.11.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.

3.11.8 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.

Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports


ML1 MD1

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supportsflexible configuration of E1 service categories.

E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:l CES E1l ATM/IMA E1

Portspecifications

75-ohm/120-ohm E1 port

16 32

Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64kbit/s level.

ATM/IMA Maximumnumber of ATMservices

64

Maximumnumber of ATMconnections

256

ATM trafficmanagement

Supported

ATMencapsulationmode

Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:l N-to-one VPCl N-to-one VCCl One-to-one VPCl One-to-one VCC

Maximumnumber ofconcatenatedATM cells

31

ATM OAM F4 (VP level) and F5 (VC level)

Maximumnumber of IMAgroups

16 32



3-129


ML1 MD1

Maximumnumber ofmembers in anIMA group

16

CES Maximumnumber ofservices

16 32

Encapsulationmode

Supports the following encapsulation modes:l CESoPSNl SAToP

Servicecategory

Point-to-point services

Compression ofidle slots

Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

Jitter bufferingtime (us)

375-16000

Packet loadingtime (us)

125-5000

CES ACR Supported

Retiming Supported

Clock protection Supports clock protection based on clock sourcepriorities.

OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.


Supported

PRBS tests at E1ports

Supported


Supported

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1

Backplane

Logic control unit


E1

E1

Signal interface

unit


Control bus

Service

processing unit


+3.3 V


Clock unitClock signal provided to the other units of the board

System clock signal

Power supply unit

-48 V1-48 V2


Service bus

GE bus


Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1


1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.l Matches the resistance.l Equalizes signals.l Converts the level.l Recovers clock signals.l Buffers the received data.l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI decoding.

2 Service processingunit

l Frames E1 signals.l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA

services.l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3

services into Ethernet services.



3-131



l Implements the conversion from the internal servicebus into the GE bus in the backplane.

l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.


Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1



l Receives service signals from the packet switchingunit.

l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in thebackplane into the internal service bus.

2 Service processingunit

l Decapsulates service signals.l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA

services.l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1

signals to the signal interface unit.

3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI coding.l Performs clock re-timing.l Performs pulse shaping.l Drives the line.l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Control Signal ProcessingThe board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over thecontrol bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to theCPU unit over the control bus.








Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Clock Unit



Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1

ML1

STAT

SR

V 1E116

Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1

MD

1S

TAT

SRV

32

17

161

Indicators

Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1











3-133



Ports

Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1

Port Description ConnectorType

Corresponding Cable

1 to 16 The first to sixteenthE1 ports

Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected tothe External Equipment or5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected tothe E1 Panel

Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1


Corresponding Cable

1 to 16 The first to sixteenthE1 ports


17 to 32 The seventeenth tothirty-second E1ports


The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-47 shows the front view of anAnea 96 connector and Table 3-116 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.

Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.96

POS.1




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 The first received E1differential signal (+)

25 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

2 The first received E1differential signal (-)

26 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

3 The second received E1differential signal (+)

27 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

4 The second received E1differential signal (-)

28 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

5 The third received E1differential signal (+)

29 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

6 The third received E1differential signal (-)

30 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

7 The fourth received E1differential signal (+)

31 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

8 The fourth received E1differential signal (-)

32 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

9 The fifth received E1differential signal (+)

33 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

10 The fifth received E1differential signal (-)

34 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

11 The sixth received E1differential signal (+)

35 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

12 The sixth received E1differential signal (-)

36 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

13 The seventh received E1differential signal (+)

37 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

14 The seventh received E1differential signal (-)

38 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

15 The eighth received E1differential signal (+)

39 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

16 The eighth received E1differential signal (-)

40 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

17 The ninth received E1differential signal (+)

41 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

18 The ninth received E1differential signal (-)

42 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)



3-135


19 The tenth received E1differential signal (+)

43 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

20 The tenth received E1differential signal (-)

44 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1differential signal (+)

45 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

22 The eleventh received E1differential signal (-)

46 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

23 The twelfth received E1differential signal (+)

47 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

24 The twelfth received E1differential signal (-)

48 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

49 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (+)

73 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

50 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (-)

74 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

51 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (+)

75 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

52 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (-)

76 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

53 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (+)

77 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

54 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (-)

78 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

55 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (+)

79 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

56 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (-)

80 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

3.11.5 Valid SlotsThe ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMSare the same as the physical slots.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 11 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 9 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 7 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 8 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 20

Slot 15

Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 11 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 9 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 7 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 8 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)



Item Description




3-137

3.11.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature coderefers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)

A 75

B 120

3.11.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.

Related ReferencesA.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic AttributesA.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes


E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-119 E1 interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3

Impedance (ohm) 75 120

Wire pair in eachtransmission direction

One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

ML1 MD1

Dimensions (H x W xD)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm


Power ConsumptionPower consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W

Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W

3.12 SP3S/SP3DThe SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohmtributary board.

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.


3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSare the same as the physical slots.

3.12.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board featurecode refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

3.12.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.




3-139

3.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

3.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Table 3-121 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.

Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports


SP3S SP3D

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.

Portspecifications

75-ohm/120-ohm E1 port

16 32

Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from thefirst or fifth E1 signal.

Clockprotection

Supports clock protection based on clock sourcepriorities.

E1 retimingfunction

Supported

OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.


Supported

PRBS tests at E1ports

Supported


Supported

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThis section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe theworking principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3DBackplane

Logic control unit

Cross-connect unit

E1

Interface unit

Mapping/D

emapping

unit


Service bus

Control bus

E1 signal

Codec unit


Power supply unit




System clock signal

-48 V1

-48 V2

+3.3 V

E1

Clock unit


Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D


1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer andthen transmitted to the board.

2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.l Recovers clock signals.l Detects T_ALOS alarms.l Performs HDB3 decoding.



3-141


3 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form

one TUG-2.l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form

one TUG-3.l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form

one C-4.l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to

form one VC-4.


l Processes clock signals.l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals



Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D



l Processes clock signals.l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals


2 Mapping/Demapping unit

l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects

specific alarms and performance events.l Extracts E1 signals.

3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.

4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and thentransmitted to an external cable.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Power Supply Unit




Clock Unit



Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S

SP

3SST

ATS

RV

1-16 SP

3 S

E1

Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D

SP

3DS

TAT

SRV

42

22

211 S

P3D

Indicators

Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D






3-143








Ports

Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S


Corresponding Cable

1-16 The first to sixteenthE1 ports


Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D


Corresponding Cable

1-21 The first to sixteenthE1 ports


22-42 The seventeenth tothirty-second E1ports


NOTEOn the OptiX RTN 980, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-53 shows the front view of anAnea 96 connector and Table 3-127 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.

Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.96

POS.1

Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector


1 The first received E1differential signal (+)

25 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

2 The first received E1differential signal (-)

26 The first transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

3 The second received E1differential signal (+)

27 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

4 The second received E1differential signal (-)

28 The second transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

5 The third received E1differential signal (+)

29 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

6 The third received E1differential signal (-)

30 The third transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

7 The fourth received E1differential signal (+)

31 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

8 The fourth received E1differential signal (-)

32 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

9 The fifth received E1differential signal (+)

33 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

10 The fifth received E1differential signal (-)

34 The fifth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

11 The sixth received E1differential signal (+)

35 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

12 The sixth received E1differential signal (-)

36 The sixth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)



3-145


13 The seventh received E1differential signal (+)

37 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

14 The seventh received E1differential signal (-)

38 The seventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

15 The eighth received E1differential signal (+)

39 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

16 The eighth received E1differential signal (-)

40 The eighth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

17 The ninth received E1differential signal (+)

41 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

18 The ninth received E1differential signal (-)

42 The ninth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

19 The tenth received E1differential signal (+)

43 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)

20 The tenth received E1differential signal (-)

44 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)

21 The eleventh received E1differential signal (+)

45 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (+)

22 The eleventh received E1differential signal (-)

46 The eleventh transmitted E1differential signal (-)

23 The twelfth received E1differential signal (+)

47 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

24 The twelfth received E1differential signal (-)

48 The twelfth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

49 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (+)

73 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

50 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (-)

74 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

51 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (+)

75 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

52 The fourteenth received E1differential signal (-)

76 The fourteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

53 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (+)

77 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)

54 The fifteenth received E1differential signal (-)

78 The fifteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

55 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (+)

79 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (+)




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


56 The sixteenth received E1differential signal (-)

80 The sixteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)

3.12.5 Valid SlotsThe SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSare the same as the physical slots.

Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 20

Slot 15

Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 7 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 8 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)




3-147


Item Description


3.12.6 Board Feature CodeThe board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board featurecode refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.

Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)

A 120

B 75

3.12.7 Board Parameter SettingsThis section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related ReferencesA.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH InterfacesA.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs


E1 Interface Performance

Table 3-130 E1 interface performance

Item Performance


Code pattern HDB3

Impedance (ohm) 75 120


One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance

SP3S SP3D

Dimensions (H x W xD)

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm


Power ConsumptionPower consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W

Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W

3.13 AUXThe AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can houseonly one AUX.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the AUX is SL91.

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, oneasynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.

3.13.3 Working PrincipleThe AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

3.13.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

3.13.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the AUX is SL91.

3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, oneasynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.



3-149

Table 3-132 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.

Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports

Function and Feature AUX

Orderwire phone port 1

Synchronous data port 1The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and itsspecifications comply with ITU-T G.703.

Asynchronous data port 1The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.

External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs

Hot swapping function Supported

Power detection Supported

3.13.3 Working PrincipleThe AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.


Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Orderwireunit

Powersupply unit

Logic controlunit

Board statusdetection unit

Clock unit

Backplane

One orderwire phone port

Power dipdetection signal

System bus System control and communication unit


Clock signal

64 kbit/s synchronous data port

19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data port

4-input/2-output alarm port

+3.3 V

Power Supply Unitl Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on

the AUX.

l Receives and shuts down control signals.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Orderwire Unitl Supports the input of four channels of alarms.

l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.

l Provides one orderwire port.

l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.

l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.

NOTEThe 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implementonly one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.

Logic Control Unitl Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the

board control function.

l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.

l Processes clock signals.

l Provides board status information.

l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.

l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.

l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by runningspecific commands.

l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.

Board Status Detection Unitl Detects board performance data such as board voltage.

l Stores board manufacturing information.

Clock Unit

Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.

3.13.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-57 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.

Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX

AUX

STAT

SR

V

F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI



3-151

Indicators

Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX





board.





Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports

Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports


F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45

ALMI Alarm input port

ALMO Alarm output port

PHONE Orderwire phone port

The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for theports, however, are different. Figure 3-58 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Table 3-135 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.

Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port

Port Pin Signal

F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals

2 Grounding end

3 Receiving asynchronous data signals

4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)

5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)

6 Grounding end

7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)

8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-136 and see Table3-137.

Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port

Port Pin Signal

ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal

2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal

3 The second external alarm input signal

4 The third external alarm input signal

5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal

6 Grounding end for the second external alarm inputsignal

7 The forth external alarm input signal

8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal

Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port

Port Pin Signal

ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)



3-153

Port Pin Signal

2 The first external alarm output signal (-)

3 The second external alarm output signal (+)

4 The first external alarm output signal (+)

5 The first external alarm output signal (-)

6 The second external alarm output signal (-)

7 The second external alarm output signal (+)

8 The second external alarm output signal (-)

3.13.5 Valid SlotsThe AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the sameas the physical slots.

Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (AUX)

Slot 11 (AUX)

Slot 9 (AUX)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (AUX)

Slot 12 (AUX)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 7 (AUX)

Slot 5 (AUX)

Slot 8 (AUX)

Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX)

Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 2 (AUX)

Slot 20

Slot 15




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13 (AUX)

Slot 11 (AUX)

Slot 9 (AUX)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14 (AUX)

Slot 12 (AUX)

Slot 10 (AUX)

Slot 7 (AUX)

Slot 5 (AUX)

Slot 8 (AUX)

Slot 6 (AUX)

Slot 3 (AUX)

Slot 1 (AUX)

Slot 4 (AUX)

Slot 2 (AUX)



Item Description


3.13.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, boardmechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Orderwire type Addressing call


One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600



3-155

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTNequipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in theorderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-definedbyte in the overhead of the microwave frame.


Interface type Codirectional

Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance

Item Performance

Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or theHuawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2

Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

Mechanical Behavior


Item Performance


Weight 0.27 kg0.594 lbs (0.27 kg)

Power Consumption

Power consumption: < 1.3 W




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.14 PIUThe PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of whichaccesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, powerdetection, filtering, and information reporting.

3.14.3 Working PrincipleThe PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMIfiltering unit, and communication control unit.

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.

3.14.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanicalbehavior, and board power consumption.

3.14.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

3.14.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, powerdetection, filtering, and information reporting.

Table 3-143 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.

Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports

Function and Feature PIU

Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 VDC or -60 V DC power input.

Power output The PIU provides other boards with +3.3 V power or-48 V power.

Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.

Powerprotection

l Protection against overcurrentl Protection against short circuits



3-157

Function and Feature PIU

Surgeprotection

Supported

Power detection Supported

Surge protection status monitoring Supported

EMI filtering Supported

3.14.3 Working PrincipleThe PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMIfiltering unit, and communication control unit.

Functional Block DiagramFigure 3-61 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU

-48 V/-60 V

Power detection unit

Protection and detection unit

EMI filtering unit

DC/DC unit

Communication control unit

Board operating in distributed power supply mode

Other boards


Backplane

+3.3 V

-48 V

+3.3 V

Detection signal

Fan-48 V

Detection signal

Detection signal +5.0 V

Protection and Detection UnitThe protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs thefollowing functions:

l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure

alarm.l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and

communication unit through the communication control unit.l Detects whether -48 V power is available.l Performs soft-start and mis-connection prevention functions.

Power Detection UnitThe power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports theinformation to the system control unit through the communication control unit.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

EMI Filtering UnitThe EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering and low-frequencyinterference filtering.

DC/DC UnitThe DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the systemrequires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions:

l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communicationcontrol unit of the PIU.

l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards.l Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection

unit of the PIU.

Communication Control UnitThe communication control unit achieves communication between the system control andcommunication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system controland communication unit:

l PIU manufacturing informationl PCB version informationl Power detection informationl Surge-protection failure informationl PIU temperature

3.14.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel DiagramFigure 3-62 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU

RTN(+)NEG(-)

-48V/-60V

PWR

ALMPI

U

Indicators

Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Indicator Status Description

PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.



3-159


Off There is no power supply.

ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.

On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.

Off No alarm occurs.

PortsThe PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-145 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and theirrespective usage.

Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU

Port PortDescription

Connector Type Corresponding Cable

NEG(-)

-48 V powerinput port

M6 screws, which can beinstalled with OT terminals

5.1 Power Cable

RTN(+)

BGND powerinput port

LabelsCaution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any poweroperations.

CAUTIONDo not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the powersupplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.

3.14.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 15 (CSHN)

Slot 1 (EXT)

Slot 5 (EXT)

Slot 3 (EXT)

Slot 2 (EXT)

Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 6 (EXT)

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 7 (EXT) Slot 8 (EXT)

Slot 9 (EXT)

Slot 13 (EXT)

Slot 11 (EXT)

Slot 10 (EXT)

Slot 12 (EXT)

Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 20 (CSHN)

Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)

Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13

Slot 11

Slot 9

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14

Slot 12

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 5

Slot 8

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 2


3.14.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanicalbehavior, and board power consumption.

Table 3-146 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.

Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU

Item Performance

Dimensions 27.2 mm x 193.4 mm x 196.5 mm



3-161

Item Performance

Weight 1.00 kg

Power consumption < 25.0 W

Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.15 FANThe FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThe FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

3.15.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMSis the same as the physical slot.

3.15.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and boardpower consumption.

3.15.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

3.15.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.

Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports

Function and Feature FAN

Power inputAccesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the powerbus in the backplane.

Number of fans 9




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Function and Feature FAN

Intelligent fan speedadjustment

Supported

Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protectsfans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequencysignals.

OM l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,alarms, version number, and board in-position status.

l Provides alarm indicators.

3.15.3 Working PrincipleThe FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.

Figure 3-65 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Fan unit Power unit

Communication monitoring unit

-48 V

-48 V


Backplane

-48 V

Communication detection signal

Communication detection signal

Power Unitl Receives -48 V power from the backplane.

l Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supplycombining, and overcurrent protection.

Fan Unit

Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.

When one fan fails, the fan unit ensures that the system can operate in a short term under anenvironmental temperature of 40°C.



3-163

Communication Monitoring Unitl Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental

temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control andcommunication unit.

l Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-widthmodulation signal from the system control and communication unit.The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed inTable 3-148.

Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed

Working Temperature Rotating Speed

≤ 25°C 3600 rounds/minute

25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with thetemperature

≥ 60°C 12000 rounds/minute

3.15.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel DiagramFigure 3-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN

CAUTION

Hazardousmoving parts,keepfingers and otherbody parts away.严禁在风扇旋转时

接触扇叶！

FAN

OptiX RTN 980PIUEXTEXTEXT

PIUEXTEXTEXT

NCSEXT EXTNCSEXTEXTEXT

EXTEXTEXT

FAN

28 26 2713 1411 12 9 1020 7 815 5 6 3 4 1 2

Indicators

Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN


FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.



3-165

ESD Wrist Strap JackAn ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the propergrounding of the human body.

LabelsThe front panel of the FAN has the following labels:

l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.

3.15.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMSis the same as the physical slot.

Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis

Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13

Slot 11

Slot 9

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14

Slot 12

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 5

Slot 8

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 2

Slot 20

Slot 15

Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS


Slot 26 (PIU)

Slot 13

Slot 11

Slot 9

Slot 28(FAN)

Slot 27 (PIU)

Slot 14

Slot 12

Slot 10

Slot 7

Slot 5

Slot 8

Slot 6

Slot 3

Slot 1

Slot 4

Slot 2





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3.15.6 Technical SpecificationsThis section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and boardpower consumption.

Table 3-150 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.

Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance


Weight 1.66 kg

Power consumption < 15.9 W (room temperature)< 103.5 W (high temperature)



3-167

4 Accessories

About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.

4.2 PDUThe Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories


4-1

4.1 E1 PanelWhen an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panelprovides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panelR1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

1-8

9-16

Ports

Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel


T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first tosixteenth E1 ports (connectedto external equipment)

BNC

R1-R16 Receive ports for the first tosixteenth E1 ports (connectedto external equipment)

1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports(connected to an IDU)

DB37

9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1ports (connected to an IDU)

Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -

NOTE

The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 providesthe pin assignments for the E1 port.

4 AccessoriesOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System



Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)


20 The first E1 received differentialsignal (+)

21 The first E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

2 The first E1 received differentialsignal (-)

3 The first E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

22 The second E1 receiveddifferential signal (+)

23 The second E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

4 The second E1 receiveddifferential signal (-)

5 The second E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

24 The third E1 received differentialsignal (+)

25 The third E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

6 The third E1 received differentialsignal (-)

7 The third E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

26 The fourth E1 receiveddifferential signal (+)

27 The fourth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

8 The fourth E1 receiveddifferential signal (-)

9 The fourth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

36 The fifth E1 received differentialsignal (+)

35 The fifth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

17 The fifth E1 received differentialsignal (-)

16 The fifth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

34 The sixth E1 received differentialsignal (+)

33 The sixth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

15 The sixth E1 received differentialsignal (-)

14 The sixth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

32 The seventh E1 receiveddifferential signal (+)

31 The seventh E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

13 The seventh E1 receiveddifferential signal (-)

12 The seventh E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)



4-3


30 The eighth E1 receiveddifferential signal (+)

29 The eighth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (+)

11 The eighth E1 receiveddifferential signal (-)

10 The eighth E1 transmitteddifferential signal (-)

Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDUThe Power Distribution Unit (PDU) is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet or an ETSI cabinet.The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. The OptiX RTN980 equipment uses the C3 DC PDU.

NOTEBecause OptiX RTN 980 is nodal microwave equipment that consumes high power, it is recommendedthat the power distribution cabinet directly supply power to the equipment. If the power distribution cabinetfails to supply 40 A power distribution terminals, the C3 DC PDU is also applicable.

4.2.1 AppearanceThe C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU.4.2.2 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the C3 PDU.4.2.3 Functions and Working PrinciplesThe C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power tothe equipment in a cabinet.

4.2.1 AppearanceThe C3 PDU is a simple-designed PDU.

Figure 4-3 shows the C3 PDU.

Figure 4-3 Appearance of the C3 PDU




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTENormally, there is a cover in the input power terminal area.

4.2.2 Front PanelThere are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switcheson the front panel of the C3 PDU.

Front panel diagram

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the DC PDU

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

PGND

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+) NEG2(-)

NEG1(-)

1 2 3

1. Output power terminal area 2. Power switch area3. Input power terminal area -

Port

Table 4-3 Description of ports on the DC PDU

Position

PortIdentifier

Port Description Port Specifications

Outputpowerterminal area

-48 V Output power supply -48 V Four output power supplies (whenused with the OptiX RTN 980),Cord end terminal (12-10AWG),maximum cable diameter 6 mm2

GND Output power supply GNDterminals

Inputpowerterminal area

RTN1(+)

The first input power (+) M8 OT terminal, maximum cablediameter 16 mm2.

RTN2(+)

The second input power (+)

NEG1(-)

The first input power (-)

NEG2(-)

The second input power (-)

PGND PGND terminals



4-5

Position

PortIdentifier

Port Description Port Specifications

Powerswitch

SW1 Output power switch 1 controlsthe first output power.

The fuse capacity is 40 A.

SW2 Output power switch 2 controlsthe second output power.

SW3 Output power switch 3 controlsthe third output power.

SW4 Output power switch 4 controlsthe fourth output power.

When the C3 PDU is used together with the OptiX RTN 980, each output power occupies fouroutput terminals, each power switch controls one output power, and each output power can onlyprovide one input power to the OptiX RTN 980. The mapping relationship between powerswitches on the front panel and output power terminals that the switches control is showed inFigure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Mapping relationship between power switches and output power terminals

-48V

-48V

GND

GND

-48V

-48V

GND

GND

-48V

-48V

GND

GND

-48V

-48V

GND

GND

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Power switch area

4.2.3 Functions and Working PrinciplesThe C3 PDU realizes the simple power distribution function and distributes the input power tothe equipment in a cabinet.

Functionsl The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.

l Each input power supply supports two outputs.

l The fuse capacity of the switch of each output power is 40 A.

l Each power switch controls one output power (when the PDU is used with OptiX RTN980).

l The PDU is protected against short circuit and overload.

l The PDU can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or in an ETSI cabinet.

l The PDU supports the DC-I power distribution mode.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Working principlesThe PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and air circuit breakers. The PDUsupports the simple power distribution function for the input power.

Figure 4-6 Functional block diagram of the DC PDU

INPUT

RTN1(+)

RTN2(+)

NEG1(-)

NEG2(-)

OUTPUT

PGND

BGND

-48V

-48V

BGND

-48V

-48V

BGND-48V

-48V

BGNDBGND

-48V

-48V

BGNDBGND

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

BGND

BGNDBGND



4-7

5 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used onthe IDU 980.

5.1 Power CableA power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDUon top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

5.2 PGND CablePGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.3 IF JumperAn IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmitIF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and theIDU.

5.4 XPIC CableAn XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPICworkgroup to implement the XPIC function.

5.5 Fiber JumperA fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connectorthat is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connectorat the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment tobe connected.

5.6 E1 CablesE1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipmentand E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.7 Orderwire CableAn orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwirecable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to thePHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of theorderwire phone.

5.8 Network Cable

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description 5 Cables


5-1

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable areterminated with an RJ45 connector.

5 CablesOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System



Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

5.1 Power CableA power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDUon top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-1 Power cable

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications

Model Cable Terminal

6 mm2

power cableand terminal

Power cable, 450 V/750V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6mm2, blue/black, lowsmoke zero Halogencable

Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tinplating, 12-10 AWG, yellow

10 mm2

power cableand terminal

Power cable, 450 V/750V, H07Z-K UL3386, 10mm2, blue/black, lowsmoke zero Halogencable

Naked crimping terminal, OT, 10 mm2, M6, tinplating, naked ring terminal

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 980, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distanceof 10 m, and power cables with a 10 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 15 m.



5-3

5.2 PGND CablePGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.2.1 IDU PGND CableAn IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of externalequipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipmentshare the same ground.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND CableAn E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point ofexternal equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel andexternal equipment share the same ground.

5.2.1 IDU PGND CableAn IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of externalequipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipmentshare the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

2

Main label

H.S.tubeCable tie1

L

1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments

None.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND CableAn E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point ofexternal equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel andexternal equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

1

Main label

L

Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments

None.

5.3 IF JumperAn IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmitIF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and theIDU.

An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that isconnected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connectedto the IF board.

NOTE

l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inchIF cable to the IF board.



5-5

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1

2H.S.tube 2 PCSL = 3 cm

2000 mm

1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin AssignmentsNone.

5.4 XPIC CableAn XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPICworkgroup to implement the XPIC function.

An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPICcable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the otherend of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the sameXPIC work group.

XPIC cables are available in the following types:

l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect twoXPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.

l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connecttwo XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. TheseXPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPICboard to loop back signals.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-5 XPIC cable

L1

1 1

L2

2 2

1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Pin AssignmentsNone.

5.5 Fiber JumperA fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connectorthat is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connectorat the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment tobe connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

2 mm multi-mode fiber

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber



5-7

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable


LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber


NOTEFor the OptiX RTN 980, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.

Fiber ConnectorsThe following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.

Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 E1 CablesE1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipmentand E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External EquipmentAn E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directlyreceive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.

5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel



5-9

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.

5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External EquipmentAn E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directlyreceive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.

Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohmcoaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment

Main label

1

W

X1 A

View A

Pos.1

Pos.96

Cable connector, Anea,96-pin, female

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

NOTE

l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxialconnector.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Pin Assignments

Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Remarks

Pin W Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0

2 Ring 26 Ring

3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1

4 Ring 28 Ring

5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2

6 Ring 30 Ring

7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3

8 Ring 32 Ring

9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4

10 Ring 34 Ring

11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5

12 Ring 36 Ring

13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6

14 Ring 38 Ring

15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7

16 Ring 40 Ring

18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8

17 Tip 41 Tip

20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9

19 Tip 43 Tip

22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10

21 Tip 45 Tip

24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11

23 Tip 47 Tip

50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12

49 Tip 73 Tip



5-11

Pin W Remarks

Pin W Remarks

Core SerialNo.

Core SerialNo.

52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13

51 Tip 75 Tip

54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14

53 Tip 75 Tip

56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15

55 Tip 79 Tip

Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Remarks

TapeColor

Pin W Remarks

TapeColor

Colorof theCore

Relationship

Colorof theCore

Relationship

1 White Twisted pair

R0 Blue 25 White Twisted pair

T0 Blue

2 Blue 26 Orange


R1 27 White Twisted pair

T1

4 Green 28 Brown


R2 29 Red Twisted pair

T2

6 Grey 30 Blue

7 Red Twisted pair


T3

8 Orange

32 Green

9 Red Twisted pair


T4

10 Brown 34 Grey

11 Black Twisted pair

R5 35 Black Twisted pair

T5

12 Blue 36 Orange



T6

14 Green 38 Brown




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Pin W Remarks

TapeColor

Pin W Remarks

TapeColor

Colorof theCore

Relationship

Colorof theCore

Relationship


R7 39 Yellow

Twisted pair

T7

16 Grey 40 Blue


R8 Orange


T8 Orange

18 Blue 42 Orange


R9 43 White Twisted pair

T9

20 Green 44 Brown



T10

22 Grey 46 Blue

23 Red Twisted pair


T11

24 Orange

48 Green

49 Red Twisted pair


T12

50 Brown 74 Grey



T13

52 Blue 76 Orange



T14

54 Green 78 Brown


R15 79 Yellow

Twisted pair

T15

56 Grey 80 Blue


5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 PanelAn E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.

Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.



5-13

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel

X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 maleLabel 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments

Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37connector

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4

X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17

X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4

X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16

X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5

X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15

X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5

X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14

X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Wire Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks Connector X1

Connector X2/X3

Remarks

X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13

X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6

X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12

X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7

X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11

X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7

X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10

W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12

X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17

X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12

X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16

X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13

X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15

X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13

X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14

X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14

X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13

X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14

X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12

X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15

X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11

X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15

X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10


5.7 Orderwire CableAn orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwirecable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to thePHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of theorderwire phone.



5-15

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable

1

6

1

6

1 Main label

X1 X2

1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments

Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Function

X1.3 X2.3 Tip

X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.8 Network CableA network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable areterminated with an RJ45 connector.

Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pinassignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. Thepin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.

Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)








Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs











Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are usedbetween MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables andcrossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.

The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN980 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and



5-17

crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electricalservice ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Cable Diagram

Figure 5-12 Network cable

1

8

1

8

1Label 1 Label 2Main label

1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments

Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable


X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown



5-19

A Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameters for Network ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.

A.2 Radio Link ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.4 SDH/PDH Service ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.5 Parameters for Board InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet PlaneThis section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on thepacket plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet portparameters, and QoS parameters.

A.7 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 ServicesThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.

A.9 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description


A-1

A.1 Parameters for Network ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.

A.1.1 Parameters for NE ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.2 Parameters for Communications ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.

A.1.1 Parameters for NE ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE TimeThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NEtime.

A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEsThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functionsof an NE.

A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE SearchingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation PathChoose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

A Parameters DescriptionOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for the Search FieldParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Address Type IP Address of GNENSAP AddressIP Address Range of GNE

IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on NSAPAddress only.

l If the IP protocol isused on the DCN, youcan search for an NEbased on IP Addressof GNE or IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To search for all theNEs that communicatewith the gateway NE,select IP AddressRange of GNE.

l To select the gatewayNE only, select IPAddress of GNE.

NOTEIf Address Type is set to IPAddress of GNE or IPAddress Range of GNE,and if the U2000 (server)and the gateway NE arelocated in different networksegments, ensure that theU2000 and relevant routersare configured with the IProutes for the networksegment in which theU2000 and gateway NE arelocated.

If Address Type is set toNSAP Address, ensure thatthe OSI protocol stack isinstalled.



A-3

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Search Address - - l If Address Type is setto IP Address ofGNE, enter the IPaddress of the gatewayNE, such as 129.9.x.x.

l If Address Type is setto IP Address Rangeof GNE, enter thenumber of the IPnetwork segment inwhich the gateway NEis located, such as129.9.255.255.

l If Address Type is setto NSAP Address,enter the NSAPaddress of the gatewayNE.

User Name - - This parameter specifiesthe user name of thegateway NE.

Password - - This parameter specifiesthe password of thegateway NE.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter for Searching for NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Create NE after search SelectedDeselected

Deselected l To create NEs inbatches, it isrecommended that youselect Create NEafter search. The NEsare automaticallycreated after they arefound.

l After Create NE aftersearch is selected,enter NE User andPassword that areused for creating anNE.

NOTEIf only Create NE aftersearch is selected, Searchfor NE is selectedautomatically.

NE User - - l This parameterspecifies the user nameto be entered when anNE is created.

l This parameter is validonly when Create NEafter search isselected.

Password - - l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.




A-5


Upload after create SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterspecifies whether toautomatically uploadthe NE data after theNE is found andcreated.

l If only Upload aftercreate is selected,Search for NE andCreate NE aftersearch are selectedautomatically.

Parameter for the Found NEsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the found NE,which consists ofextended ID and NE ID.For example, in the case ofNE9-25, the value 9indicates the extended ID,and the value 25 indicatesthe NE ID.

GNE Address - - This parameter indicatesthe address of the gatewayNE that is connected to thefound NE.

GNE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the gateway NEthat is connected to thefound NE.

Created As GNE YesNo

Yes l This parameterspecifies the passwordto be entered when anNE is created.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communicationbetween the client and theserver is encrypted if thisparameter is set toSecurity SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifiesthe communication port.

NE Status CreatedUncreated

- This parameter indicateswhether the found NE iscreated.

A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

Navigation Path1. In the Physical ViewPhysical Root, right-click New > NE.2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 980 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main InterfaceParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Type - - This parameter indicatesthe type of the NE to becreated.

ID 1 to 49135 - l The ID refers to thebasic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.

l This parameter is setaccording to theplanning information.

l The NE ID consistingof the basic ID andextended ID identifiesan NE on the NMS.



A-7


Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changeExtended ID.

Name - - l This parameterspecifies the name ofthe NE.

l After you havespecified the name ofthe NE, the name isdisplayed under theicon of the NE.

Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remarks of the NE.

Gateway Type Non-GatewayGateway

Non-Gateway l This parameter is set toGateway if the newNE is a gateway NE.

l This parameter is set toNon-Gateway if thenew NE is a non-gateway NE.

l This parameter is setaccording to the DCNplanning if the new NEcan function as agateway NE or a non-gateway NE.

Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicatesthe gateway NE of the newNE when Gateway Typeis set to Non-Gateway.

Affiliated GatewayProtocol

IPOSI

IP l This parameter needsto be set whenGateway Type is setto Gateway.

l When the OSI overDCC solution is used,this parameter is set toOSI.

l In other cases, thisparameter is set to IP.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


IP Address - - This parameter indicatesthe IP address of the newNE. This parameter needsto be set when AffiliatedGateway Protocol is setto IP.

Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communicationbetween the client and theserver is encrypted if thisparameter is set toSecurity SSL.

Port - 1400 This parameter specifiesthe communication port.

NE User - - This parameter specifiesthe user name to beentered when an NE iscreated.

Password - - This parameter specifiesthe password to be enteredwhen an NE is created.

NSAP Address - - This parameter indicatesthe NSAP address of thenew NE. This parameterneeds to be set whenAffiliated GatewayProtocol is set to OSI.You need to set the area IDonly, and the other partsare automaticallygenerated by the NE.

A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.2. Choose Object Attributes.3. Click Modify NE ID.



A-9

Parameters for Changing NE IDsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID - - l The new ID refers tothe basic ID. If theextended ID is notused, the basic ID of anNE must be unique onthe networks that aremanaged by the sameNMS.


NOTEThe NE ID consisting of thebasic ID and extended IDidentifies an NE on theNMS.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existingNEs does not exceed therange represented by thebasic ID, do not changethe extended ID.

A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time SynchronizationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time SynchronizationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the NE.

NE ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the NE.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Synchronous Mode Standard NTPNMNull

Null l If this parameter is setto NM, the NEsynchronizes the timeof the NMS server.

l If this parameter is setto Standard NTP, theNE synchronizes theNetwork TimeProtocol (NTP) serverthrough the standardNTP.

Standard NTPAuthentication

EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter is validonly when SynchronousMode is set to StandardNTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP ServerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Standard NTP ServerIdentifier

NE IDIP

NE ID l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to IP.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE andcommunicates withthe gateway NEthrough the HWECCprotocol, thisparameter is set to NEID.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE andcommunicates withthe gateway NEthrough the IPprotocol, thisparameter is set to IP.



A-11


Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions asthe gateway NE, thisparameter is set to theIP address of theexternal NTP server.

l If the NE functions asa non-gateway NE,this parameter is set tothe ID or IP address ofthe gateway NE.

Standard NTP ServerKey

0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server doesnot need toauthenticated, thisparameter is set to thevalue "0".

l If the NTP serverneeds to beauthenticated, theauthentication isperformed accordingto the allocated key ofthe NTP server. In thiscase, the NEauthenticates the NTPserver based on the keyand the correspondingpassword (specified inthe management of thestandard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic SynchronizationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

SynchronizationStarting Time

- - l This parameterspecifies the start timeof the synchronizationperiod. After thisparameter is specified,the NMS and the NEsynchronize the timeonce at the intervals ofSynchronizationPeriod(days).

l It is recommended thatyou use the defaultvalue.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


DST SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameterindicates whetherSynchronizationStarting Time is thedaylight saving time.

l This parameter is setaccording to the actualsituation.

Synchronization Period(days)

1 to 300 1 l This parameterindicates the period ofsynchronizing the timeof the NE with the timeof the NMS.


A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE TimeThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NEtime.

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization

Management from the Main Menu.2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click

.

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE TimeParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE - - This parameter indicates the name of theNE.

TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.

DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST isenabled.



A-13

Parameters for Time ZoneParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, thecurrent time of the NE is changedaccordingly.

l This parameter is set according to theplace where the NE is located.

DST SelectedDeselected

Deselected l The parameters related to daylightsaving time can be valid only when thisparameter is selected.

l This parameter is set according to thesituation whether daylight saving time isused in the place where the NE is located.

Offset 1 to 120Unit: minute(s)

- This parameter specifies the offset value ofthe daylight saving time.

Start Rule WEEKDATE

WEEK This parameter specifies the method ofadjusting the daylight saving time.

Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylightsaving time.

End Rule WEEKDATE

WEEK This parameter specifies the method ofadjusting the daylight saving time.

End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylightsaving time.

A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

Navigation Path1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameterindicates the key forNTP authentication.

l This parameter is setaccording to therequirements of theexternal NTP server.

Password - - l This parameterindicates the passwordthat corresponds toKey.

l This parameter is setaccording to therequirements of theexternal NTP server.

Trusted YesNo

Yes l When this parameter isset to No, the keyverification is nottrusted. Afterreceiving the key, theNE rejects the clocksynchronizationservice.

l When this parameter isset to Yes, the keyverification is trusted.After receiving thekey, the NE providesthe clocksynchronizationservice.

l After receiving anunknown or incorrectkey, the NE rejects theclock synchronizationservice. Hence, it isrecommended that youset a trusted key only.

A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.



A-15

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License

Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the License Management tab.

Parameters for Managing Licenses


Board - - This parameter displays the boards that needto be supported by licenses.

File Type - - This parameter displays the license typecorresponding to each board.

Capacity - - This parameter displays the capacity of eachboard.

Load - - This parameter displays whether thecorresponding license file is loaded to eachboard.

A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functionsof an NE.

Navigation Path1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic

Disabling of NE Function.

2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and

then click .

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs


NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of theNE.

NE Type OptiX RTN 980 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.

Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of theoperation, such as loopback, and shutdownof the laser.

Auto Disabling DisabledEnabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether toautomatically disable the operations such asloopback, and shutdown of the laser.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Auto DisablingTime(min)

1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time ofautomatically disabling the operations suchas loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.1.2 Parameters for Communications ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent TransmissionManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECCThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter SettingsThis topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARPThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF SettingThis section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.

A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer ParameterThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocolmodel.

A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI TunnelThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.



A-17

A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access ControlThis section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication SettingParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP Address - Before delivery, theIP address of the NEis set to 129.9.0.x.The letter x indicatesthe basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is setaccording to the following rules:l The IP address, subnet mask, and default

gateway of the gateway NE should meetthe planning requirements of theexternal DCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IPaddress must be in the same networksegment.

l The IP address of other NEs should beset according to the NE ID. In this case,the IP address of an NE should be set inthe format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,if the ID is 0x090001, the IP addressshould be set to 129.9.0.1.

Gateway IPAddress

- 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when thenumber of actual NEs does not exceedthe range permitted by the basic NE ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSIover DCC solution is applied. Thisparameter is used to set only the area ID ofan NSAP address. The other parts of theNSAP address are automatically generatedby the NE.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Connection Mode Common + SecuritySSLCommonSecurity SSL

Common + SecuritySSL

l Specifies the connection mode that thegateway NE allows the NMS to use forconnecting to the gateway NE.

l If the gateway NE has no specialsecurity requirement for connection tothe NMS, Connection Mode can be setto Common.

l If the gateway NE requests secureconnection to the NMS for preventinginformation interception and cracking,Connection Mode needs to be set toSecurity SSL.

l If NE communication security levelneeds to be the same as NMScommunication security level,Connection Mode needs to be set toCommon + Security SSL.

l The default parameter value isrecommended unless the gateway NErequires that the NMS use the SSLconnection mode.

l The parameter value takes effect onlywhen it is set for a gateway NE and thegateway NE is connected to the NMS bymeans of the IP protocol.

A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Parameters for DCC Rate ConfigurationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicates the port that isconnected to the DCC channel.



A-19


Enabled/Disabled EnabledDisabled

Enabled It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the port is connected to the other ECC

subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set toDisabled.

l If the port is connected to a third-partynetwork and does not exchange thenetwork management information withother ports, Enabled/Disabled is set toDisabled.

Channel D1-D3D4-D12D1-D12D1-D1

D1-D1 (for the PDHradio whosetransmissioncapacity is less than16xE1)D1-D3 (for othercases)

It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC

solution is adopted, Channel for theSDH line ports is set to a value that is thesame as the value for third-partynetwork.

l If the DCC transparent transmissionsolution is adopted, the value ofChannel for the SDH line ports shouldnot conflict with the value that is set forthe third-party network.

DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCCresources.

CommunicationStatus

- - This parameter indicates thecommunication status.

Protocol Type HWECCTCP/IPOSI

HWECC It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to OSI.

LAPD Role UserNetwork

User l This parameter is valid only whenProtocol Type is set to OSI.

l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPDRole must be set to User for one end andmust be set to Network for the other end.

LAPD MTU - - Displays the maximum LAPD packet size.

A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent TransmissionManagement

This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.3. Click Create.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Source Timeslot/Porta

- - This parameter specifies the source timeslotor port.

TransparentTransmission ofOverhead Bytes atSource Port

D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9D10D11D12E1E2F1K1K2X1X2X3X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selectedeach time.

l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate thecustomized overhead bytes that are usedfor transmitting asynchronous dataservices.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte thatis used. For example, an overhead bytecannot be a byte in the used DCCchannel.

Sink Timeslot/Porta

- - This parameter specifies the sink timeslot orport.



A-21


TransparentTransmission ofOverhead Bytes atSink Port

D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9D10D11D12E1E2F1K1K2X1X2X3X4

- l Only one overhead byte can be selectedeach time.

l An overhead byte cannot be a byte thatis used. For example, an overhead bytecannot be a byte in the used DCCchannel.

l Generally, Transparent Transmissionof Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can beset to a value that is the same as ordifferent from the value in the case ofTransparent Transmission ofOverhead Bytes at Source Port.

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functionsthe same regardless of the source port or sink port.

A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECCThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation PathClick an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from theFunction Tree.

Parameters for the ECC Extended ModeParameter Value Range Default Value Description

ECC ExtendedMode

Auto modeSpecified mode

Auto mode It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Setting the ServerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe server.

Port 1601 to 1699 0 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specifiedmode.

l This parameter can be set only when theNE functions as the server of theextended ECC. In normal cases, the NEthat is close to the NMS functions as theserver.

l This parameter can be set to any valuefrom 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the ClientParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specifiedmode.

l This parameter can be set only when theNE functions as the client of theextended ECC. Except for the NE thatfunctions as the server, all other NEs thatuse the extended ECC can function as theclient.

l Opposite IP and Port are respectivelyset to the IP address of the server NE andthe specified port number.

Port 1601 to 1699 0

A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECCLink Management from the Function Tree.



A-23

Parameter for NE ECC Link ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of theECC connection.

Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transferNE and the direction of the ECC route.

Distance - - l This parameter specifies the number ofNEs (excluding the source NE and sinkNE) through which the ECC routepasses, namely, the number of ECCpacket forwarding attempts. The valuecan be set to a value that is greater thanthe number of actual ECC packetforwarding attempts. If the value is set toa value that is less than the number ofactual ECC packet forwarding attempts,however, the destination NE fails to beaccessed.

l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that thesource NE is adjacent to the destinationNE.

Level - - l This parameter indicates that multipleECC routes from the source NE to thedestination NE may be available. AnECC route of a higher priority is selectedto transmit the packets to the destinationNE.

l If the ECC route is generatedautomatically, the priority is 4.

l If the ECC route is added manually, thepriority is 5.

Mode - - This parameter indicates the ECC routingmode.

SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical portthrough which the ECC route passes. Thevalue of this parameter is automaticallyassigned the NE.

A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP RouteManagement

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP

Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

DestinationAddress

- - This parameter indicates the destinationaddress of the packets. This parameter canbe set to a valid IP address of class A, B, orC only, but cannot be set to the IP addressof the local host or the loopback addresswith the 127 field.

Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask ofthe destination address of the packets.

Gateway - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe gateway on the subnetwork where theNE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.

Protocol - - l DIRECT: indicates the route betweenthe local NE and an adjacent NE.

l STATIC: indicates the route that iscreated manually.

l OSPF: indicates the route between thelocal NE and a non-adjacent NE.

l RIP: indicates the route that isdiscovered by the routing informationprotocol.

l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is beyond theOSPF domain.

l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is in a not sostubby area (NSSA).

l A route can be deleted in the case ofSTATIC only, but cannot be edited inthe other cases.

l Compared with a dynamic route, a staticroute has a higher priority. If any conflictoccurs, the static route is preferred.



A-25


Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that isused on the route. Interface is a conceptspecified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Inthe TCP/IP protocol stack, you can createmultiple types of interface, such as aloopback interface (namely, the interfacewhose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernetinterface, and PPP interface. Each interfacemust have a unique interface name.

Metric - - This parameter indicates the maximumnumber of routers through which thepackets are transmitted. Metric is used toindicate the overhead bytes that aretransmitted to the destination address. Thesmaller the value, the less the overheadbytes. If multiple routes can reach the samedestination address, a route whose overheadis less is preferred to transmit the packets.

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP RouteManagement Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IP Route Management tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP RoutesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

DestinationAddress

- - This parameter specifies the destinationaddress of the packets. This parameter canbe set to a valid IP address of class A, B, orC only, but cannot be set to the IP addressof the local host or the loopback addresswith the 127 field.

Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask ofthe destination address of the packets.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address ofthe gateway on the subnetwork where theNE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.

A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF ParameterSettings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Area - 0.0.0.0 l The OSPF protocol supports the divisionof NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEsin the same area can transmit the OSPFpackets to each other to generate theroute.

l When setting the area for the NEs, youneed to set the NEs that run the OSPFprotocol to the same area.

DCC Hello Timer(s)

1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hellopacket timer at the DCC interface.

l The Hello packets are used for detectingthe neighbor router on the network thatis connected to the router. Byperiodically transmitting the hellopackets, you can determine whether theinterface on the neighbor router is still inthe active status.

l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines theinterval for the hello packet timer totransmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to thesame value.



A-27


DCC NeighborDead Time(s)

1 to 65535 40 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifiesthe dead time of a neighbor router at theDCC interface.

l If the local router fails to receive thehello packets from the connectedneighbor router within the time specifiedin DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), itconsiders that the neighbor router isunavailable.

l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) shouldbe set to a value that is a minimum oftwice the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCCNeighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPFprotocol fails to operate normally.

DCCRetransmissionTimer(s)

1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifiesthe interval for transmitting a requestthrough the DCC interface to retransmit thelink state advertisement (LSA) packets.

DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay timeto transmit the LSA packets through theDCC interface.

l The LSA packets in the LSA database ofthe local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they arebeing transmitted on the network.Hence, before the LSA packets aretransmitted, you need to increase the ageof the LSA packets based on the value ofDCC Delay(s).




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


LAN Hello Timer(s)

1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hellopacket timer at the LAN interfaces.

l The hello packets are used for detectingthe neighbor router on the network thatis connected to the router. Byperiodically transmitting the hellopackets, you can determine whether theinterface on the neighbor router is still inthe active status.

l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines theinterval for the hello packet timer of theNE to transmit the hello packets.

l In the case of two interconnected NEs,LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to thesame value.

LAN NeighborDead Time(s)

1 to 65535 40 l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifiesthe dead time of a neighbor router at theLAN interface.

l If the local router fails to receive thehello packets from the connectedneighbor router within the time specifiedin LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), itconsiders that the neighbor router isunavailable.

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should beset to a value that is a minimum of twotimes the value of LAN Neighbor DeadTime(s).

l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCCNeighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPFprotocol fails to operate normally.

LANRetransmissionTimer(s)

1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifiesthe time for transmitting a request forretransmission of the LSA packets throughthe LAN interface.



A-29


LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay timeto transmit the LSA packets through theLAN interface.

l The LSA packets in the LSA database ofthe local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they arebeing transmitted on the network.Hence, before the LSA packets aretransmitted, you need to increase the ageof the LSA packets based on the value ofLAN Delay(s).

OSPF Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.

STUB Area EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the STUBArea.

l Set this parameter as required.

NSSA Area EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the NSSAArea.


Direct route EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Directroute.

l Direct route: the route detected by thelink layer protocol.


Static route EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Staticroute.

l Static route: the route manuallyconfigured by the networkadministrator.


RIP route EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the RIProute.

l RIP route: the route detected by therouting protocol.


Opaque LSA ofExternal NetworkPort

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the OpaqueLSA of External Network Port.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, itindicates that the Ethernet NM interfaceis used to transmit NM message.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


LAN Interface EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF atthe Ethernet NM interface.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, itindicates that the Ethernet NM interfaceachieves OSPF communication withother equipment.

A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.


Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP


Proxy ARP DisabledEnabled

Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in thesame network segment but differentdomains to communicate with eachother.

l To realize communication between suchNEs, the source NE sends the ARPbroadcast packet to address the route tothe destination NE. The NE with theproxy ARP function enabled checks therouting table after sensing the ARPbroadcast packet. If the routing tablecontains the destination address that theARP broadcast packet looks for, the NEreturns an ARP spoofing packet, whichenables the NE that sends the ARPbroadcast packet to consider that theMAC address of the NE that returns theARP spoofing packet is the MACaddress of the destination NE. In thismanner, the packet that is to be sent tothe destination NE is first sent to the NEwith the proxy ARP function enabledand then forwarded to the destinationNE.



A-31

A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF SettingThis section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol

Stack Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

Port OSPF ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - Displays the ports that allow OSPFparameters to be set.

Path Type - - Displays the current DCC channel type.

OSPF Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.l Set this parameter as required.

Opaque LSA ofExternal NetworkPort

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Specifies whether DCC channels supportOpaque LSAs.


A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer ParameterThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocolmodel.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Configuration Role ESL1L2

L1 l An NE whose Configuration Role is setto L1 cannot function as a neighbor of anNE in the other area. It uses a route in thelocal area only and accesses the otherarea by distributing the default route ofthe nearest L2 NE.

l An NE whose Configuration Role is setto L2 can function as a neighbor of anNE in the other area and can use a routein the backbone area. The backbone areais a collection that is formed byconsecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NEof all the roles must be consecutive(connected to each other).

NOTEConfiguration Role cannot be set to ES.

Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.

A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.


Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Link Adjacency TableParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicates the port used forOSI communication.

Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that isused at the data link layer.

Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier ofthe adjacency that is set up by two NEsthrough the OSI protocol. One adjacencynumber corresponds to an OSIadjacency.

l The value is dynamically allocated bythe NE.

Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of theadjacency.



A-33


Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of theadjacency.

Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that iscontained in the NSAP address of theopposite NE.

Peer End SystemID

- - This parameter indicates the system ID ofthe opposite NE. Generally, the system IDis the MAC address.

Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing TablesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Destination AreaID

- - This parameter indicates the area ID of thedestination NE.

Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID ofthe destination NE. Generally, the systemID is the MAC address.

Metric - - This parameter indicates the number of hopsthat reach the destination NE or destinationarea.

Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of theadjacent link that is connected to thedestination NE.

Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of theadjacent link that is connected to thedestination NE.

A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI TunnelThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.


Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for OSI Tunnel AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

LAPD Actor UserNetwork

User l This parameter specifies the LAPDactor.

l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,they can perform the LAPD negotiationonly when the LAPD actor is set toUser at one end and is set to Network atthe other end.

Efficient LAPDEnable

- - This parameter indicates whether thecurrent LAPD is enabled.

ConfigurableLAPD Enable

EnabledDisabled

Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPDis enabled.

LAPD ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address ofthe opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time toRetry(s)

1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Timeto Retry(s).

l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates theinterval for retransmitting packets at theLAPD link layer.

l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to beset according to the network situation. Ifthe network is in good situation, L2 WaitTime to Retry(s) can be set to a smallervalue. Otherwise, it is recommended thatyou set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to agreater value.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information. In normalcases, it is recommended that you use thedefault value.



A-35


L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 RetryTimes.

l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximumnumber of packet retransmissionattempts at the LAPD link layer.

l L2 Retry Times needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L2 RetryTimes can be set to a smaller value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L2 Retry Times to a greater value.


L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 HelloTimer(s).

l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hellopacket timer at the LAPD link networklayer. It is used for periodicaltransmission of the Hello packets.

l The Hello timer determines the intervalfor transmitting the Hello packets once.L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 HelloTimer(s) can be set to a greater value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer(s).

l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ESconfiguration timer at the LAPD linknetwork layer. It is used for setting thetime to transmit the configurationinformation on the ES route.

l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 ESTimer(s) can be set to a greater value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.


L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer(s).

l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the ISconfiguration timer at the LAPD linknetwork layer. It is used for setting thetime to transmit the configurationinformation through the L1/L2 router.

l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set accordingto the network situation. If the networkis in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) canbe set to a greater value. Otherwise, it isrecommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a smaller value.




A-37


L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer(s).

l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the holdtimer at the LAPD link network layer.

l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be setaccording to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 HoldTimer(s) can be set to a smaller value.Otherwise, it is recommended that youset L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.


COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.l COST indicates the overhead value of

the virtual LAPD that corresponds to theOSI tunnel.

l The overhead value determines whetherthis link is perverted. If the overheadvalue is smaller, this link has a higherpriority to be selected.

l This parameter needs to set according tothe planning information.

A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN

Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Bandwidth Management


Ethernet BoardVLAN ID

2 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCNcan be connected to the NMS through theSCC board, but the OptiX RTN 980 canalso be connected to the NMS through anEthernet interface. If an Ethernet port isused to carry the network managementinformation, the NE differentiates thenetwork management information andEthernet service information accordingto the VLAN ID.

l If the default VLAN ID of the inbandDCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in theservice, the Ethernet Board VLAN IDof the inband DCN can be changedmanually. The same VLAN ID must be,however, is used on the network-wideinband DCN.

Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidthfor inband DCN messaging on the Ethernetlink.

E1 PortBandwidth(Kbit/s)

- - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Tunnel Bandwidth(Kbit/s)


IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

64 to 1000 512 IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies thebandwidth for inband DCN messaging onthe radio link.

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN

Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting Ports


Port Name - - This parameter indicates the port name.



A-39


Enabled Status EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Enabled Status specifies the enablingstatus of the port.

l The network management informationcan be transmitted over the inband DCNwhen the DCN function is enabled forthe ports at both ends of a link.

A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose

Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting a ProtocolParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Name - - Displays the port name.

Protocol Type IPHWECC

IP l If the values of Protocol Type aredifferent from each other, the equipmentat both ends cannot be interconnectedwith each other. Therefore, ProtocolType must be set to the same value forthe equipment at both ends of a link.

l Set Protocol Type according to thenetwork planning information.Generally, it is recommended that youset this parameter to IP.

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access ControlThis section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

Navigation Pathl In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose

Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.l Click the Access Control tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Name - - Displays the Ethernet ports that support thisfunction.

Enabled Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l Specifies the enabling status of the port.l If the Enabled Status is set to

Enabled, this port can be used to supportaccess of the management informationfrom the NMS.

l If the Enabled Status is set toDisabled, this port cannot be used tosupport access of the managementinformation from the NMS.

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port.

Subnet Mask - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the submask of the port.

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > AccessControl from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access ControlParameter Value Range Default Value Description

The First NetworkPort

EnabledDisabled

Enabled After The First Network Port is set toEnabled for Ethernet access, the NE canaccess the NMS through the Ethernet port.

PORT - - This parameter displays the NMS port andthe NE cascading port on the system control,switching, and timing board.

Work Mode adapt10M Half_Duplex10M Full_Duplex100M Half_Duplex100M Full_Duplex

- This parameter specifies the working modesof the NMS port and the NE cascading porton the system control, switching, and timingboard.



A-41


Actual Work Mode - - This parameter displays the working modesof the NMS port and the NE cascading porton the system control, switching, and timingboard.

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports


Enable Serial PortAccess

SelectedDeselected

Selected After Enable Serial Port Access isselected, the NE can access the NMS orcommand lines through the serial port.

Access CommandLine

SelectedDeselected

Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, theserial interface can be used to access thecommand line terminal.

Access NM SelectedDeselected

Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interfacecan be used to access the NMS.

Baud Rate 1200240048009600192003840057600115200

9600 l This parameter specifies the datatransmission rate in the communicationsthrough serial ports.

l This parameter is set according to therate of the serial port at the opposite end,and the rates at both ends must be thesame.

A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.

A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.

A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.

A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Navigation Path1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE

User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.

2. Close the dialog box.

Parameters for NE user managementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

NE - - Displays the current NEname.

NE User - - Displays the registered NEuser name.

User Level - - Displays the registered NEuser level.

NE User Flag - - Displays whether aregistered NE user islogged in.

A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.

Navigation Path1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE

User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that theoperation is successful.

2. Close the dialog box.3. Click Add.


NE User - - Specifies the name of aregistered NE user.NOTE

The name of an NE cannotcontain any space orChinese characters.



A-43


User Level Monitor LevelOperation LevelMaintenance LevelSystem LevelDebug Level

Monitor Level l A Debug Level NEuser has all securityand configurationauthorities, and has theright to run debuggingcommands.

l A System Level NEuser has all securityand configurationauthorities.

l A MaintenanceLevel NE user hassome securityauthorities, someconfigurationauthorities, thecommunication settingauthority, and the logmanagementauthority.

l An Operation LevelNE user has all faultperformanceauthorities, somesecurity authorities,and someconfigurationauthorities.

l A Monitor Level NEuser has the right to useall query commands, tolog in, to log out, and tochange its ownpassword.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


NE User Flag LCT NE UserEMS NE UserCMD NE UserGeneral NE User

LCT NE User l Specifies the NE userflag.

l LCT NE Userindicates NE users forNE management onthe U2000 Local CraftTerminal (U2000LCT).

l EMS NE Userindicates NE users forNE management onthe U2000.

l CMD NE Userindicates NE users forNE management onthe CMD.

l General NE Userindicates NE users forall NMS types.

Detailed Description - - Describes a configuredNE user.

New Password - - l Specifies the passwordfor a new NE user.

Confirm Password - - Enter the same value asNew Password.

Whether the password isallowed to be modifiedimmediately

YesNo

Yes Specifies whether thepassword of a registeredNE user can be changed.

A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT AccessControl from the Function Tree.

Parameters for LCT Access Control





A-45


LCT AccessControl Switch

Access AllowedDisable Access

Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In thiscase, when the LCT requests an LCTuser to log in to the NE, the NE does notcheck the status of LCT Access ControlSwitch, and directly allows the LCT userto log in to the NE.

l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. Inthis case, when the LCT requests an LCTuser to log in to the NE, the NEdetermines whether to allow the LCTuser to log in to the NE through the LCTaccording to the status of LCT AccessControl Switch.

l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. Inthis case, when the NMS requests anNMS user to log in to the NE, the NMSuser can directly log in to the NE. Afterthe NMS user successfully logs in to theNE, the online LCT user is not affected.

l When both the LCT user and NMS userlog in to the NE, the online LCT user isnot affected after LCT Access ControlSwitch is set to Disable Access.

A.2 Radio Link ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICWorkgroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the XPIC tab.

3. Click New.

Parameters


IF ChannelBandwidth

28M40M56M

- l This parameter specifies the channelspacing when the XPIC function isenabled.

l When this parameter is set to 56M or40M, the high-power ODU must beused.

NOTEThe IFX2 board does not support the value40M.

PolarizationDirection-V

- - l This parameter indicates the polarizationdirection of a radio link.

l It is recommended that you set the IF porton the XPIC IF board that has a smallerslot number to Link ID-V and the IF porton the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-H.

PolarizationDirection-H

Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio linksbetween sites from being wronglyconnected.

l When the link ID received by an NE isdifferent from the link ID set for the NE,the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm andinserts the AIS.

l These two parameters are set accordingto the planning information. These twoparameters must be set to differentvalues, but Link ID-V must be set to thesame value at both ends of a link andLink ID-H must also be set to the samevalue at both ends of a link.

Link ID-H 2



A-47


Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the transmitpower of an ODU. The value of thisparameter must not exceed the ratedpower range supported by the ODU.

l It is recommended that you set thetransmit power of the ODU to the samevalue at both ends of a radio link.

l Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set thisparameter. Ensure that the receive powerof the ODU at the opposite end canensure stable radio services.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information.

MaximumTransmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module.

l This parameter is set to limit themaximum transmit power of the ODUwithin this preset range.

l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.


TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the channelcentral frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower transmitfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper transmit frequencylimit supported by the ODU and a half ofthe channel spacing.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventmutual interference between thetransmitter and the receiver.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TXhigh, the transmit frequency is one T/Rspacing higher than the receivefrequency. If Station Type of the ODUis TX low, the transmit frequency is oneT/R spacing lower than the receivefrequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacingsupported by the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and the T/R spacingshould be set according to the technicalspecifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, theODU does not transmit microwavesignals but can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l When this parameter is set to unmute,the ODU normally transmits andreceives microwave signals.

l In normal cases, Transmission Status isset to unmute.



A-49


ATPC Enabled DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dBhigher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold at the receiveend, the receiver notifies the transmitterto decrease or increase the transmitpower until the RSL is within the rangethat is 2 dB higher or lower than thecentral value between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower threshold.

l The settings of the ATPC attributes mustbe consistent at both ends of a radio link.

l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled.

l During the commissioning process, setthis parameter to Disabled to ensure thatthe transmit power is not changed. Afterthe commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

- -45.0 l The central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold is set as the expected receivepower.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower thresholdand 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC AutomaticThreshold Enable Status is set toDisabled.

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

- -70.0




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theautomatic threshold function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPICThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the XPIC tab.


Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

PolarizationDirection-V

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction V corresponds.

Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Vcorresponds.

PolarizationDirection-H

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H corresponds.

Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID towhich the polarization direction Hcorresponds.



A-51


IF ChannelBandwidth

28M40M56M

- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to thechannel spacing of the correspondingradio links.

l When this parameter is set to 56M or40M, the high-power ODU must beused.


NOTEThe IFX2 board does not support the value40M.

Power to BeReceived -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set theexpected receive power of the ODU andis mainly used in the antenna alignmentstage. After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, if theactual receive power of the ODU is 3 dBlower than the power expected to bereceived, the ODU indicator on the IFboard connected to the ODU blinksyellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),indicating that the antenna is not aligned.

l After the antenna alignment, after thestate that the antenna is aligned lasts for30 minutes, the NE automaticallydisables the antenna misalignmentindicating function.

l When this parameter takes the defaultvalue, the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Power to BeReceived -H(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set theexpected receive power of the ODU andis mainly used in the antenna alignmentstage. After this parameter is set, the NEautomatically enables the antennamisalignment indicating function.



l When this parameter takes the defaultvalue, the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.



- - l This parameter specifies the maximumtransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power rang of theODU in the guaranteed capacitymodulation module.


l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.




A-53


Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.




TransmissionFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.

l This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thespacing between the transmit frequencyand receive frequency of the ODU toprevent mutual interference between thetransmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. If theODU is a Tx low station, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, this parameter is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacingsupported by the ODU is used.


l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

TransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not workbut can normally receive microwavesignals.

l If this parameter is set to unmute, theODU can normally transmit and receivemicrowave signals.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set tounmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM ConfigurationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the workgroup.

Polarizationdirection

- - This parameter indicates the IF port to whichthe polarization direction H or thepolarization direction V corresponds.



A-55


AM Enable Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, the radio link uses only thespecified modulation scheme. In thiscase, you need to select ManuallySpecified Modulation Mode.

l When AM Enable Status is set toEnabled, the radio link uses thecorresponding modulation schemeaccording to the channel conditions.

Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure thereliable transmission of the E1 services andprovide bandwidth adaptively for theEthernet services when the AM function isenabled.

Modulation Modeof the GuaranteeAM Capacity

QPSK16QAM32QAM64QAM128QAM256QAM

- This parameter specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacitymust be higher than Modulation Mode of theGuarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

Modulation Modeof the Full AMCapacity


- This parameter specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, thevalue of this parameter is determined by thebandwidth of the services that need to betransmitted over the Hybrid radio and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacitymust be higher than Modulation Mode of theGuarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode


QPSK This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.

Transmit-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at thetransmit end.

Receive-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at the receiveend.

Parameters for ATPC ManagementParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled and ifthe RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higheror lower than the central value betweenthe ATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold at the receive end, thereceiver notifies the transmitter todecrease or increase the transmit poweruntil the RSL is within the range that is2 dB higher or lower than the centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold.


l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled.



- - l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower



A-57



threshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) o thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10dB.

l You can set this parameter only whenATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Disabled.

- -


DisabledEnabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, youneed to manually set ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm).

A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1

Protection from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.

Enabled EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter specifies whether thesignal degradation switching function ofN+1 protection is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the signal degradation condition isconsidered as a trigger condition ofprotection switching.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Select MappingDirection

Work UnitProtection Unit

Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mappingdirection of N+1 protection.


Select MappingWay

- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IFports as Work Unit and map theremaining IF port as Protection Unit.


Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unitand protection unit that have been set.

A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.



A-59

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1

Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters


Protection GroupID

- - This parameter indicates the ID of theprotection group.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies theWTR time.



SD Enable EnabledDisabled

- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the SD switching function of N+1 protection is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the SD condition is considered as atrigger condition of protectionswitching.


Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of theswitching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters


Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.

Line - - This parameter indicates the informationabout the working board or protectionboard.

Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.

Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.

Remote/Local EndIndication

- - This parameter indicates the local end orremote end.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_CreateThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Protection from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.


Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l This parameter specifies the workingmode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When Working Mode is set to HSB, theequipment provides a 1+1 hot standbyconfiguration for the IF board and ODUat both ends of each hop of a radio linkto realize the protection.

l When Working Mode is set to FD, thesystem uses two channels that have afrequency spacing between them, totransmit and receive the same signal. Theremote end selects signals from the tworeceived signals. With FD protection, theimpact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l When Working Mode is set to SD, thesystem uses two antennas that have aspace distance between them, to receivethe same signal. The equipment selectssignals from the two received signals.With SD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.




A-61


Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-Revertive

Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertivemode of the IF 1+1 protection.

l When Revertive Mode is set toRevertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state releases the switchingand enables the former working channelto return to the normal state some timeafter the former working channel isrestored to normal. It is recommendedthat you set this parameter to RevertiveMode.

l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-restore (WTR) time.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset WTR Time(s), a revertive switchingoccurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode. It is recommended that you usethe default value.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates whether thereverse switching function is enabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms tothe source end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. WhenEnable Reverse Switching at the sourceend is set to Enabled and the reverseswitching conditions are met, the IF 1+1protection switching occurs at the sourceend.

l Enable Reverse Switching is valid onlywhen Working Mode is set to HSB orSD.

l Generally, if Working Mode is set toHSB, it is recommended that you setEnable Reverse Switching toDisabled; if Working Mode is set toSD, it is recommended that you setEnable Reverse Switching toEnabled.

Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working boardof the protection group.

Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protectionboard of the protection group.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 ProtectionThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Protection GroupID




A-63


Working Mode HSBFDSD

- l This parameter indicates the workingmode of the created IF 1+1 protectiongroup.

l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a1+1 hot standby configuration for the IFboard and ODU at both ends of each hopof a radio link to realize the protection.

l In FD mode, the system uses twochannels that have a frequency spacingbetween them, to transmit and receivethe same signal. The remote end selectssignals from the two received signals.With FD protection, the impact of thefading on signal transmission is reduced.

l In SD mode, the system uses twoantennas that have a space distancebetween them, to receive the same signal.The equipment selects signals from thetwo received signals. With SDprotection, the impact of the fading onsignal transmission is reduced.

l The FD mode and SD mode arecompatible with the HSB switchingfunction.


Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-RevertiveMode

- l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the protection group.

l When this parameter is set to RevertiveMode, the NE that is in the switchingstate releases the switching and enablesthe former working channel to return tothe normal state some time after theformer working channel is restored tonormal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive Mode, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive Mode.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)




l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to RevertiveMode.


Enable ReverseSwitching

EnabledDisabled

- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the reverse switching function isenabled.

l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms tothe source end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnabled and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

Switching Status ofDevice

- - l This parameter indicates the switchingstate on the equipment side.

l Unknown is displayed when theswitching state on the channel side is notqueried or not obtained after a query.

Switching Status ofChannel

- - l This parameter indicates the switchingstate on the channel side.

l Unknown is displayed when theswitching state on the channel side is notqueried or not obtained after a query.

Active Board ofDevice

- - This parameter indicates the currentworking board on the equipment side.

Active Board ofChannel

- - This parameter indicates the currentworking board on the channel side.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the samevalue at both ends of a radio hop.



A-65


Unit - - This parameter indicates the working boardand protection board.

Slot MappingRelation

- - This parameter indicates the names andports of the working board and protectionboard.

Working Status ofDevice

- - This parameter indicates the working stateon the equipment side.

Signal Status ofChannel

- - This parameter indicates the status of thelink signal.

A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Configuring the IFParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM

- l This parameter indicates or specifies thework mode of the radio link in "workmode number, service capacity, channelspacing, modulation mode" format.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information. The work modesof the IF boards at the two ends of a radiolink must be the same.

NOTEThe IF1 board supports this parameter.



A-67


Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID ofa radio link. As the identifier of a radiolink, this parameter is used to preventincorrect connections of radio linksbetween sites.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofLink ID at the local end, the local endinserts the AIS signal to the downstreamdirection of the service. At the sametime, the local end reports MW_LIMalarm to the NMS, indicating that thelink IDs do not match.

l Link ID is set according to the planninginformation. Each radio link of an NEshould have a unique link ID, and thelink IDs at both ends of a radio linkshould be the same.

Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofRadio Link ID at the local end, the localend inserts the AIS signal to thedownstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports analarm to the NMS, indicating that thelink IDs do not match.

l When the radio link becomes faulty, thisparameter is displayed as an invalidvalue.

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH)SDH

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of servicescarried by the IF board.

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative E1 services, set this parameter toHybrid(Native E1+ETH).

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative STM-1 services, set thisparameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH).

l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,set this parameter to SDH.

NOTEThe ISU2 and ISX2 boards support thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


IF ChannelBandwidth

7M14M28M40M56M

- IF Channel Bandwidth indicates thechannel spacing of the corresponding radiolink. This parameter is set according to theplanning information.NOTEl This parameter is not applicable to the IF1

board.

l The IFU2 board does not support the value40M.

l The IFX2 board does not support the values7M, 14M, and 40M.

l The ISX2 board supports the channelspacings of 7M and 14M only when theXPIC function is disabled.

AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to theOptiX RTN 980.




l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensurethe reliable transmission of the E1services and provide bandwidthadaptively for the Ethernet serviceswhen the AM function is enabled.

l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AMfunction when IF Service Type isSDH.

NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually SpecifiedModulation Mode


QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.




A-69




QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.

l Modulation Mode of the GuaranteeAM Capacity specifies the lowest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the planning information. Generally,the value of this parameter is determinedby the service transmission bandwidththat the Hybrid radio must ensure and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.





l Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the planning information. Generally,the value of this parameter is determinedby the bandwidth of the services thatneed to be transmitted over the Hybridradio and the availability of the radio linkthat corresponds to this modulationscheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity must be higher than ModulationMode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.


STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IFboard.

l This parameter is available only whenIF Service Type is set to Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH) and SDH.

l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH), this parameter can be setto 0 or 1.

l If IF Service Type is SDH, thisparameter can be set to 1 or 2.

NOTEThe IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not supportthis parameter.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Guarantee E1Capacity

- - l If AM Enable Status is set toEnabled, this parameter needs to be setaccording to IF Channel Bandwidth,Modulation Mode of the GuaranteeAM Capacity, and the actuallytransmitted services.

l If AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, this parameter needs to be setaccording to IF Channel Bandwidth,Manually Specified ModulationMode, and the actually transmittedservices.

l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, thisparameter is available when IF ServiceType is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).


Guarantee E1Capacity Range

- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in guarantee capacity modulationmode.

Data ServiceBandwidth(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the data service bandwidth of theIF board.

Enable E1 Priority DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether toenable the E1 priority function.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.





A-71


Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number oftransmitted E1 services in ModulationMode of the Full AM Capacity.

l This parameter is valid if Enable E1Priority is set to Enabled.

l E1 service bandwidth in full capacitymode ≤ Service bandwidth in fullcapacity mode - Service bandwidth inguarantee capacity mode + E1 servicebandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.In addition, the number of E1 services infull capacity modulation mode should besmaller than or equal to the maximumnumber of E1 services in full capacitymodulation mode.

l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to thesame value at both ends of a radio link.



Full E1 CapacityRange

- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RFParameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Frequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower TXfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper TX frequency limitsupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Range of TXFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit frequency of the ODU.

l The Range of Frequency(MHz)depends on the specifications of theODU.

Actual TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmitfrequency of the ODU.

Actual RXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivefrequency of the ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacingbetween the transmit frequency and thereceive frequency of an ODU to preventinterference between them.

l If Station Type of the ODU is TXhigh, the TX frequency is one T/Rspacing higher than the receivefrequency. If Station Type of the ODUis TX low, the TX frequency is one T/Rspacing lower than the receivefrequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.


l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/Rspacing of the ODU.



A-73

Parameters for Configuring the PowerParameter Value Range Default Value Description

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. Thisparameter cannot be set to a value thatexceeds the nominal power range of theODU.

l This parameter cannot take a valuegreater than the preset value ofMaximum Transmit Power(dBm).




Range of TXPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of thetransmit power of the ODU.

Actual TX Power(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actualtransmit power of the ODU.

l If the ATPC function is enabled, thequeried actual transmit power may bedifferent from the preset value.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Power to BeReceived(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used toset the expected receive power of theODU and is mainly used in the antennaalignment stage. After this parameter isset, the NE automatically enables theantenna misalignment indicatingfunction.

l When the antenna misalignmentindicating function is enabled, When theantenna non-alignment indicationfunction is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is 3 dB lower than thepower expected to be received, the ODUindicator on the IF board connected tothe ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300ms off), indicating that the antenna is notaligned.


l When Power to Be Received(dBm)takes the default value, the antennamisalignment indicating function isdisabled.


Actual RX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivepower of the ODU.

TX Status UnmuteMute

Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l When this parameter is set to Mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not workbut can normally receive microwavesignals.

l When this parameter is set to Unmute,the ODU can normally transmit andreceive microwave signals.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set TX Status to unmute.

Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmitstatus of the ODU.



A-75

Equipment Information


Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency bandwhere the ODU operates.

Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmissioncapacity only and are irrelevant to thetype of transmitted service.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.

l The transmit frequency of a Tx highstation is one T/R spacing higher than thetransmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingserial number and the manufacturer code ofthe ODU.

TransmissionPower Type

- - This parameter indicates the level of theoutput power of the ODU.

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.

A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear

MS from the Function Tree.

2. Click Create.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters on the Main InterfaceParameter Value Range Default

ValueDescription

Protection Type 1+1 Protection1:N Protection

1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies theprotection type of the linearMSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,one working channel and oneprotection channel arerequired. When the workingchannel fails, the service isswitched from the workingchannel to the protectionchannel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,N working channels and oneprotection channel arerequired. Normal services aretransmitted on the workingchannels and extra servicesare transmitted on theprotection channel. When oneworking channel fails, theservices are switched fromthis working channel to theprotection channel, and theextra services are interrupted.

l If extra services need to betransmitted or severalworking channels arerequired, select 1:NProtection.

l This parameter is setaccording to the planninginformation.



A-77

Parameter Value Range DefaultValue

Description

Switching Mode Single-EndedSwitchingDual-EndedSwitching

Single-EndedSwitching (1+1 Protection)Dual-EndedSwitching (1:NProtection)

l This parameter specifies theswitching mode of the linearMSP.

l In single-ended mode, theswitching occurs only at oneend and the state of the otherend remains unchanged.

l In dual-ended mode, theswitching occurs at both endsat the same time.

l If the linear MSP type is set to1:N Protection, SwitchingMode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Revertive Mode Non-RevertiveRevertive

Non-Revertive(1+1Protection)Revertive (1:NProtection)

l This parameter specifies therevertive mode of the linearMSP.

l When this parameter is set toRevertive, the NE that is inthe switching state releasesthe switching and enables theformer working channel toreturn to the normal statesome time after the formerworking channel is restored tonormal.

l When this parameter is set toNon-Revertive, the NE thatis in the switching state keepsthe current state unchangedunless another switchingoccurs even though theformer working channel isrestored to normal.

l It is recommended that youset this parameter toRevertive.

l If the linear MSP type is set to1:N Protection, RevertiveMode can be set toRevertive only.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameter Value Range DefaultValue

Description

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies theWTR time.

l When the time after theformer working channel isrestored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertiveswitching occurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s)only when Revertive Modeis set to Revertive.

l It is recommended that youuse the default value.


Enabled l This parameter indicates orspecifies whether theswitching at the SD alarm ofthe linear MSP is enabled.

l When this parameter is set toEnabled, the B2_SD alarm isconsidered as a switchingcondition.

l It is recommended that youset this parameter toEnabled.

Protocol Type New ProtocolRestructureProtocol

New Protocol l The new protocol issupported at the early stage,and the mainstream protocolversion is used currently.

l The restructure protocoloptimizes the new protocoland provides better measuresto protect the new protocol,thus ensuring that the newprotocol runs in a bettermanner.

l The new protocol is moremature, and the restructureprotocol complies with thestandard. It is recommendedthat you use the new protocol.

l You must ensure that theinterconnected NEs run theprotocols of the same type.



A-79



West Working UnitWest ProtectionUnit

West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mappingdirection of the linear MSP.

Select MappingMode

- - l This parameter specifies the mappingboard and port in the mapping direction.

l If the protection type is set to 1+1Protection, only one line port can bemapped as West Working Unit.

l Only one line port can be mapped asWest Protection Unit.

l The line port mapped as WestProtection Unit and the line portmapped as West Working Unit shouldbe configured for different boards ifpossible.

Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slotmapping relations, including the mappingdirection and the corresponding mappingmode.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MSfrom the Function Tree.


Protection GroupID





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Protection Type - - l This parameter indicates the protectiontype of the linear MSP group.

l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, oneworking channel and one protectionchannel are required. When the workingchannel fails, the service is switchedfrom the working channel to theprotection channel.

l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N workingchannels and one protection channel arerequired. Normal services aretransmitted on the working channels andextra services are transmitted on theprotection channel. When one workingchannel fails, the services are switchedfrom this working channel to theprotection channel, and the extraservices are interrupted.

l If extra services need to be transmittedor several working channels arerequired, select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode Single-EndedSwitchingDual-EndedSwitching

- l This parameter indicates or specifies theswitching mode of the linear MSP.

l In single-ended mode, the switchingoccurs only at one end and the state ofthe other end remains unchanged.

l In dual-ended mode, the switchingoccurs at both ends at the same time.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Switching Mode can be setto Dual-Ended Switching only.



A-81



- l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the linear MSP.

l When this parameter is set toRevertive, the NE that is in theswitching state releases the switchingand enables the former working channelto return to the normal state some timeafter the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in theswitching state keeps the current stateunchanged unless another switchingoccurs even though the former workingchannel is restored to normal.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Revertive.

l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:NProtection, Revertive Mode can be setto Revertive only.


l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.

l You can set WTR Time(s) only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.



- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the reverse switching functionis enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled,the B2_SD alarm is considered as aswitching condition.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Protocol Type New ProtocolRestructure Protocol

- l The new protocol is supported at theearly stage, and the mainstream protocolversion is used currently.

l The restructure protocol optimizes thenew protocol and provides bettermeasures to protect the new protocol,thus ensuring that the new protocol runsin a better manner.

l You must ensure that the interconnectedNEs run the protocols of the same type.

l The new protocol is more mature, andthe restructure protocol complies withthe standard. It is recommended that youuse the new protocol.

Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol statusof the linear MSP.

Protection Subnet - - This parameter displays the protectionsubnet where the MS protection isconfigured.


Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of theunits, namely, the west protection unit or thewest working unit, is currently in theprotection status.

West Line - - This parameter indicates the west protectionunit and the west working unit of the linearMSP.

West SwitchingStatus

- - This parameter indicates the switchingstatus of the line.

Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the workingchannel protected by the current protectionchannel.

Remote/Local EndIndication

- - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-Ended Switching, the central office endthat issues the switching command isdisplayed.



A-83

A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose

Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.

A dialog box is displayed, prompting for confirmation.3. Click OK.


Level STM-4 STM-4 Specifies the transmission level of ring MSPservices. The parameter value is alwaysSTM-4.

Protection Type 2-fiber BidirectionalMultiplex Section

2-fiber BidirectionalMultiplex Section

Specifies the ring MSP protection type. Theparameter value is always 2-fiberBidirectional Multiplex Section.

Local Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID that the local NE useson the MSP ring. Node IDs of NEs on thering must be different from each other.

West Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that isconnected to the west line board on the localNE. The parameter value must be differentfrom Local Node.

East Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that isconnected to the east line board on the localNE. The parameter value must be differentfrom Local Node.

WTR Time(s) 300-720 600 l Specifies the WTR time for the local NE.After the working channel recovers,services are switched back from theprotection channel to the workingchannel when the WTR time expires.

l Prevents frequent service switches. Thedefault value is recommended.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Enabled l Specifies whether the B2_SD alarm onthe local NE functions as a switchingtrigger condition. When the parametervalue is Enabled, the B2_SD alarm onthe local NE functions as a switchingtrigger condition.


Protocol Type New ProtocolRestructure Protocol

New Protocol l The new MSP protocol is supportedfrom an early stage, and is still widelyused.

l Compared with the new MSP protocol,the restructure MSP protocol isoptimized and more stable,incorporating better protectionmeasures.

l The new MSP protocol has highertechnology maturity than the restructureMSP protocol, and therefore is generallyrecommended. The restructure MSPprotocol, however, features higherstandard compliance than the new MSPprotocol. Therefore, the restructure MSPprotocol is used when the new MSPprotocol fails to support interconnectionbetween Huawei RTN equipment andthird-party equipment.

l Two interconnected NEs must use thesame MSP protocol type.

Parameters for Slot Mapping RelationshipsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


West Line 1East Line 1

West Line 1 Specifies the mapping direction of amember in a ring MSP protection group.

Select MappingMode

- - l Specifies the mapped board and port inthe mapping direction.

l It is recommended that you map theSL4D-1 port to West Line 1 and map theSL4D-2 port to East Line 1.

Mapped Board - - Displays the configured slot mappingrelationship, including the mappingdirection and the mapping mode.



A-85

A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSPThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >Ring MS from the Function Tree.


Protection GroupID

- - Displays the ID of a ring MSP protectiongroup.

Level - - Displays the transmission level of ring MSPservices. The parameter value is alwaysSTM-4.

Protection Type - - Displays the ring MSP protection type. Theparameter value is always 2-fiberBidirectional Multiplex Section.

Local Node - - Displays the node ID that the local NE useson the MSP ring.

West Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that isconnected to the west line board on the localNE.

East Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that isconnected to the east line board on the localNE.

WTR Time(s) - --

Displays the wait-to-restore (WTR) time ofthe local NE. After the working channel isrestored, revertive switching occurs whenthe WTR time expires.

SD Enable - - Displays whether SD Enable is Enabled forthe local NE. If SD Enable is Enabled, theB2_SD alarm is regarded as a switchingtrigger condition.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Protocol Type - - l Displays the protocol type used by thelocal NE.

l The new MSP protocol is supportedfrom an early stage, and is still widelyused.

l Compared with the new MSP protocol,the restructure MSP protocol isoptimized and more stable,incorporating better protectionmeasures.

Protocol Status - - Displays the current protocol status of thelocal NE.

Protection Subnet - - Displays the current protection subnet.

Parameters for Slot Mapping RelationshipsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Mapping Direction - - Displays the direction of an MSP ring.

Slot Mapping - - Displays the slot mapping relationship in aring MSP protection group.

Switching Status - - Displays the current switching status of thelocal NE.

A.4 SDH/PDH Service ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services IntoSNCP ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCPservices.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,configuring cross-connections).

A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.



A-87

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS InsertionThis section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-connections.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH

Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-

connection.3. Click Create.


Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of theservice to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, set this parameter toVC4.

Direction BidirectionalUnidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create only the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink and the cross-connections from the service sink to theservice source.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice source.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the servicesource is located.

l This parameter cannot be set whenSource Slot is set to the slot of thetributary board.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange of the service source.

l This parameter can be set to a number orseveral numbers. When setting thisparameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) torepresent a consecutive number. Forexample, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.


Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of theservice sink.

Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number ofthe VC-4 channel where the service sinkis located.

l This parameter cannot be set when SinkSlot is set to the slot of the tributaryboard.

Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter specifies the timeslotrange of the service sink.





A-89


E1 Priority HighLowNone

- l This parameter specifies the priority ofan E1 service. This parameter isavailable only if the E1 priority functionis enabled for the ports configured in thecross-connections.

l If E1 Priority is set to High,transmission of the E1 service is ensuredin any modulation scheme.

l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmissionof the E1 service is ensured only in full-capacity modulation scheme

l If the service priority is not specifiedduring service creation, E1 Priority isNone. In this case, the E1 priority of aservice needs to be changed after theservice is created.

ActivateImmediately

YesNo

Yes l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredservice.

l To immediately deliver the configuredSDH service to the NE, set this parameterto Yes.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCPService Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.


Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-

connection.3. Click Create SNCP Service.


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of theservice to be created is SNCP.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Direction BidirectionalUnidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create only the cross-connections from the SNCP servicesource to the SNCP service sink.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the SNCP servicesource to the service sink and the cross-connections from the SNCP service sinkto the service source.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of theSCNP service to be created.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, set this parameter to VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, set this parameter toVC4.



A-91


Hold-off Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration ofthe hold-off time.

l When a line is faulty, SNCP switchingcan be performed on the NE after a delayof time to prevent the situation where theNE performs SNCP switching and otherprotection switching at the same time.

l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally setto prevent SNCP protection switching,when SNCP works with N+1 protection.Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longerthan the switching time of any protectionmode that works with SNCP. Generally,Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.

l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,trigger conditions for HSM switching orSNCP switching trigger HSM switchingbut do not trigger SNCP switching.Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) doesnot need to be set in this case.

l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection is much longer than that ofSNCP. Therefore, to shorten serviceinterruptions, it is recommended that youdo not set Hold-off Time(100ms) whenSNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SDprotection.

l If only the SNCP scheme is available, itis recommended that you set the hold-offtime to 0.


Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether toswitch the service to the original workingchannel after the fault is rectified.

l If this parameter is set to Revertive, theservice is switched from the protectionchannel to the original working channel.If this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the service is not switchedfrom the protection channel to theoriginal working channel.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.l When the time after the former working

channel is restored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.















A-93






Configure SNCPTangent Ring

SelectedDeselected

Deselected l After the Configure SNCP TangentRing checkbox is selected, you canquickly configure the SNCP service forthe SNCP ring tangent point.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou do not select this checkbox.

ActivateImmediately

SelectedDeselected

Selected l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configuredSNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediatelycheckbox is selected, you canimmediately activate the created SNCPservice.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH ServiceConfiguration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services

This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCPservices.


Service Configuration from the Function Tree.2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-

click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to

SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of theservice to be created is SNCP.

Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of theSNCP service.

Level - - l This parameter indicates the level of theSNCP service.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, the parameter value is VC12.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, theparameter value is VC3.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, the parameter value isVC4.



A-95



0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration ofthe hold-off time.







Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether toswitch the service to the original workingchannel after the fault is rectified. If thisparameter is set to "Revertive", theservice is switched from the protectionchannel to the original working channel.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.l When the time after the former working

channel is restored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.















A-97






Configure SNCPTangent Ring

- - After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ringcheckbox is selected, you can quicklyconfigure the SNCP service for the SNCPring tangent point.

ActivateImmediately

- - l This parameter indicates whether toimmediately activate the configuredSNCP service.

l After the Activate Immediatelycheckbox is selected, you canimmediately activate the created SNCPservice.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,configuring cross-connections).

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH ServiceConfiguration from the Function Tree.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Cross-Connection ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12VC3VC4

- l This parameter indicates the level of theservice.

l If the service is an E1 service or a dataservice that is bound with VC-12channels, VC12 is displayed.

l If the service is a data service that isbound with VC-3 channels, VC3 isdisplayed.

l If all the services on a VC-4 channel passthrough the NE, VC4 is displayed.

Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of theservice source.

Source Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of thesource sink.

Sink Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service sink.

E1 Priority HighLowNone

- l This parameter specifies the priority ofan E1 service. This parameter isavailable only if the E1 priority functionis enabled for the ports configured in thecross-connections.

l If E1 Priority is set to High,transmission of the E1 service is ensuredin any modulation scheme.

l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmissionof the E1 service is ensured only in full-capacity modulation scheme

l If the service priority is not specifiedduring service creation, E1 Priority isNone. In this case, the E1 priority of aservice needs to be changed after theservice is created.

Activation Status YesNo

- This parameter indicates whether to activatethe service.

Bound GroupNumber


Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.



A-99


Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-ConnectionsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12VC3VC4





Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of theservice source.

Source Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service source.

Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of thesource sink.

Sink Timeslot/Path

- - This parameter indicates the timeslot ortimeslot range of the service sink.

Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP ServiceControl from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface


Service Type - - This parameter indicates the serviceprotection type of the protection group.

Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots wherethe working service source and protectionservice source of the protection group arelocated.

Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots wherethe working service sink and protectionservice sink of the protection group arelocated.

Level VC12VC3VC4





Current Status - - This parameter indicates the currentswitching mode and switching status of theservices of the protection group.

Revertive Mode RevertiveNon-Revertive

- l This parameter indicates or specifies therevertive mode of the service.

l This parameter determines whether toswitch the service from the protectionchannel to the original working channelafter the fault is rectified.





A-101



l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches thepreset WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.




0 to 100 - l This parameter specifies the duration ofthe hold-off time.









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


SD InitiationCondition

- Null l This parameter indicates or specifies theconditions that trigger the protectionswitching of the service.

l After being selected as SD InitiationCondition, an alarm becomes acondition for triggering switching of anSNCP service.

l It is recommended that you set SDInitiation Condition to the samecondition for Working Service andProtection Service.

l The protection switching conditions inSD Initiation Condition are optionalvalues not included in the default values,and they are set according to the planninginformation.

Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of theworking service and protection service ofthe protection group.

Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Group Type - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether theworking service or protection service iscurrently received by the protection group.

Trail Name - - Displays the trail name.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS InsertionThis section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > TriggeredAlarm Insertion from the Function Tree.



A-103


Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface


Port - - Displays the slot ID of the IF board and theID of the IF port.

High Channel - - Displays the higher order path number of theIF board.

Low Channel - - Displays the lower order path number of theIF board.

Insert E1_AIS toTU_AIS

EnableDisable

Disable If this parameter is set to Enable for an E1path and the E1 path detects the E1_AISalarm, the TU_AIS alarm is inserted intothis path.

A.5 Parameters for Board InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.5.1 PDH Port ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interfaceboards.

A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet BoardsThis section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.

A.5.3 Serial Port ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.

A.5.4 Microwave Interface ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

A.5.5 IF Board ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

A.5.6 ODU ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.

A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface BoardsThis topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.

A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface BoardsThis topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.

A.5.9 Parameters for OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.5.1 PDH Port ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interfaceboards.

A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.

A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.

A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >

Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the General Attributes tab.


Port - - Displays the ID of aservice port.

Name - - Specifies or displays thecustomized port name.

Port Mode Layer 1Layer 2

Layer 2 l Specifies the workingmode of a PDH port.

l When this parameter isset to Layer 1, the portcan transmit TDMsignals. A port cantransmit CES andserial services only ifthis parameter is set toLayer 1.

l When this parameter isset to Layer 2, the portcan transmit ATMsignals.



A-105


Encapsulation Type - - l DisplaysEncapsulation Typeof a PDH port.

l When Port Mode isLayer 1,Encapsulation Typetakes its default valueNull.

l When Port Mode isLayer 2,Encapsulation Typetakes its default valueATM.

A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.


Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.


Port - - Displays the name of aservice port.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Frame Format UnframeDouble FrameCRC-4 Multiframe

CRC-4 Multiframe l Specifies the frameformat.

l If a CES service usesthe emulation mode ofCESoPSN, thisparameter can assumethe value CRC-4Multiframe orDouble Frame. Thevalue CRC-4Multiframe isrecommended.

l If a CES service usesthe emulation mode ofSAToP, this parameterneeds to assume thevalue Unframe.

l The value of FrameFormat must be thesame at the local andopposite ends.

Line Encoding Format - - Displays the line encodingformat. The parametervalue is always HDB3.



A-107


Loopback Mode Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l Specifies the loopbackstatus for a port.

l Non-Loopbackindicates thatloopbacks arecancelled or notperformed.

l Inloop indicates thatthe signals that need tobe transmitted to theopposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates thatthe received signals arelooped back.

l This function is usedfor fault locating forthe PDH ports. Thisfunction affectsservices over relatedports. Therefore,exercise precautionbefore starting thisfunction.

l Generally, thisparameter is set toNon-Loopback.

Impedance - - Displays the portimpedance.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Frame Mode 30(ATM)31(ATM,CES)

- l 30 timeslots: In an E1frame format,timeslots 1 to 15 and 17to 31 are used totransmit service data,and timeslot 16 is usedto transmit signaling.

l 31 timeslots: In an E1frame format,timeslots 1 to 31 areused to transmitservice data.

l This parameter isunavailable if FrameFormat is Unframe.

l The port frame modesneed to be the same atthe local and oppositeends.

Clock Mode Master ModeSlave ModeSystem Clock Mode

Master Mode l Master Mode: Thesystem clock is used asthe output clock ofservices.

l Slave Mode: The CESACR clock is used asthe output clock ofservices. The portinputting E1 clocks onSlave is set to SlaveMode.

l System Clock Mode:The upstream E1 lineclock of the oppositeequipment is used asthe output clock ofservices. The portinputting E1 clocks onMaster is set to SystemClock Mode

Composite PortLoopback

- - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.

Service Load Indication - - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.



A-109


Equalize Input Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.

Equalize Outpput Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.

A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet BoardsThis section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.

A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.

A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface

Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the General Attributes tab.


Port - - Displays the port name.

Name - - Specifies the port name.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Enable Port EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Specifies whether anEthernet port isenabled. An Ethernetport can receive,process, and forwardEthernet services onlyif this parameter is setto Enabled.

l Set this parameteraccording to theplanning information.


Layer 2 l Port Mode specifiesthe mode of theEthernet port.

l If Port Mode is Layer2, EncapsulationType can be set toNull, 802.1Q, orQinQ.

l If Port Mode is Layer3, EncapsulationType can be set to802.1Q only and theport can carry MPLStunnels.



A-111


Encapsulation Type Null802.1QQinQ

- l Encapsulation Typespecifies the method ofthe port to process thereceived packets.

l If you setEncapsulation Typeto Null, the porttransparentlytransmits the receivedpackets.

l If you setEncapsulation Typeto 802.1Q, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1q standard.

l If you setEncapsulation Typeto QinQ, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1ad QinQstandard.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Working Mode Auto-Negotiation10M Half-Duplex10M Full-Duplex100M Half-Duplex100M Full-Duplex1000M Full-Duplex

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports ofdifferent types supportdifferent WorkingMode.

l When the equipmenton the opposite sideworks in auto-negotiation mode, setthe Working Mode ofthe equipment on thelocal side to Auto-Negotiation.

l When the equipmenton the opposite sideworks in full-duplexmode, set theWorking Mode of theequipment on the localside to 10M Full-Duplex, 100M Full-Duplex, or 1000MFull-Duplexdepending on the portrate of the equipmenton the opposite side.

l When the equipmenton the opposite sideworks in half-duplexmode, set theWorking Mode of theequipment on the localside to 10M Half-Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, or Auto-Negotiationdepending on the portrate of the equipmenton the opposite side.

l GE electrical portssupport 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.

l GE optical portssupport 1000M full-



A-113


duplex and auto-negotiation.

NOTEThe logical EG2D boarddoes not support half-duplex.

Max Frame Length(byte)

1518 to 9600 1522 The value of Max FrameLength(byte) should begreater than the length ofany frame to betransported.

Auto-NegotiationAbility

Auto-Negotiation10M Half-Duplex10M Full-Duplex100M Half-Duplex100M Full-Duplex1000M Full-Duplex

FE: 100M Full-DuplexGE: 1000M Full-Duplex

l Auto-NegotiationAbility specifies theauto-negotiationcapability of theEthernet port.

l For GE optical ports,Auto-NegotiationAbility can be set to1000M Full-Duplexonly.

l Auto-NegotiationAbility is valid onlywhen Working Modeis set to Auto-Negotiation.

Logical Port Attribute Optical PortElectrical Port

- l This parameterspecifies the attributeof the logical port.

l The SFP on theEM6F, CSHN boardsupports the opticalport and electricalport.

Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe attribute of thephysical port.

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Flow Control tab.


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port name.

Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode

DisabledEnable Symmetric FlowControl

Disabled l Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Mode isvalid only whenWorking Mode is notset to Auto-Negotiation.

l Non-AutonegotiationFlow Control Modeof the equipment onthe local side must beconsistent with thenon-autonegotiationflow control mode ofthe equipment on theopposite side

l The OptiX RTN 980supports only two non-auto-negotiation flowcontrol modes,namely, Disabledmode and EnableSymmetric FlowControl mode.



A-115


Auto-Negotiation FlowControl Mode

DisabledEnable Symmetric FlowControl

Disabled l Auto-NegotiationFlow Control Mode isvalid only whenWorking Mode is setto Auto-Negotiation.

l Auto-NegotiationFlow Control Modeof the equipment onthe local side must beconsistent with theauto-negotiation flowcontrol mode of theequipment on theopposite side

l The OptiX RTN 980supports only twoauto-negotiation flowcontrol modes,namely, Disabledmode and EnableSymmetric FlowControl mode.

A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main InterfaceNOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


QinQ Type Domain - - l When EncapsulationType in the GeneralAttributes tab page isset to QinQ, you needto set QinQ TypeDomain. The defaultvalue is 88A8.

l When EncapsulationType in the GeneralAttributes tab page isset to Null or 802.1Q,you cannot set QinQType Domain. In thiscase, QinQ TypeDomain is displayedas FFFF and cannot bechanged.

l QinQ Type Domainshould be set to thesame value for all theports on the EM6T/EM6F board or theEG2D logical board.

TAG Tag AwareAccessHybrid

Tag Aware l If all the accessedservices are frameswith the VLAN tag(tagged frames), setTAG to Tag Aware.

l If all the accessedservices are frameswithout the VLAN tag(untagged frames), setTAG to Access.

l If the accessedservices containtagged frames anduntagged frames, setTAG to Hybrid.

NOTETAG specifies the TAGflag of a port. For detailsabout the TAG flags andassociated frame-processing methods, seeTable A-2.



A-117


Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID isvalid only when TAGis set to Access orHybrid.

l Default VLAN ID isset according to theactual situations.

NOTEFor details about thefunctions of Default VLANID, see Table A-2.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l VLAN Priority isvalid only when TAGis set to Access orHybrid.

l When the VLANpriority is required todivide streams or to beused for otherpurposes, VLANPriority is setaccording to theplanning information.In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

NOTEFor details about thefunctions of VLANPriority, see Table A-2.

Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discardsthe frame.

The port receivesthe frame.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The ports add theVLAN tag, to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe and receivethe frame.

The ports add theVLAN tag, to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe and receivethe frame.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Port Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isDefault VLANID, the portstrips the VLANtag from theframe and thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isnot DefaultVLAN ID, theport directlytransmits theframe.

A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.


Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main InterfaceNOTE

Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.


Port - - Displays the port name.

Enable Tunnel DisabledEnabled

Enabled l If Enable Tunnel is setEnabled, a portidentifies andprocesses MPLSlabels.

l Enable Tunnel isavailable if you setPort Mode to Layer 3in the GeneralAttributes tab.



A-119


Specify IP Address ManuallyUnspecified

Unspecified l Specifies the method ofsetting the IP addressof a port.

l The valueUnspecified indicatesthat the IP addresses donot need to beconfigured.

l The value Manuallyindicates that the IPaddress of the port canbe manuallyconfigured.

IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IPaddress of a port.

l This parameter isavailable when SpecifyIP Address isManually.

l The IP addresses ofdifferent ports on theNE cannot be in thesame networksegment, but the IPaddresses of the portsat both ends of theMPLS tunnel must bein the same networksegment.

IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnetmask of a port.

l This parameter isavailable when SpecifyIP Address isManually.

A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.


Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Port PhysicalParameters

- - This parameter indicatesthe physical parameters ofthe port.

MAC Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameterspecifies the loopbackstate at the MAC layer.When this parameter isset to Inloop, theEthernet signalstransmitted to theopposite end arelooped back.

l In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

PHY Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameterspecifies the loopbackstate at the PHY layer.When this parameter isset to Inloop, theEthernet physicalsignals transmitted tothe opposite end arelooped back.

l In normal cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of theport.

Transmitting Rate(kbit/s)

- - This parameter indicatesthe rate at which the datapackets are transmitted.

Receiving Rate(kbit/s) - - This parameter indicatesthe rate at which the datapackets are received.

Loopback Check EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter specifieswhether to enable loopdetection, which is used tocheck whether a loopexists on the port.



A-121


Loopback PortShutdown

EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicateswhether to enable the loopport shutdown function.

Egress PIR Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

- - This parameter indicatesthe egress PIR bandwidth.

Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies whether tolimit the traffic rate ofthe broadcast packetsaccording to theproportion of thebroadcast packets inthe total packets.When the equipment atthe opposite end mayencounter a broadcaststorm, this parameteris set to Enabled.

l If Ethernet services areE-LAN services, therecommended value isEnabled.

l This parameter takeseffect only for E-LANservices in the ingressdirection.

Broadcast PacketSuppression Threshold

0 to 100 30 When the proportion ofthe broadcast packets inthe total packets exceedsthe value of thisparameter, the receivedbroadcast packets arediscarded. The value ofthis parameter should bemore than the proportionof the broadcast packets inthe total packets beforethe broadcast stormoccurs. In normal cases,this parameter is set todefault value.

A.5.3 Serial Port ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.

A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial PortsThis topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.

A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.


Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.2. Click the General Attributes tab.


Port - - Displays the name of theport where a serial serviceis configured.

Name - - Specifies or displays thecustomized port name.

Level - - l Specifies or displaysthe serial port level.

l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/s timeslots of E1signals can be bound.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 980supports 64K Timeslotonly.

Used Port - - Displays the physical portthat carries a serialservice.

64K Timeslot - - Displays the timeslots thata serial service occupies.The timeslots can beconsecutive or not.



A-123



Layer 3 l Displays or specifiesthe port mode.

l A port supports ATMencapsulation if itsPort Mode is Layer2. A port does notsupport encapsulationif its Port Mode isLayer 3.

Encapsulation Type - - l Displays and specifiesthe encapsulation typeof a PW.

l When Port Mode isLayer 2, thisparameter displaysATM; when PortMode is Layer 3, thisparameter displaysNull.

A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial PortsThis topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.


Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the New tab.


Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the port wherethe serial service isconfigured.

Name - - Specifies the customizedport name.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Level 64K Timeslot 64K Timeslot l Specifies the serialport level.

l When this parameter isset to 64K Timeslot ,E1 timeslots can bebound.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 980supports only the parametervalue 64K Timeslot .

Used Board - - Specifies the board wherea serial port is located.

Used Port - - Displays the board wherea serial port is located.

High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the 64 kbit/stimeslots to be bound withthe serial port. Thetimeslots can beconsecutive or not.

A.5.4 Microwave Interface ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.

A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwaveinterfaces.

A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwaveinterfaces.



A-125


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the General Attributes tab.


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF port.

Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thecustomized port name.


Layer 2 l If Port Mode is Layer 2, EncapsulationType can be set to Null, 802.1Q, orQinQ.

l If Port Mode is Layer 3, EncapsulationType can be set to 802.1Q only and theport can carry tunnels.

EncapsulationType

Null802.1QQinQ

802.1Q l Encapsulation Type specifies themethod of the port to process thereceived packets.

l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, theport transparently transmits the receivedpackets.

l If Encapsulation Type is set to802.1Q, the port identifies the packetsthat comply with the IEEE 802.1Qstandard.

l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ,the port identifies the packets thatcomply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQstandard.

A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwaveinterfaces.


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Layer 2 AttributesNOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.



QinQ TypeDomain

- - l When Encapsulation Type in theGeneral Attributes tab page is set toQinQ, you need to set QinQ TypeDomain. The default value is 88A8.

l When Encapsulation Type in theGeneral Attributes tab page is set toNull or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQType Domain. In this case, QinQ TypeDomain is displayed as FFFF andcannot be changed.

Tag Tag AwareAccessHybrid

Tag Aware l If all the accessed services are framesthat contain the VLAN tag (taggedframes), set Tag to "Tag Aware".

l If all the accessed services are framesthat do not contain the VLAN tag(untagged frames), set Tag to "Access".

l If the accessed services contain taggedframes and untagged frames, set Tag to"Hybrid".

NOTETag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For detailsabout the TAG flags and associated frame-processing methods, see Table A-3.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID is valid only whenTAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

l Default VLAN ID needs to be setaccording to the actual situations.

NOTEFor details about the functions of Default VLANID, see Table A-3.



A-127


VLAN Priority 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

0 l VLAN Priority is valid only whenTAG is set to Access or Hybrid.

l When the VLAN priority is required todivide streams or to be used for otherpurposes, VLAN Priority needs to be setaccording to the planning information. Innormal cases, it is recommended that youuse the default value.

NOTEFor details about the functions of VLANPriority, see Table A-3.

Table A-3 Data frame processing

Status Type of DataFrame

Processing Method


Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discardsthe frame.

The port receivesthe frame.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The port receivesthe frame after theVLAN tag thatcorresponds to"Default VLAN ID"and "VLANPriority" is added tothe frame.

The port receivesthe frame after theVLAN tag thatcorresponds to"Default VLAN ID"and "VLANPriority" is added tothe frame.

Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is"Default VLANID", the portstrips the VLANtag from theframe and thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isnot "DefaultVLAN ID", theport directlytransmits theframe.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.


Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.


Port - - Displays thecorresponding IF port.

Enable Tunnel DisabledEnabled

Disabled l A port identifies andprocesses MPLSlabels, if its EnableTunnel is setEnabled.

l Enable Tunnel isavailable if you setPort Mode to Layer3 in the GeneralAttributes tab.

Specify IP Address ManuallyUnspecified

Unspecified l Specifies the methodof setting the IPaddress of a port.

l The valueUnspecified indicatesthat the IP addresses donot need to beconfigured for a port.

l The value Manuallyindicates that the IPaddress of a port can bemanually configured.



A-129


IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IPaddress for a port.

l This parameter isavailable whenSpecify IP Address isManually.

l The IP addresses ofdifferent ports on theNE cannot be in thesame networksegment, but the IPaddresses of the portsat both ends of theMPLS tunnel must bein the same networksegment.

IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnetmask of a port.

l This parameter isavailable whenSpecify IP Address isManually.

A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwaveinterfaces.


Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters for Advanced AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of theradio link. As the identifier of a radiolink, this parameter is used to preventincorrect connections of radio linksbetween sites.

l The ID of each radio link of an NE mustbe unique, and the link IDs at both endsof a radio link must be the same.

Received RadioLink ID

- - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match with the preset valueof Radio Link ID at the local end, thelocal end inserts the AIS signal to thedownstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports analarm to the NMS, indicating that the linkIDs do not match.

IF Port Loopback - - l This parameter indicates the loopbackstatus of the IF interface.

l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is cancelled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the IF signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the received IFsignals are looped back.

l Generally, this parameter is used tolocate the faults that occur at each IFinterface. The IF loopback is used fordiagnosis. If this function is enabled, theservices at the related ports are affected.In normal cases, this parameter is set toNon-Loopback.

Composite PortLoopback

- - l This parameter indicates the loopbackstatus on the composite interface.


l Inloop indicates that the compositesignals transmitted to the opposite endare looped back.

l Outloop indicates that the receivedcomposite signals are looped back.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set toNon-Loopback.



A-131


Error FrameDiscard Enabled

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to discard the Ethernet framewhen a CRC error occurs in an Ethernetframe.

l If the Ethernet service transmitted on theIF_ETH port is a voice service or a videoservice, you can set this parameter toDisabled.

MAC Address - - This parameter indicates the MAC addressof the port.

Transmitting Rate(Kbit/s)

- - This parameter indicates the transmit rate ofthe local port.

Receiving Rate(Kbit/s)

- - This parameter indicates the receive rate ofthe local port.

MAC Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopbackstate at the MAC layer. When thisparameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernetsignals transmitted to the opposite endare looped back.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou use the default value.

NOTEThe ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set toInloop.

SpeedTransmission atL2

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set toEnabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packetstransmitted at microwave ports will becompressed to improve transmissionefficiency.

l If the Layer 2 header compressionfunction can be enabled for the ISU2 orISX2 board, it is recommended that youset Speed Transmission at L2 toEnabled.

l The settings of Speed Transmission atL2 must be the same at both ends of aradio link.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


SpeedTransmission atL3

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set toEnabled, the IP packets transmitted atmicrowave ports will be compressed toimprove transmission efficiency.

l If the Layer 3 header compressionfunction can be enabled for the ISU2 orISX2 board, it is recommended that youset Speed Transmission at L3 toEnabled.

l The settings of Speed Transmission atL3 must be the same at both ends of aradio link.

NOTEl The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this

parameter.

l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set toEnabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.

Loopback Check DisabledEnabled

Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enableloop detection, which is used to checkwhether a loop exists on the port.

Loopback PortShutdown

DisabledEnabled

Disabled This parameter indicates whether to enablethe automatic shut-down of looped ports.

EnablingBroadcast PacketSuppression

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to limitthe traffic rate of the broadcast packetsaccording to the proportion of thebroadcast packets in the total packets.When the equipment at the opposite endmay encounter a broadcast storm, thisparameter is set to Enabled.

l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,the recommended value is Enabled.

l This parameter takes effect only for E-LAN services in the ingress direction.

EnablingBroadcast PacketSuppressionThreshold

0 to 100 30 When the proportion of the broadcastpackets in the total packets exceeds the valueof this parameter, the received broadcastpackets are discarded. The value of thisparameter should be more than theproportion of the broadcast packets in thetotal packets before the broadcast stormoccurs. In normal cases, this parameter is setto default value.



A-133

A.5.5 IF Board ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesThis section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment RecordsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS TestThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)test.

A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

Navigation Pathl Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the IF Attributes tab.


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingIF interface.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Radio Link ID 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM

- l This parameter indicates or specifies thework mode of the radio link in "workmode number, service capacity, channelspacing, modulation mode" format.

l This parameter is set according to theplanning information. The work modesof the IF boards at the two ends of a radiolink must be the same.

NOTEThe IF1 board supports this parameter.

IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH)SDH

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of servicescarried by the IF board.

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative E1 services, set this parameter toHybrid(Native E1+ETH).

l If the Integrated IP radio transmitsNative STM-1 services, set thisparameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH).

l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,set this parameter to SDH.




A-135


Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID ofa radio link. As the identifier of a radiolink, this parameter is used to preventincorrect connections of radio linksbetween sites.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofLink ID at the local end, the local endinserts the AIS signal to the downstreamdirection of the service. At the sametime, the local end reports MW_LIMalarm to the NMS, indicating that the linkIDs do not match.

l Link ID is set according to the planninginformation. Each radio link of an NEshould have a unique link ID, and the linkIDs at both ends of a radio link should bethe same.

Received RadioLink ID

- - l This parameter indicates the received IDof the radio link.

l If the value of Received Radio LinkID does not match the preset value ofRadio Link ID at the local end, the localend inserts the AIS signal to thedownstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports analarm to the NMS, indicating that the linkIDs do not match.

l When the radio link becomes faulty, thisparameter is displayed as an invalidvalue.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


IF Port Loopback Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status of the IF interface.


l Inloop indicates that the IF signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the received IFsignals are looped back.

l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used tolocate the faults that occur at each IFinterface. The IF loopback is used fordiagnosis. If this function is enabled, theservices at the related ports are affected.In normal cases, this parameter is set toNon-Loopback.

2M WaysideEnable Statusa

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the radio link transmits thewayside E1 service.

l The wayside E1 service can be supportedby the IF1 board in the7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

2M Wayside InputBoarda

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies theslot in which the 2M wayside service isaccessed.

l This parameter can be set only when 2MWayside Enable Status is set toEnabled.

l The wayside E1 service can be supportedby the IF1 board in the7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

350 MHzConsecutive WaveStatus

StopStart

Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies thestatus of transmitting the 350 MHzcarrier signals at the IF interface.

l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Statuscan be set to Start in the commissioningprocess only. In normal cases, thisparameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, theservices are interrupted.



A-137


XPIC Enabledb EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the XPIC function of the XPICIF board is enabled.

l If the XPIC IF board does not performthe XPIC function, XPIC Enabledshould be set to Disabled.

Enable IEEE-1588Timeslotc

EnabledDisabled

Disabled Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to beset consistently between two ends of a radiolink.

NOTE

l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services.

l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.

l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM ConfigurationNOTE

The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.



IF ChannelBandwidth

7M14M28M40M56M

- IF Channel Bandwidth indicates thechannel spacing of the corresponding radiolink. This parameter is set according to theplanning information.NOTEl This parameter is not applicable to the IF1

board.

l The IFU2 board does not support the value40M.

l The IFX2 board does not support the values7M, 14M, and 40M.

l The ISX2 board supports the channelspacings of 7M and 14M only when theXPIC function is disabled.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)





l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensurethe reliable transmission of the E1services and provide bandwidthadaptively for the Ethernet serviceswhen the AM function is enabled.

l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AMfunction when IF Service Type isSDH.




l Modulation Mode of the GuaranteeAM Capacity specifies the lowest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the planning information. Generally,the value of this parameter is determinedby the service transmission bandwidththat the Hybrid radio must ensure and theavailability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.




l Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity specifies the highest-gainmodulation scheme that the AM functionsupports. This parameter is set accordingto the planning information. Generally,the value of this parameter is determinedby the bandwidth of the services thatneed to be transmitted over the Hybridradio and the availability of the radio linkthat corresponds to this modulationscheme.NOTE

Modulation Mode of the Full AMCapacity must be higher than ModulationMode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.



A-139


ManuallySpecifiedModulation Mode


QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulationscheme that the radio link uses for signaltransmission.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Disabled.

STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IFboard.

l This parameter is available only when IFService Type is set to Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH) and SDH.

l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(NativeSTM-1+ETH), this parameter can be setto 0 or 1.

l If IF Service Type is SDH, thisparameter can be set to 1 or 2.

NOTEThe IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support thisparameter.

Enable E1 Priority DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether toenable the E1 priority function.

l This parameter is valid only when AMEnable Status is set to Enabled.


Guarantee E1Capacity

- - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,this parameter needs to be set accordingto IF Channel Bandwidth, ModulationMode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,and the actually transmitted services.

l If AM Enable Status is set toDisabled, this parameter needs to be setaccording to IF Channel Bandwidth,Manually Specified ModulationMode, and the actually transmittedservices.


Guarantee E1Capacity Range

- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in guarantee capacity modulationmode.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- - Displays the data service bandwidth of theIF board.

Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number oftransmitted E1 services in ModulationMode of the Full AM Capacity.

l This parameter is valid if Enable E1Priority is set to Enabled.

l E1 service bandwidth in full capacitymode ≤ Service bandwidth in fullcapacity mode - Service bandwidth inguarantee capacity mode + E1 servicebandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.In addition, the number of E1 services infull capacity modulation mode should besmaller than or equal to the maximumnumber of E1 services in full capacitymodulation mode.

l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to thesame value at both ends of a radio link.


Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IFboard in full capacity modulation mode.

Transmit-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at thetransmit mode.

Receive-EndModulation Mode

- - Displays the modulation mode at the receivemode.

Guarantee AMService Capacity(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.

Full AM ServiceCapacity(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the full AM service capacity.

Transmitted AMService Capacity(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the transmitted AM servicecapacity.

Received AMService Capacity(Mbit/s)

- - Displays the received AM service capacity.

E1 Capacity ForHigh Priority

- - Displays the number of configured high-priority E1s.



A-141

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.


Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters



ATPC EnableStatus

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled.

l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dBhigher or lower than the central valuebetween the ATPC upper threshold andthe ATPC lower threshold at the receiveend, the receiver notifies the transmitterto decrease or increase the transmitpower until the RSL is within the rangethat is 2 dB higher or lower than thecentral value between the ATPC upperthreshold and the ATPC lower threshold.


l In the case of areas where fast fadingseverely affects the radio transmission, itis recommended that you set ATPCEnable Status to Disabled.



- -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to thedifference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC AutomaticThreshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.


EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Enabled, the equipmentautomatically uses the preset ATPCupper and lower thresholds according tothe work mode of the radio link.

l If ATPC Automatic Threshold EnableStatus is set to Disabled, you need tomanually set ATPC Upper AutomaticThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerAutomatic Threshold(dBm).

ATPC UpperAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates that theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholds.

l This parameter is valid only when ATPCAutomatic Threshold Enable Status isset to Enabled.

ATPC LowerAutomaticThreshold(dBm)

- -

A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced AttributesThis section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Pathl In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface

from the Function Tree.l Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.



A-143



Modulation Mode - - Displays the modulation schemes.

E1 Capacity - - l You can specify the number of E1s thatcan be transmitted in intermediatemodulation scheme, by setting theadvanced attributes correspondingly.

l Generally, it is recommended that thisparameter takes the default value. Toensure that a specific number of E1s canbe transmitted in intermediatemodulation scheme, adjust the E1capacity in each modulation schemeaccording to the network planninginformation.

l If the E1 priority function is enabled, themaximum number of allowed E1services in the current mode = Min{[Bandwidth of the air interface in thecurrent mode - (Bandwidth for theassured capacity - Assured E1 number x2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in thehighest-gain modulation mode}.


- - Displays the data service bandwidth.

A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment RecordsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for theATPC adjustment.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of theATPC adjustment event.

Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of theATPC adjustment.

AdjustmentDirection

- - This parameter indicates the direction of theadjustment at the port.

Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switchingoperation at the port.

TransmittedPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the transmittedpower of the port to be switched.

Received Power(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the received powerof the port to be switched.


Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for thePRBS test.

Direction CrossTributary

Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies thedirection of the PRBS test.

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS testis performed to check the connectivity ofthe cable from the tributary board to theDDF.

l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBStest is performed to check the processingof the service from the tributary board tothe NE at the remote end.

Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies theduration of the PRBS test.



A-145


Measured Time s10minh

s This parameter indicates or specifies thetime unit used for the PRBS test.

Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of thePRBS test.

Progress - - This parameter indicates the progresspercentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of biterrors that occur in the PRBS test.

AccumulatingMode

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifies whether to displaythe values in accumulative mode. IfAccumulating Mode is selected, itindicates that the values are displayed inaccumulative mode.

A.5.6 ODU ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.

A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.

A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment InformationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information ofthe ODU.

A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of theODU.

A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency AttributeThis topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

Navigation Pathl Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU

Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Board - - This parameter indicates the correspondingODU.

TransmitFrequency(MHz)

- - l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the central frequency of the channel.

l The value of Transmit Frequency(MHz) must not be less than the sum ofthe minimum transmit frequencysupported by the ODU and a half of thechannel spacing, and must not be morethan the difference between themaximum transmit frequency supportedby the ODU and a half of the channelspacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies at both ends of a radio linkshould be one T/R spacing.


T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies thespacing between the transmit frequencyand receive frequency of the ODU toprevent mutual interference of thetransmitter and receiver.

l If the ODU is a Tx high station, thetransmit frequency is one T/R spacinghigher than the receive frequency. If theODU is a Tx low station, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing lower thanthe receive frequency.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l A valid T/R spacing value is determinedby the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing(MHz) should be set according to thetechnical specifications of the ODU.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

Actual TransmitFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual transmitfrequency of the ODU.



A-147


Actual ReceiveFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivefrequency of the ODU.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the actual T/Rspacing of the ODU.

The range offrequency point(MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the working rangeof the frequency of the ODU.

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.


Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Power Attributes tab.




- - l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) isset according to the planninginformation. This parameter specifiesthe maximum transmit power of theODU. This parameter cannot be set to avalue that exceeds the nominal powerrang of the ODU in the guaranteedcapacity modulation module.


l The maximum transmit power adjustedby using the ATPC function should notexceed Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Transmit Power(dBm)

- - l Transmit Power(dBm) is set accordingto the planning information. Thisparameter specifies the transmit powerof the ODU. This parameter cannot be setto a value that exceeds the nominalpower rang of the ODU or a value thatexceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).



Power to BeReceived(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used toset the expected receive power of theODU and is mainly used in the antennaalignment stage. After this parameter isset, the NE automatically enables theantenna misalignment indicatingfunction.



l Power to Be Received(dBm) is setaccording to the planning information.When this parameter takes the defaultvalue, the antenna misalignmentindicating function is disabled.

TX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem separately records the durationwhen the value of the actual transmitpower of the ODU is greater than the



A-149


TX Low Threshold(dBm)

- - preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm) and the duration when the valueof the actual transmit power of the ODUis greater than the preset value of TXLow Threshold(dBm) in theperformance events.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of TX Low Threshold(dBm) andis lower than the preset value of TX HighThreshold(dBm), the system recordsthe duration when the value of the actualtransmit power of the ODU is greaterthan the preset value of TX LowThreshold(dBm) in the performanceevents.

l If the value of the actual transmit powerof the ODU is lower than the preset valueof TX Low Threshold(dBm), thesystem does not record it.

l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TXLow Threshold(dBm) are valid onlywhen the ATPC function is enabled.

RX HighThreshold(dBm)

- - l If the value of the actual receive powerof the ODU is lower than the preset valueof RX Low Threshold(dBm), thesystem records the duration when thevalue of the actual receive power of theODU is lower than the preset value ofRX Low Threshold(dBm) and durationwhen the value of the actual transmitpower of the ODU is lower than thepreset value of RX High Threshold(dBm)in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual receive powerof the ODU is greater than the presetvalue of RX Low Threshold(dBm) andis lower than the preset value of RX HighThreshold(dBm), the system recordsthe duration when the value of the actualreceive power of the ODU is Lower thanthe preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

l If the value of the actual receive powerof the ODU is greater than the preset




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


RX Low Threshold(dBm)

- - value of RX High Threshold(dBm), thesystem does not record it.

Actual TransmitPower(dBm)

- - l This parameter indicates the actualtransmit power of the ODU.

l If the ATPC function is enabled, thequeried actual transmit power may bedifferent from the preset value.

Actual ReceivePower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the actual receivepower of the ODU.

Actual range ofPower(dBm)

- - This parameter indicates the range of theactual transmit power of the ODU.



A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment InformationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information ofthe ODU.


Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.l Click the Equipment Information tab.



A-151

Parameters



Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency bandwhere the ODU operates.

Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipmenttype of the ODU.

l PDH and SDH indicate the transmissioncapacity only and are irrelevant to thetype of transmitted service.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing ofthe ODU.

IntermediateFrequencyBandwidth (MHz)

- - This parameter indicates the IF frequencybandwidth of the ODU.

IF BandwidthType

- - Displays the IF bandwidth type.

Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether theODU is a Tx high station or a Tx lowstation.

l The transmit frequency of a Tx highstation is one T/R spacing higher than thetransmit frequency of a Tx low station.



Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingtime of the ODU.

Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturingserial number and the manufacturer code ofthe ODU.

A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of theODU.


Interface from the Function Tree.

l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



RF Loopback Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status of the RF interface of theODU.

l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is canceled or not performed.

l Inloop indicates that the RF signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l RF Loopback function is used for faultlocating for the RF interfaces. The RFLoopback function is used for diagnosisand may affect the services that aretransmitted over the interfaces. Hence,exercise precaution before starting thisfunction.

l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set toNon-Loopback.

ConfigureTransmissionStatus

unmutemute

unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit status of the ODU.

l If Configure Transmission Status is setto mute, the transmitter of the ODU doesnot work but can normally receivemicrowave signals.

l If Configure Transmission Status is setto unmute, the ODU can normallytransmit and receive microwave signals.

l In normal cases, ConfigureTransmission Status is set to unmute.

ActualTransmissionStatus

- - Displays the ODU manufacturerinformation.

FactoryInformation

- - This parameter indicates the manufacturerinformation about the ODU.

Remarks - - Specifies the remarks of the ODU.

A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface BoardsThis topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.

A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces



A-153

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser ShutdownThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)function.

A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

Navigation Path1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

2. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.

Parameters


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingSDH interface.

Optical InterfaceNamea

- - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the optical interface.

Laser Switcha OnOff

On l This parameter indicates or specifies theon/off state of the laser.

l This parameter is set for SDH opticalinterfaces only.

l In normal cases, this parameter is set toOn.

Optical(Electrical)InterfaceLoopbacka

Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status on the SDH interface.


l Inloop indicates that the SDH signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the received SDHsignals are looped back.

l This function is used for fault locatingfor the SDH interfaces. The Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbackfunction is used for diagnosis and mayaffect the services that are transmittedover the interfaces. Hence, exerciseprecaution before starting this function.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


VC4 Loopbackb Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status in the VC-4 path.


l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the receivedVC-4 signals are looped back.

l This function is used for fault locatingfor the VC-4 paths. The VC4Loopback function is used for diagnosisand may affect the services that aretransmitted over the interfaces. Hence,exercise precaution before starting thisfunction.


NOTE

l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.

l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.

A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser ShutdownThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)function.

Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.


Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the correspondingoptical interface.



A-155


Auto Shutdown DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the Auto Laser Shutdownfunction is enabled or disabled for thelaser.

l The ALS function allows the laser to shutdown automatically when an optical portdoes not carry services, an optical fiberis broken, or no optical signal is received.

l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period(ms), and Continuously On-test Period(ms) only when this parameter is set toEnabled.

On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when a shutdown laser automaticallystarts up and tests whether the optical fiberis normal.

Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when the laser does not work (withthe ALS function being enabled).

Continuously On-test Period(ms)

2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies theperiod when a shutdown laser is manuallystarted up and tests whether the optical fiberis normal.

A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface BoardsThis topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.

A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.


A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.


Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.2. Select By Board/Port(Channel).3. Select Port from the list box.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Port - - This parameter indicates the correspondingport.

Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the port.

TributaryLoopback

Non-LoopbackInloopOutloop

Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status in the associated path ofthe tributary unit.


l Inloop indicates that the PDH signalstransmitted to the opposite end arelooped back.

l Outloop indicates that the received PDHsignals are looped back.

l This function is used for fault locatingfor the paths of the tributary unit. TheTributary Loopback function is usedfor diagnosis and may affect the servicesthat are transmitted over the interfaces.Hence, exercise precaution beforestarting this function.


Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of apath, which depends on the tributary unit.

Service LoadIndication

LoadNon-Loaded

Load l This parameter indicates or specifies theservice loading status in a specific path.

l When this parameter is set to Load, theboard detects whether alarms exist in thepath.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Loaded, the board does not detectwhether there are alarms in the path.

l If a path does not carry any services, youcan set this parameter to Non-Loadedfor the path to mask all the alarms. If apath carries services, you need to set thisparameter to Load for the path.



A-157


Retiming Mode NormalRetiming Mode ofTributary ClockRetiming Mode ofCross-ConnectClock

Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies theretiming mode of a specific path.

l By using the retiming function, theretiming reference signal from the SDHnetwork and the service data signal arecombined and then sent to the clientequipment, thus decreasing the outputjitter in the signal. In this way, theretiming function ensures that the servicecode flow can normally transfer theretiming reference signal.

l When this parameter is set to Normal,the retiming function is not used.

l When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Tributary Clock, the retimingfunction is used with the clock of theupstream tributary unit traced.

l When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Cross-Connect Clock, theretiming function is used with the clockof the cross-connect unit traced.

l It is recommended that the externalclock, instead of the retiming function,should be used to provide referenceclock signals for the equipment.

l If the retiming function is required, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto Retiming Mode of Cross-connectClock.

Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of servicesthat are processed in a path. It depends onthe services that are transmitted in a path.

Input SignalEqualization

UnequalizedEqualized

Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether theinput signals are equalized.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to default value.

Output SignalEqualization

UnequalizedEqualized

Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether theoutput signals are equalized.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Navigation PathSelect the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.


Port - - This parameter indicates the port for thePRBS test.

Direction CrossTributary

Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies thedirection of the PRBS test.

l In the tributary direction, the PRBS testis performed to check the connectivity ofthe cable from the tributary board to theDDF.

l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBStest is performed to check the processingof the service from the tributary board tothe NE at the remote end.

Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies theduration of the PRBS test.

Measured Time s10minh

s This parameter indicates or specifies thetime unit used for the PRBS test.

Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of thePRBS test.

Progress - - This parameter indicates the progresspercentage of the PRBS test.

Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of biterrors that occur in the PRBS test.

AccumulatingMode

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifies whether to displaythe values in accumulative mode. IfAccumulating Mode is selected, itindicates that the values are displayed inaccumulative mode.

A.5.9 Parameters for OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section OverheadThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads(RSOHs).



A-159

A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).


A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads(RSOHs).

Navigation Path1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead

Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.

2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format


Display in TextFormat

SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter specifies the display in thetext format.

Display inHexadecimal

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifies the display in thehexadecimal format.



Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

J0 to be Sent([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theJ0_MM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the J0 byte to be received at theopposite end.

J0 to be Received([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to bereceived.

l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J0byte.


J0 Received([Mode]Content)

- - This parameter indicates the J0 byte that isactually received.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Navigation Path1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose

Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display FormatParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SelectedDeselected



SelectedDeselected


Parameters for the Trace Byte J1Parameter Value Range Default Value Description


J1 to be Sent([Mode]Content)

- [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theHP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm, this parameteris set according to the J1 byte to be receivedat the opposite end.

J1 to be Received([Mode]Content)

- [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J1byte.


J1 Received([Mode]Content)

- - This parameter displays the J1 byte that isactually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2Parameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-161


C2 to be Sent - - If the NE at the opposite end reports theHP_SLM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the C2 byte to be received at theopposite end.

C2 to be Received - - If the NE at the local end reports theHP_SLM alarm, this parameter is setaccording to the C2 byte to be sent at theopposite end.

C2 Received - - This parameter displays the C2 byte that isactually received.

Parameters for Overhead Termination



VC4 OverheadTermination

TerminationPass-ThroughAuto

Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through, the NE forwards the originaloverhead after monitoring the VC-4 pathoverhead regardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Termination,the NE generates the new VC-4 pathoverhead according to the board settingafter monitoring the VC-4 path overheadregardless of the C2 byte.

l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4path overhead in the VC-4 pass-throughservice is passed through, and the VC-4path overhead in the VC-12 service isterminated.


A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).


Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the FunctionTree.

2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Setting the Display FormatParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SelectedDeselected



SelectedDeselected


Parameters for the Trace ByteParameter Value Range Default Value Description


J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWeiSBS

If the NE at the opposite end reports theLP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, thisparameter is set according to the J2 byte tobe received by the NE at the opposite end.

J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], theboard does not monitor the received J2byte.


NOTEIF boards do not support this parameter.

J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that isactually received.

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Featureson the Packet Plane

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on thepacket plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet portparameters, and QoS parameters.

A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet ProtocolsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAMThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).

A.6.4 QoS Parameters



A-163

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet ServicesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_CreationThis topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)service.

A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.

A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_CreationThis topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)service.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click Create.


Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the E-Lineservice.

Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-Lineservice.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Direction UNI-UNIUNI-NNINNI-NNI

UNI-UNI l This parameterspecifies the directionof the E-Line service.

l Set this parameter toUNI-UNI.

BPDU Not TransparentlyTransmittedTransparentlyTransmitted

Not TransparentlyTransmitted

l This parameterspecifies thetransparenttransmission ID of thebridge protocol dataunit (BPDU) packets.It is used to indicatewhether the E-Lineservice transparentlytransmits the BPDUpackets.

l If the BPDU packetsare used as the servicepackets andtransparentlytransmitted to theopposite end, set thisparameter toTransparentlyTransmitted. That is,the parameter valueTransparentlyTransmitted takeseffect only ifEncapsulation Typeof the source and sinkports of the E-Lineservice are Null.

l In other cases, set thisparameter to NotTransparentlyTransmitted.


MTU(bytes) - - This parameter cannot beset here.

Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.



A-165


Source Port - - l Before setting thisparameter, check andensure that theattributes in EthernetInterface of the portare set correctly andare the same as theplanning information.

l The value of thisparameter cannot bethe same as the valueof sink port.

l The value of thisparameter cannot beused for the E-LANport.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can beset to null, a number,or several numbers.When setting thisparameter to severalnumbers, use thecomma (,) to separatethe discrete numbers,or use the endash (-) torepresent aconsecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l The number and valueof VLANs must be thesame value of SinkVLANs.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesat the source port areused as the servicesource.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesource port can be usedas the service source.



A-167


Sink Port - - l Before setting thisparameter, check andensure that theattributes in EthernetInterface of the portare set correctly andare the same as theplanning information.

l The value of thisparameter cannot bethe same as the valueof Source Port.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can beset to null, a number,or several numbers.When setting thisparameter to severalnumbers, use thecomma (,) to separatethe discrete numbers,or use the endash (-) torepresent aconsecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l The number and valueof VLANs must be thesame value of SourceVLANs.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesat the sink port areused as the servicesink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesink port can be usedas the service sink.

Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)






l Set this parameter toUNI-NNI.



A-169




For UNI-NNI ETHPWE3 services, theparameter value is alwaysNot TransparentlyTransmitted.










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)




l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesource port can beused as the servicesource.

PRI - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Bearer Type QinQ LinkPW

PW For UNI-NNI ETHPWE3 services, theparameter value is alwaysPW.



A-171


Protection Type No ProtectionPW APSSlave Protection Pair

No Protection l If this parameter is setto PW APS, workingand protection PWsneed to be configured.

l If this parameter is setto Slave ProtectionPair, you need to bindthe slave PW APSprotection group withthe master PW APSprotection group. Theswitching of themaster PW APSprotection grouptriggers the switchingof the slave PW APSprotection groupsimultaneously.

Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)






l Set this parameter toUNI-NNI.



For UNI-NNI QinQservices, the parametervalue is always NotTransparentlyTransmitted.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)








l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservice that containsthe VLAN ID at thesource port can be usedas the service source.



A-173



Bearer Type QinQ LinkPW

PW For NNI-NNI QinQservices, the parametervalue is always QinQLink.

QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the IDof a QinQ link. You cancreate a QinQ link orselect an existing QinQlink.

Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI






l Set this parameter toNNI-NNI.



For NNI-NNI QinQservices, the parametervalue is alwaysNot TransparentlyTransmitted.







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Line service.

QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ linkID of the first QinQlink.

l The QinQ link ID ispreset in QinQ Link.

Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Line service.

QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ linkID of the second QinQlink.

l The QinQ link ID ispreset in QinQ Link.

QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the IDof a QinQ link. You cancreate a QinQ link orselect an existing QinQlink.

Parameters of PWsNOTE

l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.

l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parametersof working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the workingPW as an example.


PW ID - - Specifies the ID of the PWthat carries services.

PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs needto be manually assigned.



A-175


PW Type EthernetEthernet Tagged Mode

Ethernet l Specifies the type ofthe PW.

l PW Type indicateswhether P-TAG isadded to Ethernetframes that areencapsulated fortransmission on PWs.If it is not required toadd VLAN IDs, set thisparameter toEthernet. If it isrequired to add VLANIDs, set this parameterto Ethernet TaggedMode and then setRequest VLAN in theAdvanced Attributestab.

PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction ofthe PW.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays theencapsulation type of thepackets on the PW.

PW Ingress Label/Source Port

16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingresslabel.

PW Egress Label/SinkPort

16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egresslabel.

Tunnel selection mode - - Displays the method toselect tunnels.

Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Displays the type of thetunnel that carries the PW.

Tunnel - - A tunnel needs to beselected. If no tunnel isavailable, creation of aPW will fail.

Egress Tunnel - - For a bidirectional tunnel,the system will configurethe egress tunnelautomatically.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Peer LSR ID - - Specifies the LSR ID ofthe PW at the remote end.If an existing tunnel isselected, the LSR ID willbe automatically assigned.

QoS Parameters (PW)NOTE

QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.


Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether thebandwidth limit functionis enabled.l This function limits the

bandwidth of one ormore PWs in an MPLStunnel.

l An ETH PWE3 servicecorresponds to a PW.Therefore, thisfunction can also limitthe bandwidth of ETHPWE3 services in anMPLS tunnel.

Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.

CBS(byte) - - Specifies the committedburst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) of aPW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.



A-177


PBS(byte) - - Specifies the peak burstsize (PBS) of a PW.

EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When strippingMPLS tunnel labels frompackets, an egress nodedoes not update thescheduling priority for thepackets.

Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,the parameter value isalways No Use.

Control Channel Type NoneAlert Label

Alert Label l Specifies the mode ofPW connectivitycheck.

l None indicates thatVCCV is not used.

l Alert Label indicatesVCCV packets inAlert Labelencapsulation mode.

VCCV VerificationMode

PingNone

Ping l Specifies the VCCVverification mode. TheVCCV verification isused for PWconnectivity check.

l If the VCCV-Ping testis required, do not setthis parameter toNone.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Request VLAN - - l Set this parameterwhen PW Type isEthernet TaggedMode.

l If the received packetsdo not carry anyVLAN IDs, the PWwill add VLAN IDs tothe packets as requiredby the setting of thisparameter.

TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support request VLANTPID of the PW level.

Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set toPW APS.


Protection Type - - Specifies the protectiontype.

Protection Group ID - - Specifies the protectiongroup ID.

Enabling Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l Specifies the enablingstatus of the PWprotection group.

l During the creation ofa protection group, setEnabling Status toDisabled. After theAPS protection groupis configured at bothends, set EnablingStatus to Enabled.

Protection Mode - - Displays the protectionmode.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports 1:1 protectionmode.



A-179


Working PW ID - - Displays the ID of theworking PW.

Protection PW ID - - Displays the ID of theprotection PW.

Switching Mode - - Displays the switchingmode to be used when aPW fails.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports dual-endedswitching.

Revertive Mode Non-revertiveRevertive

Revertive l This parameterspecifies whether toswitch services back tothe original workingPW after it recovers.

l The value Revertiveindicates that servicesare switched to theoriginal working PWand the value Non-revertive indicatesthat services are notswitched to theoriginal working PW.

l The value Revertive isrecommended.

Switchover RestorationTime(min)

1 to 12 1 l Specifies the WTRtime of the protectiongroup.

l When the preset WTRtime expires after theoriginal working PWrecovers, services areswitched to theoriginal working PW.

l This parameter isavailable only whenRestoration Mode isRevertive.

l The default value isrecommended.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Switchover Delay Time(100ms)

0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-offtime of the protectiongroup.

l If this parameter is setto a value other than 0,the protection groupdoes not triggerswitching once itdetects faults, but waitsuntil the hold-off timeexpires, and thendetects whether anyfaults persist. If anyfaults persist, theswitching is triggered;otherwise, noswitching is triggered.


Detection mode - - Displays the detectionmode of the PW APSprotection group.

OAM ParametersNOTE

l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type ofPWs is set to PW APS.

l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.


OAM Status - - Displays the enablingstatus of PW OAM.



A-181


Detection Mode Auto-SensingManual

Auto-Sensing l Specifies the detectionmode of OAM packets.

l Manual: Theconnectivity check(CC) packets are sentat the interval specifiedby the user.

l Auto-Sensing: Theconnectivity check(CC) packets are sentat the interval ofreceiving PW OAMpackets.

l If Detection Mode isset to Manual, youneed to set the PWOAM detectionpackets to be receivedand transmitted.

l The value Auto-Sensing isrecommended.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Detection Packet Type CVFFD

CV l CV: The detectionpackets are sent at afixed interval.

l FFD: The detectionpackets are sent at theinterval specified bythe user.

l If Detection Mode isset to Auto-Sensing,this parameterspecifies the PW OAMdetection packets to betransmitted.

l If Detection Mode isset to Manual, thisparameter specifies thePW OAM detectionpackets to be receivedand transmitted.

l The value FFD isassumed for PW APSand the value CV isassumed forcontinuousconnectivity check onPWs.

Detection Packet Period(ms)

3.3102050100200500

50 l Specifies the period ofdetection packets.

l This parameter isconfigurable whenDetection PacketType is FFD andassumes the fixedvalue of 1000 whenDetection PacketType is CV.

l Set this parameter to3.3 for PW APS.

LSR ID to be Received - - Specifies the LSR ID to bereceived.

PW ID to be Received - - Specifies the PW ID to bereceived.



A-183

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set toSlave Protection Pair.


Protection Mode - - Displays the protectionmode.

Protection Group ID - - Specifies the ID of theslave protection pair. Theswitching of the masterPW APS protection grouptriggers the switching ofthe slave PW APSprotection groupsimultaneously.

Working PW ID - - Displays the ID of theworking PW in the slaveprotection pair.

Protection PW ID - - Displays the ID of theprotection PW in the slaveprotection pair.

A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

Navigation Path

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.



Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the E-Lineservice.

Service Name - - This parameter indicatesor specifies the name ofthe E-Line service.

Source Node - - This parameter indicatesthe source node.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Sink Node - - This parameter indicatesthe sink node.


MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot bequeried here.


- This parameter indicatesthe transparenttransmission tag of thebridge protocol data unit(BPDU) packets. Thisparameter is used toindicate whether theEthernet linetransparently transmitsthe BPDU packets.

Deployment Status - - This parameter indicateswhether E-Line service isdeployed.

Parameters Associated with UNI PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe UNI port.



A-185


VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicatesor specifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.l This parameter can be

set to null, a number,or several numbers.When setting thisparameter to severalnumbers, use thecomma (,) to separatethe discrete numbers,or use the endash (-) torepresent aconsecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l This parameter is validonly when Directionis set to UNI-UNI orUNI-NNI in theprocess of creating anE-Line service.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesof the UNI work as theservice source orservice sink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservices of the UNIport whose VLAN IDsare included in the setvalue of this parameterwork as the servicesource or service sink.

NNI Parameters (PW)


PW ID - - This parameter displaysthe PW ID.

Working Status - - This parameter displaysthe working status of aPW.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Enable Status - - This parameter displayswhether a PW is enabled.

PW Signaling Type - - This parameter displaysthe PW signaling type.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 usesstatic PWs only.

PW Type - - This parameter displaysthe configured PW type.

PW Direction - - This parameter displaysthe direction of the PW.

PW Encapsulation Type - - This parameter displaysthe PW encapsulationtype.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 usesMPLS only.


- - This parameter displaysthe configured PW ingresslabel.


- - This parameter displaysthe configured PW egresslabel.

Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS This parameter displaysthe type of the tunnel thatcarries a PW.

Peer LSR ID - - This parameter displaysthe opposite LSR ID.

Tunnel - - This parameter displaysthe tunnel.

Control Word - - For ETH PWE3 services,the parameter value isalways No Use.

Control Channel Type - - This parameter displaysthe control channel type.


- - This parameter displaysthe VCCV mode.

Local Working Status - - Displays the workingstatus of the PW at thelocal end.



A-187


Remote Working Status - - This parameter displaysthe working status of thePW at the remote end.

Compositive WorkingStatus

- - This parameter displaysthe comprehensiveworking status of the PW.

Request VLAN - - This parameter displaysthe request VLAN.

Deployment Status - - This parameter displaysthe deployment status.

Tunnel AutomaticSelection Policy

- - This parameter displaysthe automatic tunnelselection policy.

TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support requestVLAN TPID of the PWlevel.

Parameters Associated with NNI PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameterindicates the QinQ linkID of the QinQ linkconnected to the NNIport.


Port - - l This parameterindicates the NNI port.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


S-VLAN ID - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe VLAN ID of theNNI port.

l This parameter is validonly when Directionis set to UNI-NNI orNNI-NNI in theprocess of creating anE-Line service.

l This parameter ispreset in QinQ Link.

QoS ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

PW ID - - This parameter displaysthe PW ID.

Direction - - l This parameterdisplays the directionof the PW.

l Egress indicates theegress direction of thePW.

l Ingress indicates theingress direction of thePW.



A-189


Bandwidth Limit - - This parameter displays orspecifies whether thebandwidth limit functionis enabled for a PW toprevent networkcongestion.l Regarding

transmission channels,this function can beused to limit thebandwidth of one ormore PWs in an MPLStunnel.

l An ETH PWE3service corresponds toa PW. Therefore, thisfunction can also limitthe bandwidth of ETHPWE3 services in anMPLS tunnel.

Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

CIR (Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays orspecifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays orspecifies the committedburst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - This parameter displays orspecifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) ofa PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays orspecifies the peak burstsize (PBS) of a PW.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.


Parameters for the Port AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - Displays the portinformation.

Enable Port - - l This parameterindicates whether toenable the port.

l This parameter ispreset in GeneralAttributes ofEthernet Interface.



A-191


Encapsulation Type Null802.1QQinQ

- l This parameterindicates theencapsulation type ofthe port.


l If this parameter is setto Null, the porttransparentlytransmits the receivedpackets.

l If this parameter is setto 802.1Q, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1Qstandard.

l If this parameter is setto QinQ, the portidentifies the packetsthat comply with theIEEE 802.1 QinQstandard.

l This parameter ispreset in GeneralAttributes ofEthernet Interface.

TAG Tag AwareAccessHybrid

- l This parameterdisplays the tag of theport.

l This parameter ispreset in Layer 2Attributes ofEthernet Interface .


The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Protection Group ID - - Displays the ID of theprotection group to becreated.




Enabling Status EnabledDisabled

- l Displays or specifiesthe enabling status ofthe PW protectiongroup.


Switchover Mode - - Displays the switchingmode to be used when aPW fails.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supporting dual-endedswitching.

Restoration Mode Non-revertiveRevertive

- l Specifies whether toswitch services to theoriginal working PWafter the fault isrectified.





A-193



1 to 12 - l Displays or specifiesthe WTR time of theprotection group.




0 to 100 - l Displays or specifiesthe hold-off time of theprotection group.


Deployment Status - - Display the deploymentstatus of the protectiongroup.

Switchover Status - - Displays the switchoverstatus of the protectiongroup.

Protocol Status - - Displays the enablingstatus of the protocol.

Working Path Status - - Displays the status of thecurrent working path.

Protection Path Status - - Display the status of thecurrent protection path.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.





DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.

PW Type - - Displays the PW type.

Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the slaveprotection pair.

A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.


Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.3. Click New.

Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table ItemParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifiesthe network attribute ofthe source interface.

Source Interface - - This parameter specifiesthe source interface.



A-195


Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID of thesource service.

Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifiesthe network attribute ofthe sink interface.

Sink Interface - - This parameter specifiesthe sink interface.

Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID of the sinkservice.

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item iscreated. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified inSink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.

l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted fromSource VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when theother VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.

l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion ofVLAN IDs.

A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.


Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.



Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameterspecifies the ID of theE-LAN service.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports simultaneouscreation of an E-LANservice only.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-LANservice.

BPDU - - l This parameterindicates thetransparenttransmission tag of theBPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-LAN service, thisparameter supportsonly NotTransparentlyTransmitted andcannot be setmanually.

l Not TransparentlyTransmittedindicates that theBPDU packets areused as the protocolpackets to compute thespanning tree topologyof the network.



A-197


Tag Type C-AwaredS-AwaredTag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to C-Tag (the VLAN tag onthe client-side). Tocreate the 802.1qbridge, set thisparameter to C-Awared.

l S-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to S-Tag (the VLAN tag atthe carrier servicelayer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set thisparameter to S-Awared.

l Tag-Transparentindicates that thepackets aretransparentlytransmitted. To createthe 802.1d bridge, setthis parameter to Tag-Transparent.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Self-Learning MACAddress

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the MACaddress self-learningfunction.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isenabled, the EthernetLAN learns an MACaddress according tothe original MACaddress in the packetand automaticallyrefreshes the MACaddress forwardingtable.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isdisabled, a static MACaddress forwardingtable is recommendedto be configured.

MAC Address LearningMode

IVLSVL

- l This parameterindicates the modeused to learn an MACaddress.

l When the bridge usesthe SVL mode, all theVLANs share oneMAC address table. Ifthe bridge uses the IVLmode, each VLAN hasan MAC address table.

Deployment Status - - This parameter indicateswhether E-LAN service isdeployed.

MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot beset here.




A-199

Parameters for UNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.

l This parameter is validonly when Tag Typeis set to S-Awared.


VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.

l This parameter can beset to null, a number,or several numbers.When setting thisparameter to severalnumbers, use thecomma (,) to separatethe discrete numbers,or use the endash (-) torepresent aconsecutive number.For example, thenumbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and6.

l If this parameter is setto null, all the servicesof the UNI work as theservice source orservice sink.

l If this parameter is notset to null, only theservices of the UNIport whose VLAN IDsare included in the setvalue of this parameterwork as the servicesource or service sink.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters of NNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description



SVLANs - - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the NNI port.


Parameters for the Split Horizon GroupParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameterindicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.

l The default splithorizon group ID is 1and cannot be setmanually.



A-201


Split Horizon GroupMember

- - l A split horizon groupmember indicates thelogical port member inthe split horizongroup.

l The port members thatare added to the samesplit horizon groupcannot communicatewith each other.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports only thedivision of the splithorizon groupmembers according tothe Ethernet physicalport.

l If a UNI or NNI logicalport of the 802.1adbridge is added to asplit horizon groupmember, the physicalport that is mountedwith the logical port isautomatically added tothe split horizon groupmember.

A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameterindicates the ID of theE-LAN service.

l The supportssimultaneous creationof an E-LAN serviceonly.

Service Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the E-LANservice.

BPDU - - l This parameterindicates thetransparenttransmission tag of theBPDU packets.

l In the case of an E-LAN service, thisparameter supportsonly NotTransparentlyTransmitted andcannot be setmanually.

l Not TransparentlyTransmittedindicates that theBPDU packets areused as the protocolpackets to compute thespanning tree topologyof the network.



A-203


Tag Type C-AwaredS-AwaredTag-Transparent

C-Awared l C-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to C-Tag (the VLAN tag onthe client-side). Tocreate the 802.1qbridge, set thisparameter to C-Awared.

l S-Awared indicatesthat the packets arelearnt according to S-Tag (the VLAN tag atthe carrier servicelayer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set thisparameter to S-Awared.

l Tag-Transparentindicates that thepackets aretransparentlytransmitted. To createthe 802.1d bridge, setthis parameter to Tag-Transparent.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Self-Learning MACAddress

Enabled Enabled l This parameterindicates whether toenable the MACaddress self-learningfunction.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isenabled, the EthernetLAN learns an MACaddress according tothe original MACaddress in the packetand automaticallyrefreshes the MACaddress forwardingtable.

l If the MAC self-learning function of anEthernet LAN isdisabled, a static MACaddress forwardingtable is recommendedto be configured.

MAC Address LearningMode

- - l This parameterindicates the modeused to learn an MACaddress.

l When the bridge usesthe SVL mode, all theVLANs share oneMAC address table. Ifthe bridge uses the IVLmode, each VLAN hasan MAC address table.

MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot bequeried here.


Deployment Status - - This parameter indicateswhether E-LAN service isdeployed.



A-205

Parameters for UNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.



VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof the UNI port.


l If this parameter is setto null, the E-LANservice exclusivelyuses the correspondingUNI physical port.That is, the entire portis mounted to thebridge.

l If this parameter is setto a non-null value,only thecorresponding UNIport whose servicepackets contain thisVLAN ID works as thelogical port and ismounted to the bridge.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for NNIsParameter Value Range Default Value Description



SVLANs - - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANID of the UNI port.





A-207

Parameters for Static MAC AddressesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - - l This parameter isinvalid if MACAddress LearningMode is SVL. That is,the preset static MACaddress entries arevalid for all VLANs.

l If MAC AddressLearning Mode is setto IVL, the presetstatic MAC addressentries are valid foronly the VLANswhose VLAN ID isequal to the presetVLAN ID.


MAC Address - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe static MACaddress.

l A static MAC addressis an address that is setmanually. It is notaged automaticallyand needs to be deletedmanually.

l Generally, a staticMAC address is usedfor the port thatreceives but does notforward Ethernetservice packets or theport whose MACaddress need not beaged automatically.

Egress Interface - - l This parameterspecifies the Ethernetport that correspondsto the MAC address.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC AddressParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - - l This parameter isinvalid if MACAddress LearningMode is SVL. That is,the preset self-learningMAC address entriesare valid for allVLANs.

l If MAC AddressLearning Mode is setto IVL, the preset self-learning MAC addressentries are valid foronly the VLANswhose VLAN ID isequal to the presetVLAN ID.


MAC Address - - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe self-learning MACaddress. A self-learning MAC addressis also called adynamic MACaddress.

l A self-learning MACaddress is an entryobtained by a bridge inSVL or IVL learningmode. A self-learningMAC address can beaged.

Egress Interface - - l This parameterspecifies the Ethernetport that correspondsto the MAC address.




A-209

Parameters Associated with MAC Address LearningParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Aging Ability EnabledDisabled

Enabled The OptiX RTN 980supports enabling/disabling of the agingfunction and aging timefor the MAC addresstable.If one routing entry is notupdated in a certainperiod, that is, if no newpacket from this MACaddress is received toenable the re-learning ofthis MAC address, thisrouting entry isautomatically deleted.This mechanism is calledaging, and this period iscalled aging time. Theaging time of a MACaddress table is 5 minutesby default.

Aging Time(min) 1 to 65535 5

Parameters for Disabled MAC AddressesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

VLAN ID - - This parameter indicatesor specifies the VLAN IDof the service. A disabledMAC address is valid forthe VLAN whose VLANID is equal to the presetVLAN ID.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


MAC Address - - l This parameterspecifies or indicatesthe disabled MACaddress. A disabledMAC address is alsocalled a blacklistedMAC address.

l This parameter is usedfor discarding anentry, also called ablack hole entry,whose data frame thatcontains a specificdestination MACaddress. A disabledMAC address needs tobe set manually andcannot be aged.

Parameters for the Split Horizon GroupParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameterindicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.

l The default splithorizon group ID is 1and cannot be setmanually.



A-211


Split Horizon GroupMember

- - l A split horizon groupmember indicates thelogical port member inthe split horizongroup.

l The port members thatare added to differentsplit horizon groupscannot communicatewith each other.

l The supports only thedivision of the splithorizon groupmembers according tothe Ethernet physicalport.

l If a UNI or NNI logicalport of the 802.1adbridge is added to asplit horizon groupmember, the physicalport that is mountedwith the logical port isautomatically added tothe split horizon groupmember.

Parameters for Unknown Frame ProcessingParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Frame Type UnicastMulticast

- This parameter indicatesthe type of the receivedunknown frame.

Handing Mode DiscardBroadcast

Broadcast Selects the method ofprocessing the unknownframe. If this parameter isset to Discard, theunknown frame is directlydiscarded. If thisparameter is set toBroadcast, the unknownframe is broadcast at theforwarding port.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.


Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.2. Click New.

Parameters for the General AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the QinQ link.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports 1024 QinQ links,whose IDs must be differentfrom each other.

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where the QinQlink is located.

Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port where the QinQlink is located.

S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN ID(at the networkoperator side) for theQinQ link.


A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet ProtocolsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)management.

A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.



A-213

A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.

A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CISTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTPCIST.

A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link AggregationThis section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.

A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.

A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.

A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.


Protection > ERPS Management.

2. Click New.

Parameters


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameterspecifies the ID of theEthernet ringprotection switching(ERPS) instance.

l The IDs of ERPSinstances on an NEmust be different fromeach other.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


East Port - - This parameter specifiesthe east port of the ERPSinstance.

West Port - - This parameter specifiesthe west port of the ERPSinstance.

RPL Owner Ring NodeFlag

YesNo

No l This parameterspecifies whether thenode on the ring is thering protection link(RPL) owner.

l Only one node on thering can be set as theRPL owner for eachEthernet ring.

RPL Port - - l This parameterspecifies the RPL port.

l There is only one RPLport and this RPL portmust be the east orwest port on the RPLowner node.



A-215


Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterspecifies the VLAN IDof Control VLAN.

l Each node on theEthernet ring transmitsthe R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS(R-APS) channel toensure consistencybetween the nodeswhen the ERPSswitching isperformed. ControlVLAN is used forisolating the dedicatedR-APS channel.Therefore, the VLANID in Control VLANcannot be duplicatewith the VLAN IDsthat are contained inthe service packets.

l The Control VLANmust be set to the samevalue for all the NEson an ERPS ring.

Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thedestination node. Thedefault destination MACaddress in the R-APSpackets is always 01-19-A7-00-00-01.

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)management.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetProtection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the ERPSinstance.

East Port - - This parameter indicatesthe east port of the ERPSinstance.

West Port - - This parameter indicatesthe west port of the ERPSinstance.

RPL Owner Ring NodeFlag

YesNo

- This parameter indicateswhether a node on the ringis the ring protection link(RPL) owner.

RPL Port - - This parameter indicatesthe RPL port.

Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe VLAN ID ofControl VLAN.

l Each node on theEthernet ring transmitsthe R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS(R-APS) channel toensure consistencybetween the nodeswhen the ERPSswitching isperformed. ControlVLAN is used forisolating the dedicatedR-APS channel.Therefore, the VLANID in Control VLANcannot be duplicatewith the VLAN IDsthat are contained inthe service packets orinband DCN packets.

l The Control VLANmust be set to the samevalue for all the NEson an ERPS ring.



A-217


Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thedestination node. Thedefault destination MACaddress in the R-APSpackets is always 01-19-A7-00-00-01.

Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 0 l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe hold-off time of theERPS hold-off timer.

l The hold-off timer isused for negotiatingthe protectionswitching sequencewhen the ERPScoexists with otherprotection schemes sothat the fault can berectified in the case ofother protectionswitching (such asLAG protection)before the ERPSoccurs. When a nodeon the ring detects oneor more new faults, itstarts up the hold-offtimer if the presethold-off time is set to avalue that is not 0.During the hold-offtime, the fault is notreported to trigger anERPS. When the hold-off timer times out, thenode checks the linkstatus regardlesswhether the fault thattriggers the startup ofthe timer exists. If thefault exists, the nodereports it to trigger anERPS. This fault canbe the same as ordifferent from the faultthat triggers the initialstartup of the hold-offtimer.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 500 l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe guard time of theERPS guard timer.

l The nodes on the ringcontinuously forwardthe R-APS packets tothe Ethernet ring. As aresult, the outdated R-APS packets may existon the ring network.After a node on thering receives theoutdated R-APSpackets, an incorrectERPS may occur. TheERPS guard timer is anR-APS timer used forpreventing a node onthe ring from receivingoutdated R-APSpackets. When a faultynode on the ringdetects that theswitching condition iscleared, the node startsup the guard timer andstarts to forward the R-APS (NR) packets.During this period, theR-APS packetsreceived by the nodeare discarded. Thereceived R-APSpackets are forwardedonly after the time ofthe guard timerexpires.



A-219


WTR Time(mm:ss) 5 to 12, in step of 1 5 l This parameterindicates or specifiesthe WTR time of theWRT timer in the caseof ERPS protection.

l The WTR time refersto the duration fromthe time when theworking channel isrestored to the timewhen the switching isreleased. When theworking channel isrestored, the WTRtimer of the RPLowner starts up. Inaddition, a signal thatindicates the operationof the WTR timer iscontinuously output inthe timing process.When the WTR timertimes out and noswitching request of ahigher priority isreceived, the signalindicating theoperation of the WTRtimer is nottransmitted. Inaddition, the WTRrelease signal iscontinuously output.

l The WTR timer is usedto prevent frequentswitching caused bythe unstable workingchannel.

Packet TransmitInterval(s)

1 to 10 5 This parameter displays orspecifies the interval forsending R-APS packetsperiodically.

Entity Level 0 to 7 4 This parameter indicatesor specifies the level of themaintenance entity.

Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicatesthe last switching request.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


RB Status - - This parameter indicatesthe RB (RPL Blocked)status of the packetsreceived by the workingnode.l noRB: The RPL is not

blocked.l RB: The RPL is

blocked.

DNF Status - - This parameter indicatesthe DNF status of thepackets received by theworking node.l noDNF: The R-APS

packets do not containthe DNF flag. In thiscase, the packets areforwarded by the nodethat detects the fault ona non-RPL link, andthe node that receivesthe packets isrequested to clear theforwarding addresstable.

l DNF: The R-APSpackets contain theDNF flags. In thiscase, the packets areforwarded by the nodethat detects the fault onan RPL link, and thenode that receives thepackets is informednot to clear theforwarding addresstable.



A-221


State Machine Status - - This parameter indicatesthe status of the statemachine at the workingnode.l Idle: The Ethernet ring

is in normal state. Forexample, no node onthe Ethernet ringdetects any faults orreceives the R_APS(NR, RB) packets.

l Protection: TheEthernet ring is inprotected state. Forexample, a fault on thenode triggers theERPS, or a node on thering is in the WTRperiod after the fault isrectified.

Node Carried withCurrent Packet

- - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address carriedin the R-APS packetsreceived by the currentnode. The MAC addressrefers to the MAC addressof the source node thatinitiates the switchingrequest.

East Port Status - - Displays the status of theeast port.

West Port Status - - Displays the status of thewest port.

A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.3. Click Create.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Protocol Type MSTPSTP

MSTP This parameter specifiesthe protocol type.l MSTP: stands for

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 980supports the CISTMSTP only.

l STP: stands forSpanning TreeProtocol.

Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the protocol ofthe port group or amember port in theport group.

l If the STP or MSTP isenabled, the spanningtree topology isautomatically re-configured. As aresult, the services areinterrupted.

Parameters for Application PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where themember of port group islocated.

Available Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe available port list inwhich a port can be addedto the port group.

Selected Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe selected ports that canbe added to the port group.



A-223

A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.4. Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for the Added PortParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where themember of port group islocated.

Available Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe available port list inwhich a port needs to beadded to the port group.

Selected Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe selected ports thatneed to be added to theport group.

A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Port Group ID - - l This parameterindicates the ID of theport group.

l This parameter can beset to only the portgroup ID that isautomaticallyallocated.

MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Bridge ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Group ID - - l This parameterindicates the ID of theport group.

l This parameter can beset to only the portGroup ID that isautomaticallyallocated.

MST Domain Max HopCount

- 20 Specifies the maximumhop count of the MSTP.



A-225


Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameterspecifies the MSTPnetwork diameter.

l Network Diameter isrelated to the linkwhose number ofswitches is the mostand is indicated by thenumber of switchesthat are connected tothe link. When you setNetwork Diameterfor the switches, theMSTP automaticallysets Max Age(s),Hello Time(s), andForward Delay(s) tothe more appropriatevalues for theswitches.

l If the value ofNetwork Diameter isgreater, the network isin a larger scale.

Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameterspecifies the intervalfor transmitting theCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.

l The greater the valueof this parameter, theless the networkresources that areoccupied by thespanning tree. Thetopology stability,however, decreases.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameterspecifies themaximum age of theCBPDU packet that isrecorded by the port.

l The greater the value,the longer thetransmission distanceof the CBPDU, whichindicates that thenetwork diameter isgreater. When thevalue of this parameteris greater, it is lesspossible that the bridgedetects the link fault ina timely manner andthus the networkadaptation ability isreduced.

Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdofftime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.

l The greater the value,the longer the delay ofthe network statechange. Hence, thetopology changes areslower and therecovery in the case offaults is slower.

Port ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port in the port group.



A-227


Enable Edge Attribute DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies themanagement edgeattributes of the port.

l This parameterspecifies whether toset the port as an edgeport. The edge portrefers to the bridgeport that is connectedto the LAN. In normalcases, this port doesnot receive or transmitBPDU messages.

l This parameter can beset to Enabled onlywhen the port isdirectly connected tothe datacommunicationsterminal equipment,such as a computer. Inother cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe actual managementedge attributes of the port.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Point-to-Point Attribute falsetrueauto

auto l This parameterspecifies the point-to-point attribute of theport.

l false: forced non-point-to-point linkattribute

l true: forced point-to-point link attribute

l auto: automaticallydetected point-to-point link attribute

l If this parameter is setto auto, the bridgedetermines ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute of the portaccording to the actualworking mode. If theactual working modeis full-duplex, theactual point-to-pointattribute is true. If theactual working modeis half-duplex, ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute is false.

l Only the designatedport whose ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute is "True"can transmit the rapidstate migration requestand response.


Actual Point-to-PointAttribute

- - This parameter indicatesthe actual point-to-pointattribute of the port.



A-229


Max Transmit PacketCount

1 to 255 3 l This parameterspecifies themaximum number ofpackets to betransmitted.

l The maximum numberof packets to betransmitted by the portrefers to the maximumnumber of MSTPpackets that the portcan transmit within 1s.

l This parameter needsto be set according tothe planninginformation.

A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.


Port Group - - This parameter specifiesthe port group.

MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicatesthe MSTI ID. The value 0indicates common andinternal spanning tree(CIST). The OptiX RTN980 supports only theMSTP that uses CIST.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant16 bits of the bridge IDindicate the priority ofthe bridge.

l When the value issmaller, the priority ishigher. As a result, thebridge is more possibleto be selected as theroot bridge.

l If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STP/MSTP network use thesame value, the bridgewhose MAC address isthe smallest is selectedas the root bridge.



Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.

l When the value issmaller, the priority ishigher.

Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameterindicates the status ofthe network that theport is connected to.

l In the case of thebridges on both ends ofthe path, set thisparameter to the samevalue.



A-231

A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information Aboutthe CIST

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTPCIST.


Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.


Port Group ID - - This parameter indicatesthe ID of the port group.

Protocol Running Mode MSTPSTP

- l This parameterindicates the runningmode of the protocol.

l MSTP: stands forMultiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 980supports only theCIST-based MSTP.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameterindicates the priorityof the bridge.

l The most significant16 bits of the bridge IDindicate the priority ofthe bridge.


l If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STPnetwork use the samevalue, the bridgewhose MAC address isthe smallest is selectedas the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thebridge.

Root Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 This parameter indicatesthe priority of the rootbridge.

Root Bridge MACAddress

- - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of theroot bridge.

External Path CostERPC

- - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Domain Root BridgePriority


Domain Root BridgeMAC Address


Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.



A-233


Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameterindicates the priorityof the root port.

l The most significanteight bits of the ID ofthe root port indicatethe priority of the rootport.


Root Port - - This parameter indicatesthe root port.

Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameterindicates the intervalfor transmittingCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdofftime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.


MST Domain Max HopCount


Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicatesthe identifier of thetopology change.

Last Topology ChangeTime(s)

- - This parameter indicatesthe duration of the lasttopology change.

Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicatesthe count of the topologychanges.



Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicateswhether the protocol ofthe port group or amember of the port groupis enabled.

Port Role - Disabled This parameter indicatesthe role of a port.



A-235


Port Status DiscardingLearningForwarding

Discarding This parameter indicatesthe state of a port.l Discarding: receives

only BPDU packetsl Learning: only

receives or transmitsBPDU packets

l Forwarding: forwardsuser traffic, andtransmits/receivesBPDU packets

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.


Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameterindicates the status ofthe network that theport is connected to.

l In the case of thebridges on both ends ofthe path, set thisparameter to the samevalue.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant16 bits of the bridge IDindicate the priority ofthe bridge.


l If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STPnetwork use the samevalue, the bridgewhose MAC address isthe smallest is selectedas the root bridge.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicatesthe MAC address of thebridge.

Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 0 l The most significanteight bits of the port IDindicate the portpriority.


Design Port - 0 This parameter indicatesthe designated port.

Edge Port Attribute DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterspecifies themanagement edgeattributes of the port.

l This parameterspecifies whether toset the port as an edgeport. The edge portrefers to the bridgeport that is connectedto the LAN. In normalcases, this port doesnot receive or transmitBPDU messages.

l This parameter can beset to Enabled onlywhen the port isdirectly connected tothe datacommunicationsterminal equipment,such as a computer. Inother cases, it isrecommended that youuse the default value.

Actual Edge PortAttribute

- Disabled This parameter indicatesthe actual managementedge attributes of the port.



A-237


Point to Point falsetrueauto

auto l This parameterspecifies the point-to-point attribute of theport.

l false: forced non-point-to-point linkattribute

l true: forced point-to-point link attribute

l auto: automaticallydetected point-to-point link attribute

l If this parameter is setto auto, the bridgedetermines ActualPoint to PointAttribute of the portaccording to the actualworking mode. If theactual working modeis full-duplex, theactual point-to-pointattribute is true. If theactual working modeis half-duplex, ActualPoint to PointAttribute is false.

l Only the designatedport whose ActualPoint-to-PointAttribute is "True"can transmit the rapidstate migration requestand response.


Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicatesthe actual point-to-pointattribute of the port.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Max Count ofTransmitting Message

1 to 255 3 l This parameterindicates themaximum number ofpackets to betransmitted.

l The maximum numberof packets to betransmitted by the portrefers to the maximumnumber of MSTPpackets that the portcan transmit within 1s.

Protocol Running Mode STPMSTP

- l This parameterindicates the runningmode of the protocol.

l MSTP: stands forMultiple SpanningTree Protocol. TheOptiX RTN 980supports only theCIST-based MSTP.


Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameterindicates the intervalfor transmitting theCBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.




A-239




Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameterspecifies the holdingtime of a port in thelistening state and inthe learning state.


Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAGCreation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).


Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.3. Click New.


LAG No. - 1 l This parameterspecifies the LAGnumber to be setmanually.

l This parameter is validonly whenAutomaticallyAssign is not selected.

Automatically Assign SelectedDeselected

Selected l This parameterindicates whetherLAG No. is allocatedautomatically.

l When AutomaticallyAssign is selected,LAG No. cannot beset.

LAG Name - - This parameter specifiesthe LAG name.



A-241


LAG Type StaticManual

Static l Static: You can createa LAG. When you addor delete a memberport to or from theLAG, the LinkAggregation ControlProtocol (LACP)protocol is required. Ina LAG, a port can be inselected, standby, orunselected state. Theaggregationinformation isexchanged amongdifferent equipmentthrough the LACPprotocol to ensure thatthe aggregationinformation is thesame among all thenodes.

l Manual: You cancreate a LAG. Whenyou add or delete amember port, theLACP protocol is notrequired. The port canbe in the up or downstate. The systemdetermines whether toaggregate a portaccording to itsphysical state (UP orDOWN), workingmode, and rate.

Switch Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Switch Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.

Link Trace Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Revertive Mode Revertive ModeNon-Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Mode l Revertive Mode canbe set only when LoadSharing is set to Non-Sharing.

l When RevertiveMode is set toRevertive Mode, theservices are switchedback to the formerworking channel afterthis channel is restoredto normal.

l When RevertiveMode is set to Non-Revertive Mode, thestatus of the LAG doesnot change after theformer workingchannel is restored tonormal. That is, theservices are stilltransmitted on theprotection channel.



A-243


Load Sharing SharingNon-Sharing

Non-Sharing l Set Load Sharing tothe same value as thepeer equipment. It isrecommended that youset Load Sharing toNon-Sharing at bothends if the LAGs areused for protection andset Load Sharing toSharing at both ends ifthe LAGs are used forincreasingbandwidths.

l Sharing: Each memberlink of a LAGprocesses traffic at thesame time and sharesthe traffic load. Thesharing mode canincrease a bandwidthutilization for the link.When the LAGmembers change, orcertain links fail, thesystem automaticallyre-allocates the traffic.

l Non-Sharing: Onlyone member link of aLAG carries traffic,and the other link is inthe standby state. Inthis case, a hot backupmechanism isprovided. When theactive link of a LAG isfaulty, the systemactivates the standbylink, thus preventinglink failure.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Load Sharing HashAlgorithm

Source MACDestination MACSource and DestinationMACSource IPDestination IPSource and Destination IPMPLS Label

Source MAC l This parameter is validonly when LoadSharing of a LAG isset to Sharing.

l The load sharingcomputation methodsinclude computationbased on MACaddresses (based onthe source MACaddress, based on thedestination MACaddress, and based onthe source MACaddress + sink MACaddress), computationbased on IP addresses(based on the source IPaddress, based on thedestination IP address,and based on thesource IP address andsink IP address), andcomputation based onMPLS labels.

l After the configurationdata is deployed, LoadSharing HashAlgorithm takeseffect for the entireNE.

l For PW-carried UNI-NNI E-Line services,Load Sharing HashAlgorithm cannot beset to MPLS Label.



A-245


System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l System Priorityindicates the priorityof a LAG. The smallerthe value of SystemPriority, the higherthe priority.

l When a local LAGnegotiates with anopposite LAG throughLACP packets, bothLAGs can obtain thesystem priorities ofeach other. Then, theLAG of the highersystem priority isconsidered as thecomparison result ofboth LAGs so that theaggregationinformation isconsistent at bothLAGs. If the prioritiesof both LAGs are thesame, the system MACaddresses arecompared. Then, thecomparison resultbased on the LAG withsmaller system MACaddress is consideredas the result of bothLAGs and is used toensure that theaggregationinformation isconsistent at bothLAGs.

WTR Time(min) 1 to 30 10 l Specifies the WTRtime for the LAG.

l WTR Time(min)takes effect only whenRevertive Mode isRevertive Mode.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Switch LAG upon AirInterface SD

DisabledEnabled

Enabled l This parameterspecifies whether toenable the switchingtriggered by bit errors.

l If Switch LAG uponAir Interface SD is setto Enabled, theMW_BER_SD alarmwill trigger the LAGswitching at the airinterface.

Port Settings ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Main Board - - l This parameterspecifies the mainboard in a LAG.


Main Port - - l This parameterspecifies the main portin a LAG.

l After a LAG is created,you can add Ethernetservices to the mainport only. Servicescannot be added to aslave port. When LoadSharing is set to Non-Sharing, the linkconnected to the mainport is used to transmitthe services, and thelink connected to theslave port is used forprotection.

Board (Available SlavePorts)

- - l This parameterspecifies the slaveboard in a LAG.




A-247


Port (Available SlavePorts)

- - l This parameterspecifies the salve portin a LAG.

l The slave ports in aLAG are fixed. Unlessthey are manuallymodified, the systemdoes not automaticallyadd them to or deletethem from the LAG.

Selected Standby Ports - - This parameter indicatesthe selected slave ports.

A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link AggregationThis section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.


Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Port Priority tab.


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port whose priority canbe set.

Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameterindicates the prioritiesof the ports in a LAGas defined in the LACPprotocol. The smallerthe value, the higherthe priority.

l When ports are addedinto a LAG, the port ofthe highest priority ispreferred for servicetransmission.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPTThis topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT

Management > LPT from the Function Tree.2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.

Parameters on the main interfaceParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Binding Status - - This parameter displaysthe binding status of point-to-point services.

Primary Function Point - - This parameter displaysthe port where the primarypoint of point-to-pointLPT resides.

Secondary FunctionPoint Type

- - This parameter displaysthe type of secondarypoint for point-to-pointLPT.

Secondary FunctionPoint

- - This parameter displaysthe port where thesecondary point of point-to-point LPT resides.

LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displaysthe status of point-to-pointLPT.

LPT Enabled EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter displays orspecifies the enablingstatus of point-to-pointLPT.The LPT function can takeeffect only when LPTEnabled is set toEnabled.

Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays orspecifies the recovery timeof point-to-point LPT.

Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays orspecifies the hold-off timeof point-to-point LPT.



A-249


Switching Mode - - This parameter displaysthe switching mode ofpoint-to-point LPT. Point-to-point LPT is availableonly in strict mode.

Fault Detection Mode PW OAMLPT OAM

LPT OAM This parameter displaysthe fault detection mode ofpoint-to-multipoint LPT.l LPT-enabled NEs

periodically transmitLPT OAM packets inspecific formats tocheck the status of anL2 service network orQinQ service network.If the LPT OAMpackets are absent for3.5 fault detectionperiods or the numberand contents ofreceived LPT OAMpackets are incorrect,the NEs consider that anetwork-side faultoccurred and the LPTswitching is triggered.

l To detect a network-side fault on a PSN,LPT OAM or PWOAM packets can beused. Note that the PWOAM function must beenabled on NEs beforeusage of PW OAMpackets.

Fault Detection Period(100ms)

3-100 10 This parameter displays orspecifies the faultdetection period of point-to-point LPT.

User-Side Port Status - - This parameter displaysthe status of a user-sideport.

L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displaysthe NET IDs of LPTpacket out ports at bothends.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.


Management > LPT from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.

3. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.

4. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.



L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of LPT packetout port at the local end.

L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of LPT packetout port at the oppositeend.

Primary Function Point - - This parameter specifiesthe port where the primarypoint of point-to-pointLPT resides.

VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID that iscarried by a point-to-pointLPT packet to traverse anL2 network.

LPT package out port - - This parameter specifiesthe out port of a point-to-point LPT packet.

A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.


Management > LPT from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.



A-251

Parameters of Primary PointParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Primary Function PointType

- - This parameter displaysthe type of primary pointfor point-to-multipointLPT.

Primary Function Point - - This parameter displaysthe port where the primarypoint of point-to-multipoint LPT resides.

LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displaysthe status of point-to-multipoint LPT.

LPT Enabled EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter displaysthe enabling status ofpoint-to-multipoint LPT.

Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays orspecifies the recovery timeof point-to-multipointLPT.

Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays orspecifies the hold-off timeof point-to-multipointLPT.

Switching Mode Strict modeNon-strict mode

Strict mode This parameter displaysthe switching mode ofpoint-to-multipoint LPT.Point-to-point LPT isavailable only in strictmode.l Strict mode

A primary pointtriggers LPT switchingwhen all its secondarypoints detect faults.

l Non-strict modeA primary pointtriggers LPT switchingwhen anyone of itssecondary pointsdetects a fault.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Fault Detection Mode PW OAMLPT OAM

LPT OAM This parameter displaysthe fault detection mode ofpoint-to-multipoint LPT.l LPT-enabled NEs

periodically transmitLPT OAM packets inspecific formats tocheck the status of anL2 service network orQinQ service network.If the LPT OAMpackets are absent for3.5 fault detectionperiods or the numberand contents ofreceived LPT OAMpackets are incorrect,the NEs consider that anetwork-side faultoccurred and the LPTswitching is triggered.

l To detect a network-side fault on a PSN,LPT OAM or PWOAM packets can beused. Note that the PWOAM function must beenabled on NEs beforeusage of PW OAMpackets.

Fault Detection Period(100ms)

3-100 10 This parameter displays orspecifies the faultdetection period of point-to-multipoint LPT.


L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displaysthe NET IDs of LPTpacket out ports at bothends, when the servicenetwork is an L2 network.



A-253

Parameters of Secondary PointParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Access Point Type - - This parameter displaysthe type of second pointfor point-to-multipointLPT.

Access Point - - This parameter displaysthe port or PW ID for thesecondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT.


L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displaysthe NET IDs of LPTpacket out ports at bothends, when the servicenetwork is an L2 network.

A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-MultipointLPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.


Management > LPT from the Function Tree.2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.3. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.4. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters of primary pointParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Point Type UNIPWQinQL2 net

- This parameter specifiesthe type of primary pointfor point-to-multipointLPT. The value range ofthis parameter pertains tothe type of servicenetwork.If the primary point is onthe access side, selectUNI; if the primary pointis on the network side, setthe parameter as follows.l If the service network

is a PSN, select PW.l If the service network

is a QinQ network,select QinQ.

l If the service networkis an L2 network,select L2 net.

Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where theprimary point of point-to-multipoint LPT resides.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to UNI.

Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port where the primarypoint of point-to-multipoint LPT resides.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to UNI.

Point ID - - This parameter specifiesthe service ID for theprimary point of point-to-multipoint LPT.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to PW or QinQ.



A-255


L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of a local NE.This parameter is validonly when Point Type ofthe primary point is set toUNI, and when PointType of the secondarypoint is set to L2 net.

L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of an oppositeNE.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to L2 net.

VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID that iscarried by an LPT packetto traverse an L2 network.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to L2 net.

LPT package out port - - This parameter specifiesthe out port of an LPTpacket.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to L2 net.

Parameters of secondary pointParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Point Type UNIPWQinQL2 net

- This parameter displays orspecifies the type ofsecondary point for point-to-multipoint LPT.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where thesecondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT resides.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to PW, QinQ, or L2net.

Available Points - - This parameter displaysthe available ports wherethe secondary point ofpoint-to-multipoint LPTcan reside.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to PW, QinQ, or L2net.

Selected Points - - This parameter displaysthe selected port where thesecondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT resides.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to PW, QinQ, or L2net.

L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of a local NE.This parameter is validonly when Point Type isset to UNI.

L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifiesthe NET ID of an oppositeNE.This parameter is validonly when Point Type ofthe primary point is set toUNI, and when PointType of the secondarypoint is set to L2 net.



A-257


VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifiesthe VLAN ID that iscarried by an LPT packetto traverse an L2 network.This parameter is validonly when Point Type ofthe primary point is set toUNI, and when PointType of the secondarypoint is set to L2 net.

LPT Package out port - - This parameter specifiesthe out port of an LPTpacket.This parameter is validonly when Point Type ofthe primary point is set toUNI, and when PointType of the secondarypoint is set to L2 net.

A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAMThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).

A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance DomainCreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance AssociationCreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association endpoint (MEP).

A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance associationintermediate point (MIP).

A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB EnablingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT EnablingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM ParameterThis topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error FrameMonitoringThis topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at theEthernet port.

A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MaintenanceDomain Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.

3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.



MaintenanceDomain Name

- default l This parameter specifies the name of themaintenance domain.

l The maintenance domain refers to thenetwork for the Ethernet OAM.

l This parameter can contain a maximumof eight bytes.

MaintenanceDomain Level

01234567

4 l Maintenance Domain Level specifiesthe level of the maintenance domain.

l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,and the values 5-7 indicate the user level.

l When the value is set to 0, themaintenance domain is at the lowestlevel. The values 0-7 indicate that thelevel increases in a sequential order.

l The OAM packets whose level is higherthan the preset value are transparentlytransmitted by the MEPs. The OAMpackets whose level is lower than thepreset value are directly discarded by theMEPs. The OAM packets whose level isthe same as the preset value areresponded to or terminated by the MEPsaccording to the message type.



A-259

A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MaintenanceAssociation Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.

Choose New > New Maintenance Association.



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created maintenanceassociation.

MaintenanceAssociation Name

- - l This parameter specifies the name of themaintenance association, which is adomain related to a service. Throughmaintenance association division, theconnectivity check (CC) can beperformed on the network that transmitsa service instance.

l This parameter can contain a maximumof eight bytes.

Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the serviceinstance that is related to the maintenanceassociation.

CC Test TransmitPeriod

1s10s1m10m

1s l This parameter specifies the interval fortransmitting packets in the CC.

l The CC is performed to check theavailability of the service.

A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association endpoint (MEP).


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >New MEP Point.



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the created MEP.


- - This parameter indicates the maintenanceassociation of the created MEP.

Board - - This parameter specifies the board wherethe MEP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where theMEP is located.

VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID ofthe current service.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.l Each MEP needs to be configured with

an MP ID, which is unique in themaintenance association. The MP ID isrequired in the OAM operation.

Direction IngressEgress

Ingress l Direction specifies the direction of theMEP.

l Ingress indicates the direction in whichthe packets are transmitted to the port,and Egress indicates the direction inwhich the packets are transmitted fromthe port.

CC Status ActiveInactive

Active l This parameter specifies whether toenable the CC function of the MEP.

l In the case of the tests based on the MPIDs, CC Status must be set to Active.



A-261


AIS Active Status ActiveInactive

Active l This parameter specifies the AIS activestatus.

l If several MDs exist on a link, to locatea fault accurately, set AIS ActiveStatus to Active and Client LayerLevel that functions to suppress the AISinformation.

l After a fault is detected by an MP, if thisMP activates the AIS, it sends the AISpacket to a higher level MP, informingthe higher level MP of the faultinformation; if this MP does not activatethe AIS, it does not report the fault.

Client Layer Level 1 to 7 1 l Normally, if an MP is set to level n,Client Layer Level that functions tosuppress the AIS information should beset to n+1.

l Client Layer Level is valid only if AISActive Status is Active.

A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEPCreation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point

dialog box is displayed.4. Click New.



- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the MEP.


- - This parameter indicates the maintenanceassociation of the created MEP.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


RemoteMaintenance PointID(e.g:1,3-6)

1 to 2048 - l This parameter specifies the ID of theremote MEP.

l If other MEPs may initiate OAMoperations to an MEP in the same MA,set the other MEPs to be the remoteMEPs.

A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance associationintermediate point (MIP).


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the MIP Point tab.

3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.




- - This parameter indicates the maintenancedomain of the MIP.

Board - - This parameter specifies the board wherethe MIP is located.

Port - - This parameter specifies the port where theMIP is located.

MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.l Each MIP needs to be configured with an

MP ID, which is unique in themaintenance domain. The MP ID isrequired in the OAM operation.NOTE

To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at aport, ensure that only one MIP can be createdand the level of the MIP must be higher thanthe level of the MEP.

A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.



A-263


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.4. Choose OAM > Start LB.


DestinationMaintenance PointID

SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if theLB test is performed on the basis ofDestination Maintenance Point IDs.

DestinationMaintenance PointMAC Address

SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if theLB test is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance domain for the LB test.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance association for the LB test.

SourceMaintenance PointID

- - l This parameter specifies the sourcemaintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the sourcemaintenance point.


- - l This parameter specifies the destinationmaintenance point in the LB test.

l Only the MEP ID can be set to theDestination Maintenance Point ID.

l Destination Maintenance Point ID canbe set only when MP ID is selected.


- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MACaddress of the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LBtest.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP canbe set to the MAC address of theDestination Maintenance Point MACAddress.

l Destination Maintenance Point MACAddress can be set only when SinkMaintenance Point MAC Address.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


TransmittedPacket Count

1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number ofpackets transmitted each time in the LBtest.

l When the value is greater, the requiredduration is longer.

TransmittedPacket Length

64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of atransmitted LBM packet.

l If the packet length is different, the testresult may be different. In normal cases,it is recommended that you use thedefault value.

TransmittedPacket Priority

0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority oftransmitting packets.

l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7indicates the highest priority. In normalcases, this parameter is set to the highestpriority.

Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevantinformation and result of the LB test.

A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT EnablingThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.


OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.4. Choose OAM > Start LT.

Test Node ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description


SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LTtest is performed on the basis of MP IDs.


SelectedDeselected

Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LTtest is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.



A-265



- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance domain for the LT test.


- - This parameter indicates the name of themaintenance association for the LT test.


- - l This parameter specifies the sourcemaintenance point in the LT test.

l Only the MEP can be set to the sourcemaintenance point.


- - l This parameter specifies the destinationmaintenance point in the LT test.

l Only the MEP ID can be set to theDestination Maintenance Point ID.

l Destination Maintenance Point ID canbe set only when MP ID is selected.


- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MACaddress of the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LTtest.

l Only the MAC address of the MEP canbe set to the MAC address of theDestination Maintenance Point MACAddress.

l Destination Maintenance Point MACAddress can be set only when SinkMaintenance Point MAC Address.

Parameters for the Detection ResultParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- - This parameter indicates the sourcemaintenance point in the LT test.

DestinationMaintenance PointID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC addressof the port where the destinationmaintenance point is located in the LT test.

ResponseMaintenance PointID/MAC

- - This parameter indicates the MAC addressof the port where the respondingmaintenance point is located in the LT test.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number ofhops from the source maintenance pointto the responding maintenance point orto the destination maintenance point inthe LT test.

l The number of hops indicates theadjacent relation between the respondingmaintenance point to the sourcemaintenance point. The number of hopsincreases by one when a respondingpoint occurs on the link from the sourcemaintenance point to the destinationmaintenance point.

Test Result - - This parameter indicates the result of the LTtest.

A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM ParameterThis topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.



Enable OAMProtocol

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the OAM protocol.

l After the OAM protocol is enabled, thecurrent Ethernet port starts to use thepreset mode to create the OAMconnection with the opposite end.



A-267


OAM WorkingMode

ActivePassive

Active l This parameter indicates or specifies theworking mode of the OAM.

l The port whose OAM working mode isset to Active can initiate the OAMconnection.

l The port whose OAM working mode isset to Passive can only wait for theopposite end to send the OAMconnection request.

l The OAM working mode of theequipment at only one end can bePassive.

Link EventNotification

EnabledDisabled

Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the local link events can benotified to the opposite end.

l If the alarms caused by link events canbe reported, that is, if the number ofperformance events (for example, errorframe period, error frame, error framesecond, and error frame signal cycle) atthe local end exceeds the presetthreshold, these performance events arenotified to the port at the opposite endthrough the link event notificationfunction.


Remote SideLoopbackResponse

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether the port responds to the remoteloopback.

l Remote loopback indicates that the localOAM entity transmits packets to theremote OAM entity for loopback. Thelocal OAM entity can locate the fault andtest the link performance throughloopback data analysis.

l If a port does not support remoteloopback response, this port does notrespond to the loopback request from theremote port regardless of the OAM portstatus.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Loopback Status Non-LoopbackInitiate Loopback atLocalRespond Loopbackof Remote

- This parameter indicates the loopback statusat the local end.NOTE

Loopback Status is valid only after you chooseOAM > Enable Remote Loopback.

OAM DiscoveryStatus

- - This parameter indicates the OAMdiscovery status at the local end.

Port TransmitStatus

- - This parameter indicates the status oftransmitting packets at the local end.

Port Receive Status - - This parameter indicates the status ofreceiving packets at the local end.

A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM ErrorFrame Monitoring

This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at theEthernet port.


OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.



Error FrameMonitor Window(ms)

1000 to 60000, instep of 100

1000 This parameter specifies the duration ofmonitoring error frames.

Error FrameMonitor Threshold(frames)

1 to 4294967295, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring error frames.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Monitor Window(ms), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of ErrorFrame Monitor Threshold(frame), analarm is reported.



A-269


Error FramePeriod Window(frame)

1488 to 892800000,in step of 1

892800000 This parameter specifies the window ofmonitoring the error frame period.

Error FramePeriod Threshold(frames)

1 to 892800000, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring the error frame period.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Period Window(frame), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of ErrorFrame Period Threshold(frame), analarm is reported.

Error FrameSecond Window(s)

10 to 900, in step of1

60 This parameter specifies the time window ofmonitoring the error frame second.

Error FrameSecond Threshold(s)

10 to 900, in step of1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring error frame seconds.

l If any error frame occurs in one second,this second is called an errored framesecond. Within the specified value ofError Frame Second Window(s), if thenumber of error frames on the linkexceeds the preset value of ErrorFrame Second Threshold(s), an alarmis reported.

Error FrameSignal PeriodicMonitor Window(Entries)

1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window ofmonitoring the error frame signal period.

Error FrameSignal PeriodicMonitor Threshold(Entries)

1 to 7500000000, instep of 1

1 l This parameter specifies the threshold ofmonitoring the error frame signal period.

l Within the specified value of ErrorFrame Signal Periodic MonitorWindow(Entries), if the number oferror signals exceeds the preset value ofError Frame Signal Periodic MonitorThreshold(Entries), an alarm isreported.

A.6.4 QoS ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_ModificationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain appliedports.

A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.

A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port PolicyThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.

A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification ConfigurationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.

A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.

A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from theFunction Tree.


Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicatesthe ID of the mappingrelation between DiffServdomains.

Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicatesthe name of the mappingrelation between DiffServdomains.

NOTE

If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, andMapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to thisdomain.



A-271

Parameters for Ingress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priorityof the C-VLAN of theingress packets.

l C-VLAN indicates theclient-side VLAN, andthe value 7 indicatesthe highest priority.

SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priorityof the S-VLAN of theingress packets.

l S-VLAN indicates theserver-side VLAN,and the value 7indicates the highestpriority.

IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterindicates the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of theingress packets.

l The differentiatedservices code point(DSCP) refers to bits0-5 of thedifferentiated services(DS) field in the packetand indicates theservice class anddiscarding priority ofthe packet.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLSEXP value of ingresspackets.

l When a packet in anegress queue leaves anNNI port, the NNI portobtains the packetpriority valueaccording to themappings betweenPHB service classes ofegress queues andegress packetpriorities (MPLS EXPvalues), and writes theobtained priority valueinto the EXP field ofthe egress MPLSpacket.

NOTEThe MPLS EXP value canbe modified in the defaultDiffserv domain (DefaultMap) only.



A-273


PHB BEAF1AF2AF3AF4EFCS6CS7

- l This parameterindicates the per-hopbehavior (PHB)service class of theDiffServ domain.

l The PHB service classrefers to theforwarding behaviorof the DiffServ nodeon the behavioraggregate (BA)operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP value,and MPLS EXP value)contained in thepackets of the DiffServdomain and the eightPHB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.

NOTEThe AF1 is classified intothree sub service classes,namely, AF11, AF12, andAF13, only one of which isvalid. It is the same casewith the AF2, AF3, andAF4.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Egress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of theDiffServ domain.

l The PHB service classrefers to theforwarding behaviorof the DiffServ nodeon the behavioraggregate (BA)operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP valueand MPLS value)contained in thepackets of the DiffServdomain and the eightPHB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priorityof the C-VLAN of theegress packets.




A-275


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterindicates the priorityof the S-VLAN of theegress packets.


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterindicates the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of theingress packets.

l The DSCP refers tobits 0-5 of the DS fieldin the packet andindicates the serviceclass and discardingpriority of the packet.

MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLSEXP value of egresspackets.

l When a packet arrivesat an NNI port, theNNI port obtains thepacket priority valuedepending on itstrusted priority type(MPLS EXP value)and specifies the PHBservice class of thepacket according to themappings betweenpacket priorities andPHB service classes.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Port - - This parameter indicatesthe port that uses theDiffServ domain.

Packet Type CVLANSVLANIP-DSCPMPLS-EXP

CVLAN The packets trusted by theOptiX RTN 980 are theC_VLAN, S_VLAN andIP DSCP packets thatcontain the C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP value orMPLS value. By default,the untrusted packets aremapped to the BE serviceclass for best-effortforwarding.NOTEl The trusted packet

priorities of a UNI portinclude DSCP value, C-VLAN priority, and S-VLAN priority. For theE-Line services that aretransparentlytransmitted end to end(UNI-UNI), a UNI portonly trusts DSCP value.

l An NNI port carryingMPLS/PWE3 servicestrusts only packets withMPLS EXP values.

l The trusted packetpriorities of a QinQ linkNNI port are configuredaccording to theplanning information.

A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_CreateThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management fromthe Function Tree.

2. Click New.



A-277


Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the C-VLANpriority of the ingresspackets.


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANpriority of the ingresspackets.


IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterspecifies the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of theingress packets.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLSEXP value of ingresspackets.





A-279



- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of the DSdomain.

l The PHB service classrefers to theforwarding behaviorof the DS node on thebehavior aggregate(BA) operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP valueand MPLS EXP value)contained in thepackets of the DSdomain and the eightPHB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Egress Mapping RelationParameter Value Range Default Value Description


- l This parameterindicates the PHBservice class of the DSdomain.

l The PHB service classrefers to theforwarding behaviorof the DS node on thebehavior aggregate(BA) operation. Theforwarding behaviorcan meet the specificrequirements.

l The PHB serviceclasses are BE, AF1,AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,CS6, and CS7. Thepriorities (C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP valueand MPLS EXP value)contained in thepackets of the DSdomain and the eightPHB service classesmeet the requirementsof the specified ordefault mappingrelation.


CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the C-VLANpriority of the egresspackets.

l C-VLAN indicates theclient-side VLANpriority, and the value7 indicates the highestpriority.



A-281


SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameterspecifies the S-VLANpriority of the egresspackets.

l S-VLAN indicates theserver-side VLANpriority, and the value7 indicates the highestpriority.

IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameterspecifies the DSCPpriority of the IPaddresses of the egresspackets.


MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLSEXP value of egresspackets.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board that uses themapping relationsbetween DS domains.

Available Port - - This parameter displaysthe available port list fromwhich you can select theport that uses the mappingrelations between DSdomains.

Port - - This parameter displaysthe selected port list. Theports in the list use themapping relationsbetween DS domains.



A-283


Packet Type cvlansvlanip-dscpmpls-exp

cvlan l This parameterspecifies the type ofthe packet.

l The packets trusted bythe OptiX RTN 980are the C_VLAN,S_VLAN, IP DSCPand MPLS packets thatcontain the C_VLANpriority, S_VLANpriority, DSCP valueor MPLS EXP value.By default, theuntrusted packets aremapped to the BEservice class for best-effort forwarding.

NOTEl The trusted packet




A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain appliedports.


Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management fromthe Function Tree.

2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3. Click the Apply Port tab.4. Click Modify.

Parameters for Configuring the Applied PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the mappingrelation of a DS domain.

Packet Type CVLANSVLANIP-DSCPMPLS-EXP

CVLAN The packets trusted by theOptiX RTN 980 are the C-VLAN, S-VLAN, IPDSCP packets, and MPLSpackets that respectivelycontain the C-VLANpriority, S-VLANpriority, IP DSCP valueand MPLS EXP value. Bydefault, the untrustedpackets are mapped to theBE service class for best-effort forwarding.NOTEl The trusted packet




Board - - This parameter specifiesthe board where the port islocated.

Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available port.



A-285


Selected Port - - This parameter indicatesthe selected port.The selected port isapplied to the DS domain.

NOTE

If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping RelationName is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.

A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.


Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.2. Click the CoS Configuration tab.


Policy ID - - This parameter indicatesthe policy ID of the port.

Policy Name - - This parameter indicatesor specifies the policyname of the port.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


CoS CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l The BE, AF1, AF2,AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,and CS7 serviceclasses respectivelymap eight queuingentities. The OptiXRTN 980 providesdifferent QoS policiesfor the queues atdifferent serviceclasses.

l CS6-CS7: indicatesthe highest servicegrade, which is mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.

l EF: indicates fastforwarding. Thisservice class isapplicable to the trafficwhose delay is smalland packet loss ratio islow, for example,voice and videoservices.

l AF1-AF4: indicatesassured forwarding.This service class isapplicable to the trafficthat requires rateguarantee but does notrequire delay or jitterlimit.

l BE: indicates that thetraffic is forwarded inbest-effort mannerwithout specialprocessing.



A-287


Grooming Police AfterReloading

SPWRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SPAF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:WRR

l The strict priority (SP)scheduling algorithmis designed for the keyservices. Oneimportantcharacteristic of thekey services is thathigher priorities arerequired to minimizethe response delay inthe case of congestionevents.

l The weighted roundrobin (WRR)scheduling algorithmdivides each port intomultiple output sub-queues. The pollingscheduling isperformed among theoutput sub-queues toensure that each sub-queue has a certainperiod of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports the setting ofthe SP+WRRscheduling algorithmof the CoS queueaccording to therequirement, andprovides one or morequeues that complywith the SP algorithm.Except for the defaultvalue, however, thevalue of the WRRscheduling algorithmand the value of the SPscheduling algorithmcannot be interleaved.That is, except for thedefault value,Grooming PoliceAfter Reloading canbe changed from SP toWRR according to thequeue priorities in adescending order(CS7-BE).




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameterspecifies the weight ofthe policy in the WRRqueue. The weightindicates thepercentage of thebandwidth resourcesobtained by the WRRqueue.

l This parameter can beset only whenGrooming PoliceAfter Reloading is setto WRR.


Bandwidth Limit DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether trafficshaping is enabled foran egress queuecorresponding to aPHB service class.

l CIR (kbit/s), PIR(kbit/s), CBS (byte),and PBS (byte) can beset only whenBandwidth Limit isset to Enabled.


CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.



A-289


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, itis directly forwarded;if the rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwardedat a rate equal to thePIR.

l When the buffer queueis not empty, thepackets whose ratepasses the restrictionof the PIR directlyenter the buffer queueand then are forwardedat a rate equal to thePIR.


CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended thatyou set the value of theCBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actualtraffic shapingprocessing, only thePBS is valid.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIRin a certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by thePBS.


A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port PolicyThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.


Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.2. Click the CoS Configuration tab.3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.


Policy ID - - This parameter specifiesthe policy ID of the port.

Automatically Assign SelectedDeselected

Deselected This parameter specifieswhether to automaticallyallocate the policy ID ofthe port policy. After thisparameter is selected, thesystem automaticallyallocates the policy ID,and then the policy IDcannot be set manually.

Policy Name - - This parameter specifiesthe policy name of theport.



A-291



- l The BE, AF1, AF2,AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,and CS7 serviceclasses respectivelymap eight queuingentities. The OptiXRTN 980 providesdifferent QoS policiesfor the queues atdifferent service class.

l CS6-CS7: indicatesthe highest servicegrade, which is mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Grooming Police AfterReloading

SPWRR

CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SPAF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:WRR

l The strict priority (SP)scheduling algorithmis designed for the keyservices. Oneimportantcharacteristic of thekey services is thathigher priorities arerequired to minimizethe response delay inthe case of congestionevents.

l The weighted roundrobin (WRR)scheduling algorithmdivides each port intomultiple output sub-queues. The pollingscheduling isperformed among theoutput sub-queues toensure that each sub-queue has a certainperiod of service time.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports the setting ofthe SP+WRRscheduling algorithmof the CoS queueaccording to therequirement, andprovides one or morequeues that complywith the SP algorithm.Except for the defaultvalue, however, thevalue of the WRRscheduling algorithmand the value of the SPscheduling algorithmcannot be interleaved.That is, except for thedefault value,Grooming PoliceAfter Reloading canbe changed from SP toWRR according to thequeue priorities in adescending order(CS7-BE).



A-293



Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l Policy Weight(%)specifies the weight ofthe policy in the WRRqueue. The weightindicates thepercentage of thebandwidth resourcesobtained by the WRRqueue.

l This parameter can beset only whenGrooming PoliceAfter Reloading is setto WRR.



Disabled l Bandwidth Limitindicates or specifieswhether trafficshaping is enabled foran egress queuecorresponding to aPHB service class.



CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, itis directly forwarded;if the rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwardedat a rate equal to thePIR.



CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended thatyou set the value of theCBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actualtraffic shapingprocessing, only thePBS is valid.




A-295


PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIRin a certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by thePBS.


A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification ConfigurationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.


Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.3. Click New.


Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the trafficclassification.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


ACL Action PermitDeny

Permit l The access control list(ACL) determineswhether to forward ordiscard the packetsthat enter the portaccording to thespecified matchingrules.

l When ACL Action isset to Permit, theingress port acceptsand then performs QoSprocessing for only thepackets that meet thespecified mappingrules.

l When ACL Action isset to Deny, theingress port discardsthe packets that meetthe specified mappingrules.

Ingress ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Logical RelationBetween Matched Rules

And And l This parameterspecifies the logicalrelationship betweenthe trafficclassificationmatching rules.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports the setting ofthe logical ANDbetween multiplematching rules.



A-297


Match Type DSCP ValueCVlan IDCVlan prioritySVlan IDSVlan priority

- l After you click Add orDelete, complextraffic classificationcan be performed onthe traffic that entersthe ingress portaccording to the presetmatching rules.

l In the case a specificservice, complextraffic classificationcan be divided intobasic traffic typesaccording to the DSCPvalue, C-VLAN ID, C-VLAN priority, S-VLAN ID, or S-VLAN priority.Traffic type is basedon the associatedEthernet packets.Therefore, thisparameter is setaccording to the packettype and the planninginformation.

Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63CVlan ID: 1 to 4094CVlan priority: 0 to 7SVlan ID: 1 to 4094SVlan priority: 0 to 7

- l If the matching valueof the packets is thesame as the presetMatch Value, thepackets match therules of complextraffic classification.


Wildcard - - This parameter has a fixedvalue of 0.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


CoS -CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l This parameterspecifies the PHBservice class queuemapped by the trafficclassification packets.

l If this parameter is setto empty (-), the trafficclassification packetsmap the PHB serviceclass queue accordingthe mapping relationspecified in the topicabout Diffserv domainmanagement.



Enabled l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether the CARoperation is performedfor the flow in theingress direction.





A-299


CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of thepackets is not morethan the CIR, thepackets are markedblue and pass the CARpolicing. Thesepackets are firstforwarded in the caseof network congestion.

l When the rate of thepackets is more thanthe CIR but not morethan the PIR, thepackets whose rate ismore than the CIR canpass the restriction ofthe CAR and aremarked yellow. Theprocessing method ofthe packets markedyellow can be set to"Pass" or "Remark"."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port. If anetwork congestionevent occurs again, thepackets markedyellow can beprocessed according tothe new priority.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of thepackets is more thanthe PIR, the packetsthat exceed the raterestriction are markedred and directlydiscarded.

l When the rate of thepackets is more thanthe CIR but not morethan the PIR, thepackets whose rate ismore than the CIR canpass the restriction ofthe CAR and aremarked yellow. Theprocessing method ofthe packets markedyellow can be set to"Pass" or "Remark"."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port. If anetwork congestionevent occurs again, thepackets markedyellow can beprocessed according tothe new priority.




A-301


CBS(byte) - - l During a certainperiod, if the rate of thepackets whoseprocessing method ismarked "Pass" is notmore than the CIR,certain burst packetsare allowed and can befirst forwarded in thecase of networkcongestion. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by theCBS.


PBS(byte) - - l During a certainperiod, if the rate of thepackets whoseprocessing method ismarked "Pass" is morethan the CIR but notmore than the PIR,certain burst packetsare allowed andmarked yellow. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by thePBS.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameterspecifies the CARoperation performedby the equipment onthe packets. Thepackets are dyedaccording to the resultof the CAR operation.The dying rule isdetermined by thecomparison betweenthe rate of the packetsand the preset CARvalue.

l The OptiX RTN 980supports ColorBlindness only.

Packet Color RedYellowGreen

- Packets can be dyed inthree colors: red, yellow,and green. The packets inred are first discarded.

Handling Mode DiscardPassRemark

- l This parameterspecifies the method ofhandling the packets.

l Discard: The packetsare discarded.

l Pass: The packets areforwarded.

l Remark: The packetsare remarked."Remark" indicatesthat the packets aremapped into anotherspecified queue of ahigher priority (this isequal to changing thepriority of the packets)and then forwarded tothe next port.



A-303


Relabeled CoS CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- If the handling method isset to "Remark", you canreset the CoS of thepackets.

Egress ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Bandwidth Limit DisabledEnable

Enable l This parameterindicates or specifieswhether the trafficshaping is performedin the egress function.






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that nopackets exist in theegress queue: Whenthe rate of the packetsis not more than theCIR, these packetsdirectly enter theegress queue.

l In the case that certainpackets exist in theegress queue: Thepackets whose ratepasses the restrictionof the PIR directlyenter the egress queue,which forwards thepackets to the next portat the CIR.




A-305


PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that nopackets exist in theegress queue: If therate of the packets ismore than the CIR butis not more than thePIR, the packetswhose rate is morethan the CIR enter theegress queue, whichforwards the packets tothe next port at theCIR. If the rate of thepackets is more thanthe PIR, the packetsare directly discarded.

l In the case that certainpackets exist in theegress queue: Thepackets whose ratepasses the restrictionof the PIR directlyenter the egress queue,which forwards thepackets to the next portat the CIR.


CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of thepackets is not morethan the CIR during acertain period, theburst packets aredirectly transmitted.The maximum trafficof the burst packets isdetermined by theCBS.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of thepackets is more thanthe CIR but is not morethan the PIR during acertain period, theburst packets enter theegress queue. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by thePBS.


A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.


Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.

Parameters for Port Shaping Management


Slot No. - - This parameter specifiesthe slot ID.

Port - - This parameter specifiesthe port.

CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for anegress queue uses thesingle token bucket twocolor marker algorithm.The value of the CIR mustbe equal to the value of thePIR. In actual trafficshaping processing, onlythe PIR is valid.If the traffic shapingfunction is enabled, OptiXRTN 980 processes thepackets in the buffer

CBS (byte) - -

PIR (kbit/s) - -



A-307


PBS (byte) - - queue through thefollowing methods whenno packets are available inthe queue.l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packetsare processed asfollows: If the rate of apacket is equal to orlower than the PIR, itis directly forwarded;if the rate of a packet ishigher than the PIR, itenters the buffer queueand then is forwardedat a rate equal to thePIR.

l When the buffer queueis empty, certain burstpackets can beforwarded if the rate ofthe packets is equal toor lower than the PIRin a certain period. Themaximum traffic of theburst packets isdetermined by thePBS.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.7 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.

A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.

A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.

A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.


Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.2. Click the Statistics Group tab.


Object - - This parameter specifies the object to bemonitored.

Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of themonitoring period.

DisplayAccumulatedValue

SelectedDeselected

Deselected l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is not selected, thedisplayed value is an incrementcompared to the value that is collected inlast sampling period and stored in theregister.

l If this parameter is selected, thedisplayed value is an absolute value thatis currently stored in the register.



A-309


Display Mode GraphicsList

List l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, thenumber of performance events to bemonitored at each time cannot be morethan 10, and the unit should be the same.

Legend ColorDescription

- l This parameter indicates the descriptionof different colors.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to Graphics.

Event - - l This parameter indicates the queriedperformance events.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.

A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.


Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.2. Click the History Group tab.


Object - - The parameter indicates the object to bemonitored.

Ended from/to - - This parameter specifies the start time andend time of the monitoring period.

History TableType

30-Second30-MinuteCustom Period 1Custom Period 2

30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoringperiod.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Display Mode GraphicsList

List l This parameter specifies the method ofdisplaying the performance events.

l If this parameter is set to Graphics, thenumber of performance events to bemonitored at each time cannot be morethan 10, and the unit should be the same.

Legend ColorDescription

- l This parameter indicates the descriptionof different colors.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to Graphics.

Event - - l This parameter indicates the queriedperformance events.

l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.

Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performanceitems to be monitored.

Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical valueof the monitored performance items.

Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point ofeach performance event.

A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History ControlGroup

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON HistoryControl Group.


30-Second EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Secondmonitoring function.

30-Minute EnabledDisabled

Enabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.



A-311


Custom Period 1 EnabledDisabled

Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 1.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 2.

Period Length(s) 300 to 43200(Custom Period 1)300 to 86400(Custom Period 2)

900(Custom Period1)86400(CustomPeriod 2)

l This parameter indicates or specifies themonitoring period in Custom Period 1and Custom Period 2.

l The value must be an integer multiple of30.

History RegisterCount

1 to 50 166(Custom Period 2)

This parameter indicates or specifies thequantity of the history registers.

RMON MonitorStart Time

- - This parameter specifies the RMON starttime.

A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON SettingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.


Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.

l Click the RMON Setting tab.

Object Parameters


Object - - This parameter indicates the object to becollected.


- This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Secondmonitoring function.NOTE

In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.


Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,Not Supported is displayed for thisparameter.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoringfunction based on Custom Period 1.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if Custom Period 1 is set toDisabled, Not Supported is displayedfor this parameter.


- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoringfunction based on Custom Period 2.

l In RMON History Control Group ofthe NE, if Custom Period 2 is set toDisabled, Not Supported is displayedfor this parameter.

Event ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Event - - This parameter indicates the performanceevent to be monitored.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on 30-Second.


- This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the 30-Minutemonitoring function.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on Custom Period 1Custom Period1 Monitor.


Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring functionbased on Custom Period 2Custom Period2 Monitor.

Threshold Detect Report AllDo Not DetectReport Only theUpper ThresholdReport Only theLower Threshold

Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies thethreshold detection method.

l If the number of detected events reachesthe preset threshold, the events arereported to the NMS. Otherwise, theevents are not reported to the NMS.

l If an event does not support thisparameter, Not Supported is displayed.



A-313


Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies theupper threshold. If the number ofperformance events exceeds the presetupper threshold, the correspondingperformance events are reported.

Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies thelower threshold. If the number ofperformance events is less than the presetlower threshold, the correspondingperformance events are reported.

Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of eachthreshold of the performance events.

A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 ServicesThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.

NOTE

For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and EthernetFeatures on the Packet Plane.

A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.

A.8.2 CES ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.

A.8.3 ATM ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.

A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.

A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS TunnelsThis topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.

A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static TunnelThis topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.

A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of UnidirectionalTunnelsThis topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.

A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional TunnelsThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.

A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.

A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

This topic describes FDI parameters.

A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP PingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.

A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP TracerouteThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.

A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW ManagementThis topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.

A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.

A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAMThis topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.

A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW PingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.

A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW TracerouteThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.

A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection ManagementThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.

A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.

A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.

A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PWAPS protection group.

A.8.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS TunnelsThis topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.



A-315



LSR ID - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies or displaysthe LSR ID of an NE.On a PSN, each NE isassigned a unique LSRID.

l This parameter mustbe set in IPv4 addressformat.

Start of Global LabelSpace

0-1015808 0 l Specifies the startvalue of a global labelspace. The OptiX RTN980 supports a step of2048.

l The start value of aglobal label space isthe smallest unicasttunnel label. WhenStart of Global LabelSpace is 0, the smallestunicast tunnel label is16, with values 0 to 15reserved.

l On an MPLS-enablednetwork, global labelspaces of NEs arerecommended tooverlap each other ifpossible.

Global Label Space Size - - Displays the size of aglobal label space.

Start of Multicast LabelSpace

- - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

A.8.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel

This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.


Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the FunctionTree.

2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

3. Click Query.


ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.

Name - - Specifies or displays thecustomized tunnel name.

Enable State EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Specifies or displayswhether a tunnel isenabled.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 980supports only the valueEnabled.

Node Type - - l Displays the node type.l For bidirectional

tunnels, this parameterdisplays the node typesof forward tunnels.

Direction - - Displays the direction of atunnel.

CIR(kbit/s) No Limit1024-1024000

- l Specifies or displaysthe committedinformation rate (CIR)of a tunnel.

l Generally, it isrecommended that youset this parameter to NoLimit. If you need toenable the CES CACfunction or limit thePW bandwidth, set thisparameter to be thesame as the plannedtunnel bandwidth.

PIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

CBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

PBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Bandwidth Remaining(kbit/s)




A-317


In Port - - Displays the ingress portof a forward tunnel, whichis also the egress port ofthe mapping reversetunnel.

Forward In Label - - Displays the MPLS labelthat a forward tunnelcarries when entering anode.

Reverse Out Label - - Specifies the MPLS labelthat a reverse tunnelcarries when entering atunnel.

Out Port - - Displays the egress port ofa forward tunnel, which isalso the ingress port of themapping reverse tunnel.

Forward Out Label - - Displays the MPLS labelthat a forward tunnelcarries when leaving anode.

Reverse In Label - - Displays the MPLS labelthat a reverse tunnelcarries when leaving anode.

Forward Next HopAddress

- - Displays the IP address ofthe next-hop port of aforward tunnel.

Reverse Next HopAddress

- - Displays the IP address ofthe next-hop port of areverse tunnel.

Source Node - - Displays the LSR ID of theingress node.

Sink Node - - Displays the LSR ID of theegress node.

Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


EXP 0-7None

- l Specifies or displaysthe value of the EXPfield in the packetstransmitted throughMPLS tunnels.

l For unidirectionaltunnels, this parameteris available only ifNode Type is Ingress.

l For bidirectionaltunnels, this parametercannot be set if NodeType is Transit.

l If this parameter is setto a value from 0 to 7,the EXP field takes itsfixed value.

l If this parameter takesits default value None,the EXP field variesbased on the DiffServmappings.

LSP Mode Pipe - l Displays or specifiesthe LSP mode.

l Pipe: When strippingMPLS tunnel labelsfrom packets, an egressnode does not updatethe scheduling priorityfor the packets.

l For bidirectionaltunnels, this parameteris available only ifNode Type is Egress.

l For bidirectionaltunnels, this parametercannot be set if NodeType is Transit.

NOTEOn the OptiX RTN 980, thisparameter can be set toPipe only.

MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.



A-319


Protection Group - - Displays the MPLS APSprotection group to whicha tunnel belongs.

VLAN ID - - l Specifies or displaysthe VLAN ID thatEthernet packets carrywhen transmitted overMPLS tunnels.

l If packets need totraverse a Layer 2network, set the VLANID for the tunnelcarried by the NNI portaccording to theVLAN planningrequirements on theLayer 2 network.

l Set this parameter tothe same value for bothends of a tunnel.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- l This parameterspecifies the PHBservice class of an L-LSP, if the type of anMPLS tunnel is L-LSP.

l CS6-CS7: indicates thehighest service grade,which is mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.




Deployment - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the tunnel.

A.8.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation ofUnidirectional Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.



2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.



A-321

3. Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.

4. Select New Reverse Tunnel.


Tunnel ID 1-65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.l The total number of

tunnels and PWs mustbe equal to or less than1024. The number oftunnels that carry PWsare not included in thetotal.

Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.

Node Type IngressEgressTransit

Ingress Specifies the node type ofa forward tunnel.

Direction - - Indicates the direction of atunnel.


No Limit l Specifies thecommitted informationrate (CIR) of a tunnel.


CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

In Board/LogicInterface Type

- - Specifies the board wherethe ingress port of aforward tunnel is located.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


In Port - - Specifies the ingress portof a forward tunnel, whichis also the egress port ofthe mapping reversetunnel.

In Labela 16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that a tunnelcarries when entering anode.

l This parameter can beset for only egress andtransit nodes.

Out Board/LogicInterface Type

- - Specifies the board wherethe egress port of aforward tunnel is located.

Out Port - - Specifies the egress port ofa forward tunnel, which isalso the ingress port of themapping reverse tunnel.

Out Labela 16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that a tunnelcarries when leaving anode.

l This parameter can beset for only ingress andtransit nodes.

Next Hop Address - - l Specifies the port IPaddress of the next-hopnode for a tunnel.


Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR IDof the ingress node.

l This parameter can beset for only egressnodes and transitnodes.

Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR IDof the egress node.




A-323


Tunnel Type E-LSPL-LSP

E-LSP l Specifies the tunneltype.

l The value E-LSPindicates that the EXPfield is used to identifypacket schedulingpriorities of PWs. AnE-LSP tunnel cancontain PWs of eightpacket schedulingpriorities.

l The value L-LSPindicates that theMPLS label value isused to identify packetscheduling priorities ofPWs. An L-LSP tunnelcan contain PWs of thesame packetscheduling priority.

EXP 0-7None

None l Specifies the value ofthe EXP field in thepackets transmittedthrough MPLStunnels.

l This parameter isavailable only if NodeType is Ingress.

l If this parameter is setto a value from 0 to 7,the EXP field takes itsfixed value.

l If this parameter takesits default value None,the EXP field variesbased on the DiffServmappings.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When strippingMPLS tunnel labelsfrom packets, an egressnode does not updatethe scheduling priorityfor the packets.

l This parameter isavailable only if NodeType is Egress.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 980supports only the valuePipe.

MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.


BE l This parameterspecifies the PHBservice class of an L-LSP, if the type of anMPLS tunnel is L-LSP.







A-325

NOTE

At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from eachother, but out labels can be the same as in labels.

A.8.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation ofBidirectional Tunnels

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.



2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.3. Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.


Tunnel ID 1 to 65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.l The total number of

tunnels and PWs mustbe equal to or less than1024. The number oftunnels that carry PWsis not included in thetotal.

Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.

Node Type IngressEgressTransit

Ingress Specifies the node type ofa forward tunnel.

Direction - - Indicates the direction of atunnel.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



No Limit l Specifies thecommitted informationrate (CIR) of a tunnel.


CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

In Board/LogicInterface Type

- - Specifies the board wherethe ingress port of aforward tunnel is located.

In Port - - Specifies the ingress portof a forward tunnel, whichis also the egress port ofthe mapping reversetunnel.

Forward In Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that data carrieswhen entering aforward tunnel.


Reverse Out Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that data carrieswhen leaving a reversetunnel.


Out Board/LogicInterface Type

- - Specifies the board wherethe egress port of aforward tunnel is located.



A-327


Out Port - - Specifies the egress port ofa forward tunnel, which isalso the ingress port of themapping reverse tunnel.

Forward Out Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that data carrieswhen leaving aforward tunnel.


Reverse In Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLSlabel that data carrieswhen entering areverse tunnel.


Forward Next HopAddress

- - l Indicates or specifiesthe IP address of thenext hop in a forwardtunnel.


Reverse Next HopAddress

- - l Indicates or specifiesthe IP address of thenext hop in a reversetunnel.


Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR IDof the ingress node.

l This parameter can beset for only egressnodes and transitnodes.

Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR IDof the egress node.

l This parameter can beset for only ingress andtransmit nodes.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Tunnel Type E-LSPL-LSP

E-LSP l Specifies the tunneltype.

l The value E-LSPindicates that the EXPfield is used to identifypacket schedulingpriorities of PWs. AnE-LSP tunnel cancontain PWs of eightpacket schedulingpriorities.

l The value L-LSPindicates that theMPLS label value isused to identify packetscheduling priorities ofPWs. An L-LSP tunnelcan contain PWs of thesame packetscheduling priority.

EXP 0 to 7None

None l Specifies the value ofthe EXP field in thepackets transmittedthrough MPLStunnels.

l This parameter cannotbe set if Node Type isTransit.

l If this parameter is setto a value from 0 to 7,the EXP field assumesthe fixed value.

l If this parameter takesthe default valueNone, the EXP field isset based on theDiffServ mappings.



A-329


LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When strippingMPLS tunnel labelsfrom packets, an egressnode does not updatethe scheduling priorityfor the packets.

l This parameter cannotbe set if Node Type isTransit.

NOTEThe OptiX RTN 980supports only the valuePipe.

MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.


BE l This parameterspecifies the PHBservice class of an L-LSP, if the type of anMPLS tunnel is L-LSP.








Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE

At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from eachother, but out labels can be the same as in labels.

A.8.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.



2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.


Tunnel ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.

Tunnel Name - - Displays the tunnel name.

Node Type - - l Displays the node type.l For bidirectional

tunnels, this parameterdisplays the node typesof forward tunnels.

Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of atunnel.



A-331


OAM Status EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies or displayswhether the local nodecan perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If OAM Status isEnabled, the local NEcan perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If OAM Status isDisabled, the local NEcannot perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If MPLS APSprotection needs to beconfigured or a CC testneeds to be performedfor the tunnel, OAMStatus needs to be setto Enabled.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displaysthe MPLS OAMdetection mode.

l Manual: During a CCtest, MPLS OAMpackets are sent at theinterval specified bythe user.

l Auto-Sensing: Duringa CC test, MPLS OAMpackets are sent at theinterval for receivingMPLS OAM packets.

l For a unidirectionaltunnel, this parametercan be set for its egressnode only.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, if DetectionMode is set toManual, you need toset the MPLS OAMdetection packets to bereceived andtransmitted.

l Generally, the valueAuto-Sensing isrecommended.



A-333





l For the egress node ofa unidirectional tunnel,if Detection Mode isset to Manual, thisparameter specifies thetype of MPLS OAMdetection packets to bereceived.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, if DetectionMode is set to Auto-Sensing, thisparameter specifies thetype of MPLS OAMdetection packets to betransmitted.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, if DetectionMode is set toManual, thisparameter specifies thetypes of MPLS OAMdetection packets to bereceived andtransmitted.

l The value FFD isassumed for MPLSAPS and the valueCV is assumed forcontinuousconnectivity check onMPLS tunnels.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



3.3102050100200500

50 l Displays or specifiesthe OAM detectionperiod.

l This parameter isavailable only whenDetection PacketType is FFD. It takesits fixed value of 1000ms when DetectionPacket Type is CV.

l Set this parameter to3.3 for MPLS APSusually. If the packettransmission delaytime of an MPLStunnel exceeds 3.3 ms,the transmissioninterval of FFDpackets needs to be avalue greater than thedelay time.

Reverse Tunnel - - l Specifies the mappingreverse tunnel of aforward tunnel.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, this parametercannot be set.

CV/FFD Status - - Displays whether CV/FFD is enabled.

LSP Status - - Displays whether an LSPis available.

LSP Defect Type - - Displays the LSP defecttype.

Disable LSP Duration(ms)

- - Displays the durationwhen an LSP isunavailable.

LSP Defect Location - - Displays the LSR ID of anode where LSP defectsare detected.



A-335


SD Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displaysthe SD threshold.When the OAM packetloss ratio is higher thanthe parameter value,the correspondingalarm is reported.


l When this parameter isset to 0, SD thresholddetection is notsupported.

SF Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displaysthe SF threshold.When the OAM packetloss ratio is higher thanthe parameter value,the correspondingalarm is reported.


l When this parameter isset to 0, SF thresholddetection is notsupported.

l The SD threshold is nothigher than the SFthreshold.

Source Node - - Displays the source nodeof a tunnel.

Sink Node - - Displays the sink node ofa tunnel.

A.8.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDIThis topic describes FDI parameters.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



2. Click the FDI tab.



Enable FDI SelectedNot selected

Selected l Specifies or displayswhether Enable FDI isselected.

l If the FDI function isenabled for a transitnode, the transit nodeinserts an FDI packetto all LSPs that travelthrough the transitnode when a faultoccurs on the linkbetween the ingressand transit nodes. Onreception of the FDIpacket, the egress nodereports an alarm. Inthis case, if MPLS APSis configuredcorrectly, protectionswitching is triggeredbefore the egress nodedetects an LSP defectwithin a detectionperiod.

l Generally, the defaultparameter value isrecommended.

A.8.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.



2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.



A-337

3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choosePing Test from the drop-down list.


Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number oftest request packets.

EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXPvalue of the MPLSlabel in test requestpackets. The value 7indicates the highestpriority.


TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-live (TTL) value of theMPLS label in testrequest packets.


Transmit Interval(10ms)

1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the intervalfor transmitting testrequest packets.


Packet Length 64 to 1400 64 l Specifies the length oftest request packets.


Wait-to-ResponseTimeout Time(10ms)

1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-to-response timeoutvalue.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Response Mode IPv4 UDP ResponseNo ResponseApplication ControlChannel

IPv4 UDP Response l Specifies the responsemode of test requestpackets.

l The value NoResponse indicatesthat the testperformance event isreported withoutsending responsepackets.

l The value ApplicationControl Channelindicates that responseis performed throughthe reverse channel.

l The value IPv4 UDPResponse indicatesthat the IPv4 UDPpackets encapsulatingMPLS echo replymessages are sent asresponse packets.

l The value IPv4 UDPResponse is reservedfor scenarios where allnodes on an LSPcommunicate witheach other over a DCNrunning IP protocols.

l Set this parameterbased on the situationof the egress node. Ifthe egress nodesupports reversechannel response, setthis parameter toApplication ControlChannel. If the egressnode does not supportreverse channelresponse but supportsDCN channel responseby means of IPprotocols, set thisparameter to IPv4UDP Response.



A-339


NOTEFor a unidirectionaltunnel, ResponseMode cannot be set toApplication ControlChannel.

A.8.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP TracerouteThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.



2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose

Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXPvalue of the MPLSlabel in test requestpackets. The value 7indicates the highestpriority.


TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-live (TTL) value of theMPLS label in testrequest packets.







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)







A-341


Response Mode IPv4 UDP ResponseNo ResponseApplication ControlChannel



l The value ApplicationControl Channelindicates that responseis performed throughthe reverse channel.

l The value IPv4 UDPResponse indicatesthat the IPv4 UDPpackets encapsulatingMPLS echo replymessages are sent asresponse packets.

l The value IPv4 UDPResponse is reservedfor scenarios where allnodes on an LSPcommunicate witheach other over a DCNrunning IP protocols.

l Set this parameterbased on the situationof the egress node. Ifthe egress nodesupports reversechannel response, setthis parameter toApplication ControlChannel. If the egressnode does not supportreverse channelresponse but supportsDCN channel responseby means of IPprotocols, set thisparameter to IPv4UDP Response.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


NOTEFor a unidirectionaltunnel, ResponseMode cannot be set toApplication ControlChannel.

A.8.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW ManagementThis topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.


Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the PW Management tab.


PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW that carries aservice.

Enable State - - Displays whether a PW is enabled.

PW SignalingType

- - Displays the PW signaling type.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 uses only static PWs.

PW Type - - l Displays the PW type. Different PW typesperform different service processingmodes.

l When a PW transmits E-Line services, setPW Type to Ethernet or EthernetTagged Mode.

l If a PW transmits CES services, set PWType to CESoPSN or SATop.

l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PWType to ATM n-to-one VCC Celltransport, ATM one-to-one VCC CellMode, ATM n-to-one VPC Celltransport, or ATM one-to-one VPC CellMode.

Direction - - Displays the direction of a PW.

PW IngressLabel/SourcePort

- - Displays the ingress label at the source port ofa PW.



A-343


PWEncapsulationType

- - Displays the encapsulation type of the packetson a PW.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLSencapsulation.

PW EgressLabel/SinkPort

- - Displays the egress label at the sink port of aPW.

Opposite LSRID

- - Displays the LSR ID of the node at the otherend of a PW.

LocalWorkingStatus

- - Displays the working status of the PW at thelocal end.

RemoteWorkingStatus

- - Displays the working status of the PW at theremote end.

CompositiveWorkingStatus

- - Displays the working status of the entire PW.

Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the tunnel that carries aPW.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS tunnels.

Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.

DeploymentStatus

- - Displays the deployment status of a PW.

TunnelAutomaticSelectionPolicy


QoS Parameters

Table A-8 CES services


PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PWthat carries the service.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Direction - - Displays the direction ofthe PW that carries theservice.

CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.


Table A-9 E-Line services




Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether thebandwidth is limited.

CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.

CBS(byte) - - Displays the committedburst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peakinformation rate (PIR) of aPW

PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burstsize (PBS) of a PW.


LSP Mode - - Displays the LSP mode.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports only Pipe.




A-345

Table A-10 ATM services




Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether thebandwidth is limited.

CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.

CBS(byte) - - Displays the committedburst size (CBS) of a PW.

PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peakinformation rate (PIR) of aPW

PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burstsize (PBS) of a PW.



Parameters for Advanced Attributes



PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.

RTP Head - - Displays whether the CESservice packets carry anRTP header.

Packet Loading Time(us)

- - Displays the packetloading time.

Jitter CompensationBuffering Time(us)

- - Displays the jitter buffertime for the received CESpackets.

Ingress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Egress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Control Channel Type - - Displays the controlchannel type.


- - Displays the VCCV mode.

Enable CES ServiceAlarm TransparentTransmission

- - Displays whether CESservice alarms aretransparently transmitted.

Threshold of Entering Rbit Inserting Status

- - Displays the threshold ofthe packet loss ratio ofCES services. Thecorresponding alarm willbe reported if the actualpacket loss ratio crossesthis threshold.

Threshold of Exiting Rbit Inserting Status

- - Displays the threshold ofreceived CES servicepackets. Thecorresponding alarm willbe cleared after the actualnumber of received CESservice packets crossesthis threshold.

Sequence Number Mode - - Displays the sequencenumber mode.




Control Word - - Displays whether thecontrol word is used totransfer packetinformation. For ETHPWE3 services, thisparameter is always notused.






A-347


Request VLAN - - When PW Type isEthernet Tag, thisparameter displays theVLAN ID to be added topackets that are sent fromthe opposite end and donot carry any VLAN IDs.

TPID - - When PW Type isEthernet Tag, thisparameter displays theTPID.




Control Word - - Displays whether thecontrol word is used totransfer packetinformation.




Max Concatenated CellCount

- - Displays the maximumnumber of concatenatedcells.



A.8.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.


Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the MS PW tab.

3. Click New.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


ID - - Specifies the ID of MS-PW.

Name - - Specifies the name of MS-PW.

MTU(bytes) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support thisparameter.

Service Type Ethernet ServiceCES ServiceATM Service

Ethernet Service l Specifies the type of services carried by theMS-PW.

l Set this parameter according to theplanning information.

ConnectionType

Port TransparentPVPPVC

Port Transparent l This parameter is available only whenService Type is ATM Service.

l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sinkare exchanged.

l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source andsink are exchanged.

l Port Transparent: ATM transparenttransmission refers to the transparenttransmission of ATM cells that areencapsulated into PWs as payloads.

Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWsParameter Value Range Default Value Description


PW Signaling Type Static Static Specifies the signalingtype of the PW. Labels forstatic PWs need to bemanually assigned.



A-349


PW Type - - l Specifies the type ofthe PW.

l Set this parameter toEthernet if ServiceType is ETH Serviceand no VLAN IDsneed to be added. If itis required to addVLAN IDs, set thisparameter to EthernetTag Mode and then setRequest VLAN in theAdvanced Attributetab.

l If Service Type isCES Service, thevalue CESoPSNindicates structure-aware emulation,which allows timeslotcompression; the valueSAToP indicatesstructure-agnosticemulation, which doesnot allow timeslotcompression.

l If Service Type isATM Service, set thisparameter according tothe value ofConnection Type.

PW Direction - - Displays the direction ofthe PW.

PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays theencapsulation type of thePW.





Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Specifies the method toselect tunnels.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports only the valueManually.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Specifies the type of thetunnel that carries the PW.

Tunnel - - A created tunnel needs tobe selected. If no tunnel isavailable, no PW can becreated.


Egress Tunnel - - For a bidirectional tunnel,the system will configurethe reverse tunnelautomatically.

QoS Parameters

CES Services



Ethernet services


Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether thebandwidth limit functionis enabled.l This function limits the





A-351



CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.


PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) of aPW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

ATM services



Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether thebandwidth limit isenabled.l This function can be

used to limit thebandwidth of one ormore PWs, or thebandwidth of one ormore ATM PWE3services, in an MPLStunnel. (One ATMPWE3 servicecorresponds to onePW.)

l An ATM PWE3service corresponds toa PW. Therefore, thisfunction can also limitthe bandwidth of ATMPWE3 services in anMPLS tunnel.


CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofthe PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burstsize of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) ofthe PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximumexcess burst size of thePW.



A-353



Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

CES ServicesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

RTP Header DisableEnable

Disable l Specifies the RTPheader.

l The RTP headercarries time stamps.



375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitterbuffer time for thereceived CES packets.

l A greater value of thisparameter meansfewer impacts oftransmission jitters onCES services, greaterdelays of CESservices, and moreresources occupied byCES services.


NOTESet Jitter CompensationBuffering Time(us) to avalue greater than the valueof Packet Loading Time(us) at the opposite end andthe local end.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length offragments in the TDMdata stream. Eachfragment isencapsulated into onePW packet.

l A greater value of thisparameter meanshigher encapsulationefficiency but greaterdelays of CESservices.


Ingress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Egress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Control Channel Type NoneCWAlert Label

CW l Specifies the mode ofPW connectivitycheck.

l The value Noneindicates that thecontrol word is notsupported. That is, thePW connectivitycheck is not supported.

l Alert Label indicatesVCCV packets in AlertLabel encapsulationmode.

l The value CWindicates that thecontrol word issupported.


NonePing





A-355


64K Timeslot Number 1 to 31 1 l Specifies the numberof 64 kbit/s timeslotsthat transmit servicetraffic. If FrameMode of the oppositeend is 30, the source 64kbit/s timeslots at thelocal end must includethe 16th timeslot.

l On the two ends of aradio link, the timeslotlists can be differentbut the numbers oftimeslots must be thesame.

l This parameter isunavailable if PWType is SAToP.

Sequence Number Mode Huawei ModeStandard Mode

Huawei Mode Specifies the sequencenumber mode.

Ethernet servicesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,the parameter value isalways No Use.

Control Channel Type NoneAlert Label

Alert Label l Specifies the mode ofPW connectivitycheck.

l None indicates thatVCCV is not used.

l Alert Label indicatesVCCV packets inAlert Labelencapsulation mode.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



PingNone



Request VLAN - - l Set this parameterwhen PW Type isEthernet TaggedMode.

l If the received packetsdo not carry anyVLAN IDs, the PWwill add VLAN IDs tothe packets as requiredby the setting of thisparameter.

TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support request VLANTPID of the PW level.

ATM servicesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Control Word Must UseNo Use

Must Use l Specifies whether touse the control word.In the MPLS packetswitching network, thecontrol word is used totransmit packetinformation.

l Set Control Word toMust Use if PWType is ATM 1:1.



A-357


Control Channel Type CWNoneAlert Label


l The value Noneindicates that thecontrol word is notsupported. That is, thePW connectivity checkis not supported.


l The value AlertLabel indicates VCCVpackets in AlertLabel encapsulationmode.


PingNone



Max. Concatenated CellCount

1 to 31 10 l Specifies themaximum number ofconcatenated cells.

l If the value 1 isassumed, only oneATM cell isencapsulated in onepacket. If the valuefrom 2 to 31 isassumed, a maximumof 2 to 31 ATM cellsare encapsulated intoone packet.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packetloading time. Once thepacket loading timeexpires, the packet issent out even if theconcatenated cells areless than themaximum.

l If Max. ConcatenatedCell Count assumesthe value 1, thisparameter isineffective. That is, thepacket will be sent outonce the cell is loaded.

A.8.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAMThis topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.


Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.



PW Type - - Displays the type of thePW that carries theservice.



A-359


OAM Status EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies or displayswhether the local nodecan perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If OAM Status isEnabled, the local NEcan perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If OAM Status isDisabled, the local NEcannot perform andrespond to OAMoperations.

l If PW APS protectionneeds to be configuredor a CC test needs to beperformed for thetunnel, OAM Statusneeds to be set toEnabled.

Associate AC State - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.


Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displaysthe detection mode forPW OAM packets.

l Manual: During a CCtest, PW OAM packetsare sent at the intervalspecified by the user.

l Auto-Sensing: Duringa CC test, PW OAMpackets are sent at theinterval for receivingPW OAM packets.

l If Detection Mode isset to Manual, youneed to set the type ofPW OAM detectionpackets to be receivedand transmitted.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)





l If Detection Mode isset to Auto-Sensing,this parameterspecifies the type ofPW OAM detectionpackets to betransmitted.

l If Detection Mode isset to Manual, thisparameter specifies thetype of PW OAMdetection packets to bereceived andtransmitted.



3.3102050100200500

50 l Displays or specifiesthe OAM detectionperiod.

l If Detection PacketType is FFD, thisparameter can be set; ifDetection PacketType is CV, the valueis always 1000.

l Set this parameter to3.3 for PW APSusually. If the packettransmission delaytime of a PW exceeds3.3 ms, thetransmission intervalof FFD packets needsto be a value greaterthan the delay time.



A-361


SD Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displaysthe SD threshold.When the OAM packetloss ratio is higher thanthe parameter value,the correspondingalarm is reported.

l When this parameter isset to 0, SD thresholddetection is notsupported.

SF Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displaysthe SF threshold.When the OAM packetloss ratio is higher thanthe parameter value,the correspondingalarm is reported.

l When this parameter isset to 0, SF thresholddetection is notsupported.

l The SD threshold is nothigher than the SFthreshold.

LSR ID to Be Received - - l Specifies or displaysthe LSR ID to bereceived.

l This parameter isavailable only if OAMStatus is Disabled.

PW ID to be Received - - l Specifies or displaysthe PW ID to bereceived.

l This parameter isavailable only if OAMStatus is Disabled.

Local Working Status - - Displays whether PWs atthe local end are available.

Local PW Defect Type - - Displays the local PWdefect type.

Local Disable PWDuration(ms)

- - Displays the durationwhen the local PW isunavailable.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Local PW DefectLocation

- - Displays the local PWdefect location.

Remote Working Status - - Displays whether PWs atthe remote end areavailable.

Remote PW Defect Type - - Displays the remote PWdefect type.

Remote Disable PWDuration(ms)

- - Displays the durationwhen the remote PW isunavailable.

Remote PW DefectLocation

- - Displays the remote PWdefect location.

A.8.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.


Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.3. Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.



Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number oftest request packets.

EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXPvalue of the PW labelin test request packets.The value 7 indicatesthe highest priority.


TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-live (TTL) value of thePW label in test requestpackets.




A-363


Transmit Interval(10ms)

1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the intervalfor transmitting testrequest packets.










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Response Mode IPv4 UDP ResponseNo ResponseApplication ControlChannel Response



l The value ApplicationControl ChannelResponse indicatesthat response isperformed through thereverse channel.

l The value IPv4 UDPindicates that the IPv4UDP packetsencapsulating MPLSecho reply messagesare sent as responsepackets.

l The value IPv4 UDP isreserved for scenarioswhere all nodes on anLSP communicatewith each other over aDCN running IPprotocols.

l Set this parameterbased on the situationof the remote PE. If theremote PE supportsreverse channelresponse, set thisparameter toApplication ControlChannel Response. Ifthe remote PE does notsupport reversechannel response butsupports DCN channelresponse by means ofIP protocols, set thisparameter to IPv4UDP Response.



A-365


Peer PW ID - - Specifies the PW ID of thepeer end.

Peer IP - - Specifies the IP address ofthe peer port.

A.8.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.


Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.

3. Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and chooseTraceroute Test from the drop-down list.



EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXPvalue of the PW labelin test request packets.The value 7 indicatesthe highest priority.


TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-live (TTL) value of thePW label in test requestpackets.










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Response Mode IPv4 UDP ResponseNo ResponseApplication ControlChannel Response



l The value ApplicationControl ChannelResponse indicatesthat response isperformed through thereverse channel.

l The value IPv4 UDPindicates that the IPv4UDP packetsencapsulating MPLSecho reply messagesare sent as responsepackets.

l The value IPv4 UDP isreserved for scenarioswhere all nodes on anLSP communicatewith each other over aDCN running IPprotocols.

l Set this parameterbased on the situationof the remote PE. If theremote PE supportsreverse channelresponse, set thisparameter toApplication ControlChannel Response. Ifthe remote PE does notsupport reversechannel response butsupports DCN channelresponse by means ofIP protocols, set thisparameter to IPv4UDP Response.



A-367

A.8.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection ManagementThis topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.


Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.


Protection Group ID - - l Displays the protectiongroup ID.

l The systemautomatically assignsIDs to the protectiongroups according totheir creationsequence.

Protection Type - - Displays the protectiongroup type.

Switching Mode Dual-EndedSingle-Ended

- l Displays or specifiesthe switching mode ofa protection group.

l The value Single-Ended indicates thatservices are switchedonly in the directionwhere faults occur.

l The value Dual-Ended indicates thatservices in bothpositive and reversedirections are switchedto their protectionchannels when faultsoccur.

l It is recommended thatyou set this parameterto Dual-Ended.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


BDI Status DisabledEnabled

- l Specifies or displayswhether the protectionswitching is triggeredupon receiving BDIpackets.

l This parameter isavailable only whenSwitching Mode is setto Single-Ended.

l If BDI Status is set toEnabled, the egressnode notifies theingress node of anydetected faults bysending BDI packets;upon receiving BDIpackets, the ingressnode triggersprotection switching.

Transmit and receiveStatus of Protocol Packet

- - Displays the protocolpacket status.


- l Specifies or displayswhether to switchservices to the originalworking tunnel afterthe fault is rectified.

l The value Revertiveindicates to performthe switching; thevalue Non-Revertiveindicates not toperform the switching.

l It is recommended thatyou set this parameterto Revertive.



A-369


WTR Time(min) 1-12 - l Specifies and displaysthe WTR time of theprotection group.

l When the preset WTRtime expires after theoriginal workingtunnel recovers,services are switchedto the original workingtunnel.

l This parameter isavailable only whenRevertive Mode isRevertive.

l It is recommended thatyou set this parameterto 5.

Hold-Time(100ms) 0-100 - l Specifies the hold-offtime of the protectiongroup.

l If this parameter is setto a value other than 0,the protection groupdoes not triggerswitching once itdetects faults, but waituntil the hold-off timeexpires, and thendetect whether anyfaults persist. If anyfaults persist, theswitching is triggered;otherwise, noswitching is triggered.

l It is recommended thatyou set this parameterto 0.

Protocol Status - - Displays the protocolstatus.

Switching Status - - Displays the switchingstatus of the protectiongroup.

Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the protectiongroup.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Unit - - Displays whether a tunnelis a working or protectiontunnel.

Active Tunnel - - Displays the currentlyused tunnel.

Tunnel Status - - Displays the tunnel status.

Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.

Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of atunnel.

Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the ingresstunnel.

Egress Tunnel - - Displays the egress tunnel.

A.8.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS

Protection Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.3. Click New.


Protection Type 1:1 1:1 Specifies the protectiontype of the tunnelprotection group.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports only the value 1:1.



A-371


Switching Mode Single-EndedDual-Ended

Dual-Ended l Specifies the switchingmode to be adoptedwhen a tunnel fails.

l The value Single-Ended indicates thatservices are switchedonly in the directionwhere faults occur.

l The value Dual-Ended indicates thatservices are switchedto the protectionchannel in bothdirections when faultsoccur.

l The value Dual-Ended isrecommended.

BDI Status EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies whether theprotection switching istriggered uponreceiving BDI packets.

l This parameter isavailable only whenSwitching Mode is setto Single-Ended.

l If BDI Status is set toEnabled, the egressnode notifies theingress node of anydetected faults bysending BDI packets;upon receiving BDIpackets, the ingressnode triggers theprotection switching.

Working Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of theworking tunnel.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports only the valueMPLS Tunnel.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Working Ingress TunnelID

- - l Specifies the workingtunnel of the protectiongroup in the ingressdirection.

l If this parameter is setfor a bidirectionaltunnel, a value isautomatically assignedto the parameterWorking EgressTunnel ID.

Working Ingress TunnelName

- - Displays the name of theworking tunnel in theingress direction.

Working Egress TunnelID

- - l Specifies the workingtunnel of the protectiongroup in the egressdirection.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, if the parameterWorking IngressTunnel ID is set, avalue is automaticallyassigned to theparameter WorkingEgress Tunnel ID.

Working Egress TunnelName

- - Displays the name of theworking tunnel in theegress direction.

Protection Tunnel Type - - Displays the type ofprotection tunnel, which isthe same as the type ofworking tunnel.

Protection IngressTunnel ID

- - l Specifies the workingtunnel of the protectiongroup in the ingressdirection.

l If this parameter is setfor a bidirectionaltunnel, a value isautomatically assignedto the parameterProtection EgressTunnel ID.



A-373


Protection IngressTunnel Name

- - Displays the name of theprotection tunnel in theingress direction.

Protection EgressTunnel ID

- - l Specifies theprotection tunnel of theprotection group in theegress direction.

l For a bidirectionaltunnel, if the parameterProtection IngressTunnel ID is set, avalue is automaticallyassigned to theparameter ProtectionEgress Tunnel ID.

Protection EgressTunnel Name

- - Displays the name of theprotection tunnel in theegress direction.


Non-Revertive l This parameterspecifies whether toswitch services back tothe original workingtunnel after it recovers.

l The value Revertiveindicates to switchservices back to theoriginal workingtunnel after it recovers;the value Non-Revertive indicatesnot to switch servicesback to the originalworking tunnel after itrecovers.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


WTR Time(min) 1 to 12 5 l Specifies the WTRtime of the protectiongroup.

l When the preset WTRtime expires after theoriginal workingtunnel recovers,services are switchedto the original workingtunnel.

l This parameter isavailable only whenRevertive Mode isRevertive.


Hold-Time(100ms) 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-offtime of the protectiongroup.



Protocol Status DisabledEnabled

Disabled l Specifies the protocolstatus.

l During the creation ofa protection group, setProtocol Status toDisabled. After theAPS protection groupis configured at bothends, set ProtocolStatus to Enabled.



A-375

A.8.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.

Navigation PathThe navigation path for CES services is as follows:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CESService Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Protection Group tab.3. Click the PW APS tab.4. Click New.

The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.


The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATMService Management from the Function Tree.













Issue 03 (2011-04-10)









QoS Parameters






A-377




- Specifies whether thebandwidth limit functionis enabled.l This function limits the




CIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofa PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.


PIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) of aPW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.








Issue 03 (2011-04-10)















A-379











Control Channel Type - - Displays the mode of PWconnectivity check.


- - Displays the VCCVverification mode. TheVCCV verification is usedfor PW connectivitycheck.











Issue 03 (2011-04-10)








TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support VLAN TPIDof the PW level.













A-381
















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)













A-383







OAM ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)










A-385









3.3102050100200500









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.8.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS ProtectionGroup_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PWAPS protection group.

Navigation Path

The navigation path for CES services is as follows:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CESService Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Protection Group tab.3. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.4. Click New.

The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > EthernetService Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.


The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:

1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATMService Management from the Function Tree.


Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs









A-387











QoS Parameters







Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

















A-389
















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)























A-391








TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support VLAN TPIDof the PW level.














Issue 03 (2011-04-10)






A.8.2 CES ParametersThis topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.

A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.

A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.

A.8.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CESService Management from the Function Tree.


Service ID - - Displays the ID of the CESservice to be created.

Service name - - Displays or specifies theservice name.



A-393


Level - - Displays the level of thereceived TDM frames.

Source Board - - Displays the source boardof the CES service.

Source High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.

Source Low Channel - - Displays the source lowerorder path.

Source 64K Timeslot - - Displays the source 64kbit/s timeslot.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Priority List CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

- l Specifies the priorityof a CES service. Thisparameter is availableonly when Mode is setto UNI-NNI.

l This parameter needsto be configured if QoSprocessing needs to beperformed for differentCES services.

l CS6-CS7: indicate thehighest service classes,which are mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.

l EF: indicates theexpedited forwardingof service, which isapplicable to servicesof low transmissiondelay and low packetloss rate, for example,voice and videoservices.

l AF1-AF4: indicate theassured forwardingclasses of service,which are applicable toservices that require anassured rate but nodelay or jitter limit.

l BE: is applicable toservices that need notbe processed in aspecial manner.


PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PWthat carries the CESservice. This parameter ismeaningful when the CESservice type is UNI-NNI.



A-395


Tunnel - - Displays the tunnel thatcarries the PW. The tunnelmust have beenconfigured in advance.This parameter ismeaningful when the CESservice type is UNI-NNI.

Sink Board - - Displays the sink board ofthe CES service. Thisparameter is meaningfulwhen the CES service typeis UNI-UNI.

Sink High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,this parameter cannot beconfigured.

Sink Low Channel - - Displays the sink lowerorder path. This parameteris meaningful when theCES service type is UNI-UNI.

Sink 64K Timeslot - - Displays the sink 64 kbit/stimeslot. This parameter ismeaningful when the CESservice type is UNI-UNI.

Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the CES service.


PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PWthat carries the CESservice.

Working Status - - Displays working status ofthe PW.

PW Status - - Displays the enablingstatus of the PW.

PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW signalingtype.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports static PWs only.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PW Type - - Displays the PW type forCES serviceencapsulation.CESoPSN: Indicatesstructure-aware TDMcircuit emulation serviceover packet switchednetwork. Timeslotcompression can be set.SAToP: Indicatesstructure-agnostic TDMover packet. Timeslotcompression cannot beset.

PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the tunnel typefor PW encapsulation.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports MPLS only.


- - Displays the Ingress labelof the PW that carries theCES service.


- - Displays the Egress labelof the PW that carries theCES service.

Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of thePW at the remote end.

Local Working Status - - Displays the workingstatus of the PW at thelocal end.

Remote Working Status - - Displays the workingstatus of the PW at theremote end.

Compositive WorkingStatus

- - Displays the compositiveworking status of the PW.The compositive workingstatus is up when bothends are up, and is downwhen one end is down.

Tunnel type - - Displays the type of thetunnel that carries the PW.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980supports MPLS tunnelsonly.



A-397


Tunnel - - Displays the ID of thetunnel that carries the CESservice.

Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the tunnel.

Tunnel AutomaticSelection Policy




Direction - - Displays the direction ofthe PW.

CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.


Parameters of Advanced AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description


RTP Header - - Displays the RTP header.The RTP header carriestime stamps.


375 to 16000 - l Displays or specifiesthe jitter buffer time.

l The jitter buffer timeguarantees the real-time performance ofthe CES service.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)










EnabledDisabled

- Displays or specifies theenabling status of thetransparent transmissionof CES service alarms. Ifthis function is enabled,the fault on the AC side ofthe CES service is notifiedto the remote end. Uponreceiving the faultnotification from thenetwork side or the remoteend, the local NE insertsthe corresponding alarm tothe AC side.

Threshold of Entering RBit Inserting Status

1-65535 - Displays or specifies thethreshold of packet lossratio of CES services. Thecorresponding alarm willbe reported once the actualpacket loss ratio crossesthis threshold. Thisparameter is availableonly when the transparenttransmission of CESservice alarms is enabled.



A-399


Threshold of Exiting RBit Inserting Status

1-65535 - Displays or specifies thethreshold of received CESservice packets. Thecorresponding alarm willbe cleared after the actualnumber of received CESservice packets crossesthis threshold. Thisparameter is availableonly when the transparenttransmission of CESservice alarms is enabled.


- Specifies the sequencenumber mode. TheSequence NumberMode must be set to thesame value at both ends ofa radio link.











Issue 03 (2011-04-10)













A-401

















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.





DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.


Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the slaveprotection pair.

A.8.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES

Service Management from the Function Tree.2. Click New.


Service ID(e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.

Service name - - Specifies the servicename.



A-403


Level E1 E1 The value E1 indicatesthat the CES service isused to transmit the TDMservices from E1 ports.

Mode UNI-NNIUNI-UNI

UNI-NNI l Specifies the mode ofCES service.

l The value UNI-NNIindicates that the CESservice is carried by aPW. Therefore, theinformation about thePW needs to beconfigured.

Source Board - - Specifies the board wherethe source (UNI) of theCES service is located.

Source High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Source Low Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

- - If Level is set to E1, thisparameter indicates the E1port where the servicesource is located. IfMode is set to UNI-NNI,this parameter can assumeonly one value.

Source 64K Timeslot(e.g.1,3-6)

1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/stimeslot that transmitsdata. This parametercan assume multiplevalues. If FrameMode of the oppositeend is 30, the source 64kbit/s timeslots at thelocal end must includethe 16th timeslot.

l On the two ends of aradio link, the timeslotlists can be differentbut the numbers oftimeslots must thesame.

l This parameter doesnot need to be set ifMode is UNI-NNI andPW Type is SAToP.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Priority List CS7CS6EFAF4AF3AF2AF1BE

EF l Specifies the priorityof a CES service. Thisparameter is availableonly when Mode is setto UNI-NNI.

l This parameter needsto be configured if QoSprocessing needs to beperformed for differentCES services.

l CS6-CS7: indicate thehighest service classes,which are mainlyinvolved in signalingtransmission.

l EF: indicates theexpedited forwardingof service, which isapplicable to servicesof low transmissiondelay and low packetloss rate, for example,voice and videoservices.

l AF1-AF4: indicate theassured forwardingclasses of service,which are applicable toservices that require anassured rate but nodelay or jitter limit.

l BE: is applicable toservices that need notbe processed in aspecial manner.




A-405


PW Type CESoPSNSAToP

CESoPSN l Specifies the type ofthe PW. Thisparameter is availableonly when Mode isUNI-NNI.

l CESoPSN: Indicatesstructure-aware TDMcircuit emulationservice over packetswitched network.Timeslot compressioncan be set. SAToP:Indicates structure-agnostic TDM overpacket. Timeslotcompression cannot beset.


No Protection l Specifies theprotection mode of thePW. This parameter isavailable only whenMode is UNI-NNI.

l If this parameter is setto PW APS, workingand protection PWsneed to be configured.

l When this parameter isset toSlave Protection Pair, you need to bind theslave PW APSprotection group withthe master PW APSprotection group. Theswitching of the masterPW APS protectiongroup triggers theswitching of the slavePW APS protectiongroup simultaneously.

Sink Board - - l Specifies the boardwhere the sink of theCES service is located.

l This parameter isavailable only whenMode is set to UNI-UNI.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Sink High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Sink Low Channel(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l If Level is set to E1,this parameterindicates the E1 portwhere the service sinkis located.


Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g.1,3-6)

1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/stimeslot that theservice sink occupies.On the two ends of aradio link, the timeslotlists can be differentbut the numbers oftimeslots must thesame.


Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWsNOTE

If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters ofworking and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PWas an example.








A-407

















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWsParameter Value Range Default Value Description

RTP Header DisableEnable Huawei RTP

Disable l Specifies the RTPheader.

l The RTP headercarries time stamps.


Jitter CompensationBuffering Time (us)

375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitterbuffer time for thereceived CES packets.The step is 125.

l A greater value of thisparameter meansfewer impacts oftransmission jitters onCES services, greaterdelays of CESservices, and moreresources occupied byCES services.




125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length offragments in the TDMdata stream. The step is125.

l A greater value of thisparameter meanshigher encapsulationefficiency but greaterdelays of CESservices.


Ingress Clock Mode NullAdaptive Clock Mode

Null The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.




A-409


Control Channel Type NoneCWAlert Label


l The value Noneindicates that thecontrol word is notsupported. That is, thePW connectivitycheck is not supported.

l Alert Label indicatesVCCV packets in AlertLabel encapsulationmode.



NonePing




DisabledEnabled

Disabled If this function is enabled,the fault on the AC side ofthe CES service is notifiedto the remote end. Onreceiving the faultnotification from thenetwork side or the remoteend, the local NE insertsthe corresponding alarmto the AC side.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Threshold of Entering RBit Inserting Status

1-65535 100 l The correspondingalarm will be reportedif the number ofconsecutive lostpackets crosses thethreshold specified bythis parameter.

l This function isavailable only whenthe transparenttransmission of CESservice alarms isenabled.

Threshold of Exiting RBit Inserting Status

1-65535 5 l The correspondingalarm will be cleared ifthe number ofconsecutive receivedpackets crosses thethreshold specified bythis parameter.

l This function isavailable only whenthe transparenttransmission of CESservice alarms isenabled.


Standard Mode Specifies the sequencenumber mode. TheSequence NumberMode must be set to thesame value at both ends ofa radio link.








A-411


















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)












OAM ParametersNOTE





A-413












Issue 03 (2011-04-10)









3.3102050100200500








A-415








A.8.3 ATM ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.

A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.

A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.

A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.

A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.

A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.

A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service classmapping table.

A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mappingtable.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.

A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.

A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.

A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.

A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End AttributesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.

A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.

A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATMOAM.

A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLIDThis topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.

A.8.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.


Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IMA Group Management tab.


VCTRUNK - - Displays the ATMTRUNK.



A-417


IMA Protocol EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l Specifies the IMAprotocol enable status.

l Set IMA ProtocolEnable Status toEnabled if the linksbound in the ATMTRUNK require theIMA protocol;otherwise, set thisparameter toDisabled.

l After IMA ProtocolEnable Status is set toEnabled, the E1 linksor Fractional E1timeslots bound in theATM TRUNK startrunning the IMAprotocol.

Minimum Number ofActive TransmittingLinks

1 to 16 1 l The links of the IMAgroup can carryservices only when thenumber of activatedlinks in the transmit/receive direction is notsmaller than the valueof Minimum Numberof ActiveTransmitting Links/Minimum Number ofActive ReceivingLinks.

l The values ofMinimum Number ofActive TransmittingLinks and MinimumNumber of ActiveReceiving Links mustbe the same becausethe OptiX RTN 980supports SymmetricalMode andSymmetricalOperation only. Theparameters MinimumNumber of ActiveTransmitting Linksand Minimum




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Minimum Number ofActive Receiving Links

1 to 16 1 Number of ActiveReceiving Links mustassume the same valueon the two ends of anIMA link.


IMA Protocol Version 1.01.1

1.1 l Specifies the IMAprotocol version.

l The parameter IMAProtocol Versionmust assume the samevalue on the two endsof an IMA link.




A-419


IMA Transmit FrameLength

3264128256

128 l Specifies the IMAtransmit frame length.

l Based on the IMAframe format, thereceive end rebuildsthe ATM cell streamwith the cells arrivingfrom diversely-delayed links. LongerIMA frames result inhigher transmissionefficiency and occupymore resources. Once amember link fails, theimpact on the entireIMA group increasesas the length of IMAframes increases.

l The IMA TransmitFrame Length mustassume the same valueon the two ends of anIMA link.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


IMA Symmetry Mode Symmetrical Mode andSymmetrical Operation

Symmetrical Mode andSymmetrical Operation

l Specifies thesymmetrical mode ofthe IMA group.

l If the symmetricalmode and symmetricaloperation is adopted,the bandwidth of theIMA group is alwaysconsistent in thetransmit direction andin the receivedirection, even whensome member linksfail. In symmetricalmode:– Bandwidth of the

IMA group = min{bandwidth in thetransmit direction,bandwidth in thereceive direction}

– The unidirectionalfailure of onemember link isequivalent to thebidirectionalfailure of onemember link.



A-421


Maximum DelayBetween Links (ms)

1 to 120 25 l Specifies themaximum differentialdelay that is allowedbetween the memberlinks.

l If the differential delaybetween a member linkand the other memberlinks exceeds thevalue, this link will bedeactivated anddeleted from the IMAgroup.

l If this parameter is setto a value higher thanthe normal valuerange, the delay ofIMA services will beprolonged and evenpacket loss will occur;if this parameter is setto a value lower thanthe normal valuerange, a working linkwill be deleted bymistake.

l The Maximum DelayBetween Links (ms)must assume the samevalue on the two endsof an IMA link.


Clock Mode CTC ModeITC Mode

CTC Mode l Specifies the clockmode of the IMAgroup.

l Clock Mode is set tothe same value for theinterconnected ends ofIMA links.

A.8.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path ConfigurationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Binding tab.

3. Click Configuration.



Available Boards - - Selects the availableboards.

Configurable Ports - - Selects the configurableATM trunks.

Level E1Fractional E1

E1 Specifies the level ofbound paths.l If ATM/IMA services

need to be mapped intothe ATM TRUNK thatbinds one or more E1ports, select E1 inLevel.

l If ATM/IMA servicesneed to be mapped intothe ATM TRUNK thatbinds one or moreserial ports, selectFractional E1 inLevel.

Direction - - Displays the direction ofbound paths. The fixedvalue is bidirectional.

Optical Interface - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Available Resources - - Displays the ports thatcarry the available pathsfor IMA services.NOTE

For Fractional ATM/IMAservices, set Port Mode inPDH Interface to Layer 1and configure Setting SerialPort Parameters.

Available Timeslots - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Selected Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.



A-423


VCTRUNK - - Displays the name of theATM TRUNK.

Level - - Displays the level ofbound paths.


Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.

Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number ofbound paths.

Display in Combination SelectedNot selected

Selected Specifies whether todisplay bound paths incombination.

A.8.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.


Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IMA Group States tab.


VCTRUNK - - Displays the VCTRUNK.

Near-End Group Status - - Displays the status of thenear-end group.

Far-End Group Status - - Displays the status of thefar-end group.

Transmit Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the celltransmission rate.

Receive Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell receivingrate.

Number of TransmitLinks

- - Displays the number oftransmit links.

Number of ReceiveLinks

- - Displays the number ofreceive links.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Number of ActivatedTransmit Links

- - Displays the number ofactivated transmit links.

Number of ActivatedReceive Links

- - Displays the number ofactivated receive links.

A.8.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.


Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the IMA Link States tab.




E1 Link - - Displays E1 links.

Differential Delay CheckStatus

- - Displays the status of thedeferential delay check.

Near-End ReceivingStatus

- - Displays the near-endreceiving status.

Near-End TransmittingStatus

- - Displays the near-endtransmitting status.

Far-End ReceivingStatus

- - Displays the far-endreceiving status.

Far-End TransmittingStatus

- - Displays the far-endtransmitting status.

A.8.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM InterfaceManagement

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.


Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.



A-425

2. Click the ATM Interface Management tab.


Port - - Displays the port.

Name - - Displays or specifies thename of port.

Port Type UNINNI

UNI Specifies the type of ATMport.l UNI: the port

connecting user-sidedevices. For example,the UNI port applies tothe user-side interfaceon the common ATMnetwork or to the user-side interface of the PEon the PSN networkthat transmits ATMPWE3 services.

l NNI: the portconnecting network-side devices. Forexample, the NNI portapplies to the network-side interface on thecommon ATMnetwork.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


ATM Cell PayloadScrambling

DisabledEnabled

Enabled Specifies whether toenable payloadscrambling of ATM cells.l The ITU-T G.804

stipulates that thepayload (48 bytes) ofATM cells must bescrambled before it ismapped into E1signals. Therefore, it isrecommended that youset ATM Cell PayloadScrambling toEnabled.

l ATM Cell PayloadScrambling mustassume the same valueon the two ends of anATM link. Otherwise,packet loss will occur.

Min. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Max. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Min. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

Max. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support this parameter.

VCC-Supported VPICount


Loopback No LoopbackOutloopInloop

No Loopback Specifies the loopbackstatus of the port.

A.8.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class MappingTable

This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service classmapping table.



A-427

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoSManagement > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration fromthe Function Tree.


Mapping Relation ID - - Specifies the ID of themapping table.

Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of themapping relationship.

UBR BEAF11AF12AF13AF21AF22AF23AF31AF32AF33AF41AF42AF43EFCS6CS7

UBR: BECBR: EFRT-VBR: AF31NRT-VBR: AF21UBR+: AF11PORT-TRANS: BE

Displays or specifies thePHB service classes thatcorrespond to differentATM service types.l Eight PHB service

classes are available:BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,AF4, EF, CS6, andCS7. The OptiX RTN980 provides differentQoS policies for thequeues of differentservice classes.

l CS6 to CS7: highestservice classes, mainlyapplicable to signalingtransmission.

l EF: fast forwarding,applicable to servicesof low transmissiondelays and low packetloss rates.

l AF1 to AF4: assuredforwarding, applicableto services that requirean assuredtransmission raterather than delay orjitter limits.

CBR

RT-VBR

NRT-VBR

UBR+




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PORT-TRANS NOTEThe AF1 class includesthree subclasses: AF11,AF12, and AF13. Onlyone of these subclassescan take effect for onequeue. It is the samecase with AF2, AF3, andAF4.

l BE: best effort,applicable to servicesthat do not requirespecial processing.

A.8.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class MappingTable_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mappingtable.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS

Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configurationfrom the Function Tree.

2. Click New.



A-429


Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - Specifies the ID of themapping table.

Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of themapping relationship.

UBR BEAF11AF12AF13AF21AF22AF23AF31AF32AF33AF41AF42AF43EFCS6CS7

UBR: BECBR: EFRT-VBR: AF31NRT-VBR: AF21UBR+: AF11PORT-TRANS: BE

Specifies the PHB serviceclasses that correspond todifferent ATM servicetypes.l Eight PHB service

classes are available:BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,AF4, EF, CS6, andCS7. The OptiX RTN980 provides differentQoS policies for thequeues of differentservice classes.

l CS6 to CS7: highestservice classes, mainlyapplicable to signalingtransmission.

l EF: fast forwarding,applicable to servicesof low transmissiondelays and low packetloss rates.

l AF1 to AF4: assuredforwarding, applicableto services that requirean assuredtransmission raterather than delay orjitter limits.NOTE

The AF1 class includesthree subclasses: AF11,AF12, and AF13. Onlyone of these subclassescan take effect for onequeue. It is the samecase with AF2, AF3, andAF4.

l BE: best effort,applicable to servicesthat do not requirespecial processing.

CBR

RT-VBR

NRT-VBR

UBR+

PORT-TRANS




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.8.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.


Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.2. Click the ATM Policy tab.


Policy ID - 1 Displays the policy ID ofthe ATM service.

Policy Name - - Displays or specifies thepolicy name of the ATMservice. The maximumlength of the value is 64bytes.



A-431

Parameters for Configuring ATM TrafficParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Service Type UBRCBRRT-VBRNRT-VBRUBR+

UBR Displays or specifies thetype of the ATM service.l The UBR service is

characterized by non-real-time applicationsand many bursts. TheUBR service does notspecify traffic-relatedservice guarantees. Tobe specific, the UBRservice only requiresthat the network sideprovides the servicewith the best effort.The network side doesnot provide anyassured QoS for theUBR service. In thecase of networkcongestion, the UBRcells are discardedfirst.

l The CBR servicerequires tightlyconstrained delayvariation and requiresthat data be transmittedat a constant rate. Inaddition, the CBRservice requests astatic amount ofbandwidth and thehighest priority. TheCBR service ischaracterized by stabletraffic and few bursts.

l The rt-VBR servicerequires tightlyconstrained delay anddelay variation.Compared with theCBR service, the rt-VBR service allowssources to transmitdata at a rate that varieswith time.Equivalently, thesources can be




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


described as bursty. Inaddition, the rt-VBRservice does notrequire a static amountof bandwidth.

l Compared with the rt-VBR service, the nrt-VBR service does notrequire tightlyconstrained delay ordelay variation, and isintended for non-real-time applications.

l The UBR+ service issupplementary to theUBR service and isintended forapplications thatrequire assuredminimum cell rate,which is indicated bythe minimum cell rate(MCR) parameter. Theother characteristics ofthe UBR+ service arethe same as thecorrespondingcharacteristics of theUBR service.

Traffic Type - - The Table A-27 lists theATM service type, traffictype descriptor, and therelated traffic parameters.ATM policies areconfigured based on thesemapping relationships.

Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -

Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -



Max. Cell Burst Size(cell)

2 to 200000 -

Cell Delay VariationTolerance (0.1us)

7 to 13300000 -

Discard Traffic Frame EnabledDisabled

Disabled Displays or specifies theframe discarding mark inATM policies. Thisparameter is effective toAAL5 traffic.



A-433


UPC/NPC EnabledDisabled

Disabled Displays or specifiesUPC/NPC.l UPC is user-side

parameter control andNPC is network-sideparameter control.

l After UPC/NPC isenabled, the cells witha frame discardingmark will be discardedin network congestion.

Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters

ATMServiceType

ATM Traffic TypeDescriptor

TrafficParameter 1

TrafficParameter 2

TrafficParameter 3

TrafficParameter 4

UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -

NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -

NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr - - -

NoClpNoScrCdvt Clp01Pcr CDVT - -

CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -

ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -

ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -



nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -

ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -

ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -

rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT

NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT

ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT

ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT

UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -

atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

ATMServiceType


TrafficParameter 1

TrafficParameter 2

TrafficParameter 3

TrafficParameter 4

atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -

Parameters for the application objectParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Service ID - - Displays the IDconfigured for the ATMservice.

Service Name - - Displays the nameconfigured for the ATMservice.

Link ID - - Displays the link ID.

Direction - - Displays the direction ofthe service.

A.8.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.


Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.2. Click New.


Policy ID - 1 Specifies the policy ID ofthe ATM service. Thepolicy ID can also beautomatically allocated.



A-435


Policy Name Synchronous signalSignalingVoiceDataVideo

Synchronous signal Specifies the policy nameof the ATM service. Themaximum length of thevalue is 64 bytes.NOTE

You can select one of thefive ATM service policynames from the drop-downlist or enter the policy name.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Service Type UBRCBRRT-VBRNRT-VBRUBR+

UBR Specifies the type of theATM service.l The UBR service is

characterized by non-real-time applicationsand many bursts. TheUBR service does notspecify traffic-relatedservice guarantees. Tobe specific, the UBRservice only requiresthat the network sideprovides the servicewith the best effort.The network side doesnot provide anyassured QoS for theUBR service. In thecase of networkcongestion, the UBRcells are discardedfirst.

l The CBR servicerequires tightlyconstrained delayvariation and requiresthat data be transmittedat a constant rate. Inaddition, the CBRservice requests astatic amount ofbandwidth and thehighest priority. TheCBR service ischaracterized by stabletraffic and few bursts.

l The rt-VBR servicerequires tightlyconstrained delay anddelay variation.Compared with theCBR service, the rt-VBR service allowssources to transmitdata at a rate that varieswith time.Equivalently, thesources can bedescribed as bursty. In



A-437


addition, the rt-VBRservice does notrequire a static amountof bandwidth.

l Compared with the rt-VBR service, the nrt-VBR service does notrequire tightlyconstrained delay ordelay variation, and isintended for non-real-time applications.

l The UBR+ service issupplementary to theUBR service and isintended forapplications thatrequire assuredminimum cell rate,which is indicated bythe minimum cell rate(MCR) parameter. Theother characteristics ofthe UBR+ service arethe same as thecorrespondingcharacteristics of theUBR service.

Traffic Type - - For the mappingrelationships betweenATM service types, ATMtraffic type descriptors,and traffic parameters, seeTable A-28. ATMpolicies are configuredbased on these mappingrelationships.





Max. Cell Burst Size(cell)

2 to 200000 -

Cell Delay VariationTolerance (0.1us)

7 to 13300000 -

Discard Traffic Frame EnabledDisabled

Disabled Specifies the framediscarding mark in ATMpolicies. This parameter iseffective to AAL5 traffic.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


UPC/NPC EnabledDisabled

Disabled l UPC is user-sideparameter control andNPC is network-sideparameter control.

l After UPC/NPC isenabled, the cells witha frame discardingmark will be discardedin network congestion.

Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters

ATMServiceType


TrafficParameter 1

TrafficParameter 2

TrafficParameter 3

TrafficParameter 4

UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -

NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -



CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -

ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -

ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -



nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -

ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -

ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -

rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT

NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT

ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT

ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT

UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -

atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -

atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -



A-439

A.8.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATMService Management from the Function Tree.


Service ID - - Displays the service ID.

Service Name - - Displays or specifies theservice name.

Service Type - - Displays the ATM servicetype.

Deployment Status - - Displays the deploymentstatus of the ATM service.

Connection ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Connection ID - - Displays the connectionID of the ATM service.

Connection Name - - Displays or specifies theconnection name of theATM service.

Source Port - - Displays the source port ofthe ATM service.

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PWthat carries ATM PWE3services, if any.

Sink Port - - Displays the sink board ofthe ATM service.

Source VPI - - Displays the VPI of thesource port of the ATMservice.

Source VCI - - Displays the VCI of thesource port of the ATMservice.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Sink VPI - - Displays the VPI of thesink port of the ATMservice.

Sink VCI - - Displays the VCI of thesink port of the ATMservice.

Uplink Policy - - Displays the QoS policy ofthe uplink ATMconnection.

Down link Policy - - Displays the QoS policy ofthe downlink ATMconnection.

Parameters for Port Attributes


Port - - Displays the port of theATM IMA service.

Port Type - - Displays the port type ofthe ATM IMA service.

Max. VPI - - Displays the maximumVPI.

Max. VCI - - Displays the maximumVCI.

VCC-Supported VPICount

- - Displays the count of VPIsthat are used for VCexchange.

Parameters for Bound Paths



Level - - Displays the level ofbound paths.


Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.



A-441


Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number ofbound paths.

IMA Group Status - - Displays the status of theIMA group.

Parameters of PWsTab Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

GeneralAttributes


Work Status - - Displays the workingstatus of a PW.

- - Displays whether a PWis enabled.

PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PWsignaling type.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 usesstatic PWs only.

PW Type - - l Displays theconfigured PW type.

l This parametercorresponds to theconnection type.The encapsulationtype can be 1:1 or N:1 if the connectiontype is PVP or PVC.

PW Direction - - Displays the directionof the PW.

PW EncapsulationType

- - Displays theencapsulation type ofthe packets on the PW.NOTE

The OptiX RTN 980 usesMPLS only.

- - Displays the configuredPW Ingress label.

PW OutgoingLabel / Sink Port

- - Displays the configuredPW Egress label.

Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID ofthe destination.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of thetunnel.

Ingress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel IDof the ingress tunnel.

Egress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel IDof the egress tunnel.

Local OperatingStatus

- - Displays the localrunning status of PW.

Remote OperatingStatus

- - Displays the remoterunning status of PW.

Overall OperatingStatus

- - Displays thecomprehensiveworking status of thePW.

Tunnel for AutoSelection

- - Displays the tunnel thatis automaticallyselected.

QoS PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.

Direction - - Displays the directionof the PW.

Bandwidth Limit - - Displays or specifieswhether the bandwidthlimit is enabled.l This function can be

used to limit thebandwidth of one ormore PWs, or thebandwidth of one ormore ATM PWE3services, in anMPLS tunnel. (OneATM PWE3 servicecorresponds to onePW.)

l An ATM PWE3service correspondsto a PW. Therefore,this function canalso limit thebandwidth of ATMPWE3 services in anMPLS tunnel.



A-443


CIR (Kbit/s) - - Displays or specifiesthe committedinformation rate.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifiesthe excess burst size ofthe PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - Displays or specifiesthe peak informationrate.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifiesthe maximum excessburst size of the PW.

EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980does not support thisparameter.

Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980does not support thisparameter.

AdvancedAttributes


- Displays or specifieswhether to use thecontrol word. In theMPLS packet switchingnetwork, the controlword is used to transmitpacket information.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Control ChannelType

CWNoneAlert Label

- l Displays orspecifies the modeof PW connectivitycheck.

l The value Noneindicates that thecontrol word is notsupported. That is,the PW connectivitycheck is notsupported.


l The value AlertLabel indicatesVCCV packets inAlert Labelencapsulationmode.


PingNone

- l Displays orspecifies the VCCVverification mode.The VCCVverification is usedfor PW connectivitycheck.

l If the VCCV-pingfunction is required,do not set VCCVVerification Modeof PWs to None.



A-445


Max. ConcatenatedCell Count

1 to 31 - l Displays orspecifies themaximum numberof concatenatedcells.

l If the value 1 isassumed, only oneATM cell isencapsulated in onepacket. If the valuefrom 2 to 31 isassumed, amaximum of 2 to 31ATM cells areencapsulated intoone packet.

Packet LoadingTime (us)

100 to 50000 - l Displays orspecifies the packetloading time. Oncethe packet loadingtime expires, thepacket is sent outeven if theconcatenated cellsare less than themaximum.

l If Max.Concatenated CellCount assumes thevalue 1, thisparameter isineffective. That is,the packet will besent out once the cellis loaded.

Parameters for CoS MappingParameter Value Range Default Value Description





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy formapping different ATMservice levels to CoSpriorities. By setting thisparameter, differentquality measures areprovided for differentATM services.















A-447
















Issue 03 (2011-04-10)







A.8.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM

Service Management from the Function Tree.2. Click New.


Service ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.

Service Name - - Specifies the servicename.



A-449


Service Type UNIs-NNIUNI-UNI

UNIs-NNI l Specifies the type ofthe ATM service.

l UNIs-NNI: This valueapplies to ATM PWE3services. The attributesin Connection, PW,and CoS Mappingneed to be configured.

l UNI-UNI: This valueapplies to commonATM services. Onlythe attributes inConnection need to beconfigured.

Connection Type PVCPVPTransparent

PVC Specifies the connectiontype of the ATM service.For common ATMservices (UNI-UNI):l PVP: Only the VPIs of

the source and sink areexchanged.

l PVC: The VPIs andVCIs of the source andsink are exchanged.

For ATM PWE3 services(UNIs-NNI):l PVP: This value

applies to the N-to-1/1-to-1 VPCencapsulation mode.

l PVC: This valueapplies to the N-to-1/1-to-1 VCCencapsulation mode.

For transparentlytransmitted ATMservices, set ConnectionType to Transparent.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



No Protection l Specifies theprotection mode of thePW. This parameter isavailable only whenService Type is UNIs-NNI.

l Set this parameteraccording to theplanning information.

Connection Parameters


Connection Name - - Specifies the name of theATM connection.

Source Board - - Specifies the source boardof the ATM service.

Source Port - - Specifies the source portof the ATM service.

Source VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255NNI: 0 to 4095

- Specifies the VPI of thesource port of the ATMservice.

Source VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of thesource port of the ATMservice.

PW ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the ID of the PWthat carries services.

Sink Board - - Specifies the sink board ofthe ATM service.

Sink Port - - Specifies the sink board ofthe ATM service.NOTE

This parameter does notneed to be set if ServiceType is UNIs-NNI. Thisparameter needs to be set ifService Type is UNI-UNIand the value must bedifferent from that of thesource board.

Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255NNI: 0 to 4095

- Specifies the VPI of thesink port of the ATMservice.



A-451


Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of thesink port of the ATMservice.

Uplink Policy - - Specifies the QoS policyof the uplink ATMconnection.

Down link Policy - - Specifies the QoS policyof the downlink ATMconnection.

Parameters of PWsNOTE

If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWsneed to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.



Working Status - - Displays the workingstatus of the PW.NOTE

This parameter is availableonly after the PWparameters are configured.

Enable Status - - Displays the enablingstatus of the PW.NOTE

This parameter is availableonly after the PWparameters are configured.

PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs needto be manually assigned.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


PW Type The ATM connection typeis PVC:l ATM n-to-one VCC

cell transportl ATM one-to-one VCC

Cell ModeThe ATM connection typeis PVP:l ATM n-to-one VPC

cell transportl ATM one-to-one VPC

Cell Mode

The ATM connection typeis PVC:ATM n-to-one VCC celltransportThe ATM connection typeis PVP:ATM n-to-one VPC celltransport

l Specifies the type ofthe PW.

l In the case of ATM1_to_1 encapsulation,one PW carries oneVPC or VCC.

l In the case of ATMn_to_1 encapsulation,one PW carries one ormore VPCs or VCCs.

PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction ofthe PW.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays theencapsulation type of thepackets on the PW.

PW Ingress Label /Source Port


PW Egress Label / SinkPort


Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Displays the method toselect tunnels.






A-453

QoS Parameters



Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether thebandwidth limit isenabled.l This function can be

used to limit thebandwidth of one ormore PWs, or thebandwidth of one ormore ATM PWE3services, in an MPLStunnel. (One ATMPWE3 servicecorresponds to onePW.)



CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committedinformation rate (CIR) ofthe PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as PIR.

CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burstsize of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peakinformation rate (PIR) ofthe PW.It is recommended thatyou set this parameter tothe same value as CIR.

PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximumexcess burst size of thePW.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



Parameters of Advanced AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Must Use l Specifies whether touse the control word.In the MPLS packetswitching network, thecontrol word is used totransmit packetinformation.

l Set Control Word toMust Use if PWType is ATM 1:1.

Control Channel Type CWNoneAlert Label


l The value Noneindicates that thecontrol word is notsupported. That is, thePW connectivity checkis not supported.


l The value AlertLabel indicates VCCVpackets in AlertLabel encapsulationmode.


PingNone





A-455


Max. Concatenated CellCount

1 to 31 10 l Specifies themaximum number ofconcatenated cells.

l If the value 1 isassumed, only oneATM cell isencapsulated in onepacket. If the valuefrom 2 to 31 isassumed, a maximumof 2 to 31 ATM cellsare encapsulated intoone packet.


100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packetloading time. Once thepacket loading timeexpires, the packet issent out even if theconcatenated cells areless than themaximum.

l If Max. ConcatenatedCell Count assumesthe value 1, thisparameter isineffective. That is, thepacket will be sent outonce the cell is loaded.









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

















A-457












OAM ParametersNOTE






Issue 03 (2011-04-10)











A-459









3.3102050100200500









Issue 03 (2011-04-10)








Parameters for CoS MappingParameter Value Range Default Value Description

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PWthat carries service.

CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy formapping different ATMservice levels to CoSpriorities. By setting thisparameter, differentquality measures areprovided for differentATM services.

A.8.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and EndAttributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.



A-461


OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Segment End Attributes tab.


Source - - Displays the source nodeof the ATM/IMA service.

Sink - - Displays the sink node ofthe ATM/IMA service.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Connection Direction SourceSink

- Displays the direction ofthe ATM connection.l Source: indicates the

forward direction.– For common ATM

services (UNI-UNI), Sourceindicates thedirection from thesource end to thesink end of theATM connection.

– For ATM PWE3services (UNI-NNI), Sourceindicates thedirection from theUNI port side to theMPLS interfaceside.

l Sink: indicates thebackward direction.– For common ATM

services (UNI-UNI), Sinkindicates thedirection from thesink end to thesource end of theATM connection.

– For ATM PWE3services (UNI-NNI), Sinkindicates thedirection from theMPLS interfaceside to the UNI portside.



A-463


Segment and EndAttribute

Non segment andEndpointSegment pointEndpointSegment and Endpoint

Non segment andEndpoint

Specifies the segment andend attributes of the sourceand sink of the ATMconnection.l Non segment and

endpoint: intermediatepoint, which refers tothe OAM nodebetween two segmentpoints or two endpoints. Therefore,intermediate pointscan be furtherclassified intointermediate pointsbetween segmentpoints, andintermediate pointsbetween end points.– Upon detecting a

fault, anintermediate pointreports thecorrespondingalarms and insertssegment AIS cellsand end AIS cells tothe downstream.Afterwards, theintermediate pointperiodically sendsthese cells.

– An intermediatepoint does not catchany AIS/RDI cells.

l Segment point: an endpoint of a segment.One ATM link consistsof multiple segments.– Upon detecting a

fault, a segmentpoint reports thecorrespondingalarms and insertsend AIS cells to thedownstream.Afterwards, thesegment point




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


periodically sendsthese cells.

– A segment pointcatches segmentAIS/RDI cellsonly.

l End point: an end pointof an ATM link. It isusually an edge pointon the ATM network.– Upon detecting a

fault, an end pointreports thecorrespondingalarms but does notinsert any AIScells.

– An end pointcatches end AIS/RDI cells only.

l Segment and endpoint:a segment-end point,or an edge point of asegment and an end.– Upon detecting a

fault, a segment-end point reportsthe correspondingalarms but does notinsert any AIScells.

– A segment-endpoint catches theAIS/RDI cells of asegment and anend.

A.8.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.


OAM Management from the Function Tree.

2. Click the CC Activation Status tab.



A-465





- Specifies the connectiondirection.l Source: indicates the










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- - Specifies the segment andend attributes of nodes.l Segment point: an end

point of a segment.One ATM link consistsof multiple segments.Segment CC cells areterminated at segmentpoints.

l End point: an end pointof an ATM link. It isusually an edge pointon an ATM network.End-to-end CC cellsare terminated at endpoints.



A-467


CC Activate Flag DeactivateSource activateSink activateSource + sink activate

- l Specifies the CCactivation flag.

l Deactivate: This nodedoes not transmit orreceive CC cells.

l Source activate: Thispoint transmits butdoes not receive CCcells.

l Sink activate: Thispoint receives but doesnot transmit CC cells.If this point does notreceive any servicecells or CC cells withina time interval of 3.5(±0.5) seconds, it willreport the LOC alarmand transmit AIS cellsin the forwarddirection.

l Source + sink activate:This node transmitsand receives CC cells.If this point does notreceive any servicecells or CC cells withina time interval of 3.5(±0.5) seconds, it willreport the LOC alarmand transmit AIS cellsin the forwarddirection.

l Once the node receivesany CC cells or servicecells, the LOC alarmwill be cleared.

A.8.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End LoopbackStatus

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATMOAM.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.






A-469



- Displays the direction ofthe ATM connection.l Source: indicates the










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



- - Specifies the segment andend attribute.l Segment LB cells are

looped back only at aSegment point,Segment andEndpoint, or Nonsegment andEndpoint.

l End-to-end LB cellsare looped back only atan Endpoint orSegment andEndpoint.

Loopback Point NE - - l Specifies the NEwhere the loopbackpoint is located.

l Before an end-to-endLB test, you need to setend points in the testdomain. After the test,remove the end points.

l Before a segment-to-segment LB test, youneed to set segmentpoints in the testdomain. After the test,remove the segmentpoints.

Test Result - - Displays whether theloopback command issuccessfully issued.

A.8.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLIDThis topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.


OAM Management from the Function Tree.2. Click the LLID tab.



A-471



Country Code(Hexadecimal Code)

- 00 00 Displays or specifies thecountry code of the ATMservice. The value is 2bytes in length.

Network Code(Hexadecimal Code)

- 00 01 Displays or specifies thenetwork code of the ATMservice. The value is 2bytes in length.

NE Code (HexadecimalCode)

- 00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 0000 00

l Displays or specifiesthe NE code of theATM service. Thevalue is 11 bytes inlength.

l The default NE codecan be used if it isunique on the network.

l NE code and NE ID areassociated. Therefore,each NE on thenetwork has a uniqueNE code.

A.9 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.

A.9.1 Physical Clock ParametersThis topic describes physical clock parameters.

A.9.2 CES ACR Clock ParametersThis topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.

A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary PortsThis topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485monitoring port.

A.9.1 Physical Clock ParametersThis topic describes physical clock parameters.

A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External ClockPort




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock SubnetThis topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.

A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock QualityThis topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.

A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.

A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.

A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.

A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source SwitchingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.

A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching ConditionsThis section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.

A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock SourceThis topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clocksource.

A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority TableThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >

Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.



A-473


Clock Source - - l External clock source1 indicates the externalclock source at theCLK/TOD1 port onthe CSHN board inphysical slot 15.External clock source2 indicates the externalclock source at theCLK/TOD1 port onthe CSHN board inphysical slot 20.

l The internal clocksource is always at thelowest priority andindicates that the NEworks in the free-runmode.

l The clock sources andthe correspondingclock source prioritylevels are determinedaccording to the clocksynchronizationschemes.

External Clock SourceMode

2Mbit/s2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameterindicates the type ofthe external clocksource signal.

l This parameter is setaccording to theexternal clock signal.In normal cases, theexternal clock signal isa 2 Mbit/s signal.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is validonly when ExternalClock Source Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameterindicates which bit ofthe TS0 in odd framesof the external clocksignal is used totransmit the SSM.

l This parameter needsto be set only when theSSM or extended SSMis enabled. In normalcases, the externalclock sources use theSA4 to transmit theSSM.

Clock Source PrioritySequence (Highest:1)

- - Displays the prioritysequence of clock sources.1 indicates the highestclock source priority.

A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of theExternal Clock Port

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.

Navigation Path1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >

Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.2. Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.



A-475

Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the externalclock port


Clock Source - Internal Clock Source l When the PLL clocksource of the externalclock port extracts thesystem clock (namely,the local clock of theNE), Clock Sourcetakes its default valueInternal ClockSource. In this case,no manualconfiguration isrequired.

l When the PLL clocksource of the externalclock port needs toextract the clock froman SDH line board,clock from a radio link,clock from a PDHtributary board, orsynchronous Ethernetclock, set ClockSource to thecorresponding clocksource according to thenetwork planninginformation.

Current Status - - Displays the valid statusof clock sources.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Lock Status - - l The PLL clock sourceof the external clockport extracts only anunlocked clock source.

l If a clock source is inlocked state, the PLLclock source of theexternal clock portdoes not extract theclock source until theclock source ischanged from thelocked state to theunlocked state.

l The internal clocksource should not be inlocked state.

Clock Source Priority(Highest: 1)

- - Displays the priority levelof a clock source. 1 is thehighest priority.

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock SubnetThis topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.


Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.

Parameters for Setting a Clock SubnetParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Affiliated Subnet - - The OptiX RTN 980 doesnot support thisparameter.



A-477


Protection Status Start Extended SSMProtocolStart Standard SSMProtocolStop SSM Protocol

Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is ascheme used forsynchronousmanagement on anSDH network andindicates that the SSMis passed by the lowerfour bits of the S1 byteand can be exchangedbetween the nodes.The SSM protocolensures that theequipmentautomatically selectsthe clock source of thehighest quality andhighest priority, thuspreventing mutualclock tracing.

l After the standardSSM protocol isstarted, the NE firstperforms theprotection switchingon the clock sourceaccording to the clockquality levelinformation providedby the S1 byte. If thequality level of theclock source is thesame, the NE thenperforms theprotection switchingaccording to the clockpriority table. That is,the NE selects anunlocked clock sourcethat is of the highestquality and highestpriority from all thecurrent available clocksources as the clocksource to besynchronized andtraced by the localstation.

l If the SSM protocol isstopped, it indicates




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


that the S1 byte is notused. The NE selectsand switches a clocksource only accordingto the sequencespecified in thepriority table. Theclock source of thehighest priority is usedas the clock source tobe traced.

l After the SSMprotocol is stopped,each NE performs theprotection switchingon the clock accordingto the preset prioritytable of the clocksource only when theclock source of ahigher priority is lost.

Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source that isconfigured for an NE. InClock Source Priority,you can set whether to addor delete a clock source.



A-479


Clock Source ID (None)1 to 15

(None) l This parameter is validonly when theextended SSMprotocol is started.

l Clock source IDs areallocated for thefollowing clocksources only:– External clock

source– Internal clock

source of the nodethat accesses theexternal clocksources

– Internal clocksource of the jointnode of a ring and achain or the jointnode of two rings

– Line clock sourcethat enters the ringwhen the intra-ringline clock source isconfigured at thejoint node of a ringand a chain or thejoint node of tworings

A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock QualityThis topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.


Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the Received Quality tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for Clock Source QualityParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe name of theconfigured clock source.In Clock SourcePriority, you can setwhether to add or delete aclock source.

Configured Quality UnknownSynchronization QualityG.811 Clock SignalG.812 Transit ClockSignalG.812 Local Clock SignalG.813 SDH EquipmentTiming Source (SETS)SignalDo Not Use ForSynchronizationAutomatic Extraction

Automatic Extraction This parameter specifiesthe quality level that isconfigured for the clocksource. This function isrequired only in a specialscenario or in a test.Generally, this parameterneed not be set.

Received Quality - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source qualitysignal received by the NE.The NE extracts the clocksource quality signal fromthe S1 byte of each clocksource.

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality LevelParameter Value Range Default Value Description




A-481


Quality Level 0 Do Not Use ForSynchronizationG.811 Reference ClockBetween G.811 ReferenceClock and G.812 TransitClockG.812 Transit ClockBetween G.812 TransitClock and G.812 LocalClockG.812 Local ClockBetween G.812 LocalClock and synchronousequipment timing source(SETS)SETS ClockBetween synchronousequipment timing source(SETS) and qualityunavailable

Do Not Use ForSynchronization

This parameter specifiesthe clock quality whoselevel is manually set tozero.l Do Not Use For

Synchronization: thenotificationinformation in thereverse direction of theselectedsynchronization clocksource to avoid directmutual locking ofadjacent NEs.

l G.811 ReferenceClock: the clock signalspecified in ITU-T G.811.

l Between G.811Reference Clock andG.812 Transit Clock:lower than the qualitylevel of the clocksignal specified inITU-T G.811 buthigher than the qualitylevel of the transitexchange clock signalspecified in ITU-T G.812.

l G.812 Transit Clock:the transit exchangeclock signal specifiedin ITU-T G.812.

l Between G.812Transit Clock and G.812 Local Clock:lower than the qualitylevel of the transitexchange clock signalspecified in ITU-T G.812 but higher than thequality level of thelocal exchange clocksignal specified inITU-T G.812.

l G.812 Local Clock:the local exchange




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


clock signal specifiedin ITU-T G.812.

l Between G.812 LocalClock andsynchronousequipment timingsource (SETS): lowerthan the quality levelof the local exchangeclock signal specifiedin ITU-T G.812 buthigher than the qualitylevel of the clocksignal of the SETS.

l SETS Clock: the clocksignal of the SETS.

l Between synchronousequipment timingsource (SETS) andquality unavailable:lower than the qualitylevel of the clocksignal of the SETS buthigher than the qualitylevel unavailable in thesynchronous timingsource.

A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.


Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the SSM Output tab.



A-483


Line Port - - l This parameterindicates the name ofthe line clock port.

l Line Port: indicatesthe SSM qualityinformation outputport of the currentavailable line clocksource and the externalclock source. Thisoutput port cantransmit the qualityinformation of theclock source byoutputting the S1 byteto the downstream NE.

Output S1 Byte Info EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Output S1 Byte Infois valid only when theSSM protocol or theextended SSMprotocol is started.

l Output S1 Byte Infoindicates whether theSSM is output at theline port.

l When the line port isconnected to an NE inthe same clock subnet,set Output S1 ByteInfo to Enabled.Otherwise, set thisparameter toDisabled.

A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.


Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.2. Click the Clock ID Output tab.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Line Port - - l This parameterindicates the name ofthe line clock port.

l Line Port: indicatesthe SSM qualityinformation outputport of the currentavailable line clocksource and the externalclock source. Thisoutput port cantransmit the qualityinformation of theclock source byoutputting the S1 byteto the downstream NE.

Output Clock ID EnabledDisabled

Enabled l Output Clock ID isvalid only when theextended SSMprotocol is started.

l Output Clock IDindicates whether theclock source ID isoutput at the line port.

l If the line ports areconnected to the NEsin the same clocksubnet and if theextended SSMprotocol is started onthe opposite NE,Output Clock ID isset to Enabled.Otherwise, thisparameter is set toDisabled.

A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source RestorationParameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.



A-485


Clock Source Switching.2. Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.



Higher Priority ClockSource Reversion

Auto-RevertiveNon-Revertive

Auto-Revertive l When the quality of ahigher-priority clocksource degrades, theNE automaticallyswitches the clocksource to a lower-priority clock source.If this parameter is setto Auto-Revertive,the NE automaticallyswitches the clocksource to the higher-priority clock sourcewhen this higher-priority clock sourcerestores. If thisparameter is set toNon-Revertive, theNE does notautomatically switchthe clock source to thehigher-priority clocksource when thishigher-priority clocksource restores.

l Correct setting ofClock SourceSwitching Conditionensures the reliabilityof the clock sourceswitching. To improvethe clock quality,select Auto-Revertive. Otherwise,to prevent jitter of theclock, generally, it isrecommended that youset this parameter toNon-Revertive.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Clock Source WTRTime(min.)

0 to 12 5 l This parameterspecifies the durationfrom the time when theclock sourcerestoration is detectedto the time when theclock source switchingis triggered. Thisparameter is used toavoid frequentswitching of the clocksource due toinstability of the clocksource state within ashort time.

l This parameter is validonly when HigherPriority ClockSource Reversion isset to Auto-Revertive.

A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source SwitchingThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.


Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.


Clock Source - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the clocksource.

Current Status ValidInvalid

- This parameter indicateswhether the clock sourceis valid.



A-487


Lock Status LockUnlock

- l This parameterspecifies the lockingstatus of the clocksource in the prioritytable.

l Lock: A clock sourcein the priority table isin the locked state. Theclock source in thelocked state cannot beswitched.

l Unlock: A clocksource in the prioritytable is in the unlockedstate. The clock sourcein the unlocked statecan be switched.

Switching Source - - This parameter indicatesthe clock source to betraced by the NE after theswitching.

Switching Status NormalManual SwitchingForced Switching

- This parameter indicatesthe switching status of thecurrent clock source.

A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source SwitchingConditions

This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.


Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.2. Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.


NE Name - - Displays the name of theNE.

Clock Source - - Displays the clock source.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


AIS Alarm YesNo

No l The default value isrecommended.

l When this parameter isset to Yes, it indicatesthat clock sourceswitching occurs if theclock source reportsthe AIS alarm.

l When this parameter isset to No, it indicatesthat no clock sourceswitching occurs if theclock source reportsthe AIS alarm.

B1 BER Threshold-Crossing

- - The parameter is invalid.

RLOS,RLOF and OOF/RLOC Alarms

Yes Yes This parameter indicatesthat clock switchingoccurs when the clocksource reports the RLOS,RLOF, OOF, or LOCalarm.

CV Threshold-Crossing - - The parameter is invalid.

CV Threshold - - The parameter is invalid.

B2-EXC Alarm YesNo

No l The default value isrecommended.

l When this parameter isset to Yes, it indicatesthat clock sourceswitching occurs if theclock source reportsthe B2-EXC alarm.

l When this parameter isset to No, it indicatesthat no clock sourceswitching occurs if theclock source reportsthe B2-EXC alarm.

A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External ClockSource

This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clocksource.



A-489

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.


2M Phase-LockedSource Number

External Clock Source 1External Clock Source 2

- This parameter indicatesthe number of the externalclock source output of theNE.

External Clock OutputMode

2Mbit/s2MHz

2Mbit/s l This parameterspecifies the mode ofthe output clock.

l This parameter needsto be set according tothe requirements of theinterconnectedequipment. Generally,the output externalclock signal is a 2Mbit/s signal.

External Clock OutputTimeslot

SA4 to SA8ALL

ALL l This parameter is validonly when ExternalClock Output Modeis set to 2Mbit/s.

l This parameterindicates which bit ofthe TS0 in odd framesof the output clocksignal is used totransmit the SSM.

l If this parameter is setto ALL, it indicatesthat all the bits of theTS0 are used totransmit the SSM.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


External Source OutputThreshold

Threshold DisabledNot Inferior to G.813SETS SignalNot Inferior to G.812Local SignalNot Inferior to G.812Transit Clock SignalNot Inferior to G.811Clock Signal

Threshold Disabled l This parameterspecifies the lowestquality of the outputclock. If the clockquality is lower thanthe value of thisparameter, it indicatesthat the external clocksource does not outputany clock signal.

l If this parameter is setto ThresholdDisabled, it indicatesthat the external clocksource always outputsthe clock signal.


2M Phase-LockedSource FailureCondition

No Failure ConditionAISLOFAIS OR LOF

No Failure Condition l This parameterspecifies the failurecondition of the 2Mbit/s phase-lockedclock source.


2M Phase-LockedSource Failure Action

Shut Down Output2M Output S1 ByteUnavailableSend AIS

Shut Down Output l This parameter is validonly when 2M Phase-Locked SourceFailure Condition isnot set to No FailureCondition.

l This parameterspecifies the operationof the 2 Mbit/s phase-locked loop (PLL)when the 2 Mbit/sphase-locked clocksource meets thefailure conditions.




A-491

A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.



NE Clock Mode - - This parameter indicatesthe working mode of theNE clock.

S1 Byte SynchronizationQuality Info

- - This parameter indicatesthe synchronizationquality information of theS1 byte.

S1 Byte ClockSynchronous Source

- - This parameter indicatesthe clock synchronizationsource of the S1 byte.

Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicatesthe synchronizationsource.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Data Output Method inHoldover Mode

Normal Data OutputKeep the Latest Data

Normal Data Output l When all the referencetiming signals are lost,the slave clockchanges to theholdover mode. At thistime, the slave clockworks based on thelatest frequencyinformation storedbefore the referencetiming signals are lost.Then, the frequency ofthe oscillator driftsslowly to ensure thatthe offset between thefrequency of the slaveclock and the referencefrequency is verysmall. As a result, theimpact caused by thedrift is limited withinthe specifiedrequirement.

l Normal Data Output:The slave clock worksbased on the latestfrequency informationstored before thereference timingsignals are lost, and theholdover durationdepends on the size ofthe phase-locked clockregister on theequipment. Theholdover duration canbe up to 24 hours.

l Keep the Latest Data:The slave clock worksin holdover mode allthe time based on thelatest frequencyinformation storedbefore the referencetiming signals are lost.

A.9.2 CES ACR Clock ParametersThis topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.



A-493

A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock SourceThis topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.

A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock DomainThis topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.

A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_CreationThis topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.

A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source

This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.

Navigation Path

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.



ACR Clock Source - - Identifies the ACR clockdomain.

CES Service - - This parameter displays orspecifies the CES servicethat the master ACR clocksource uses.

Current CES Service - - This parameter displaysthe CES service fromwhich the current ACRclock source is obtained.

A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain

This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.

Navigation Path

In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.



Clock Domain - - Displays the clockdomain.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board wherethe clock domain islocated.

Clock Port - - Displays the Smart E1ports that are bound to aclock domain.

A.9.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.


Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

2. Click New.



Clock Domain System Clock DomainCES ACR1 ClockDomainCES ACR2 ClockDomainCES ACR3 ClockDomainCES ACR4 ClockDomain

System Clock Domain Specifies the clockdomain to be bound.

Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board wherethe clock domain islocated.

Board - - Specifies the board wherethe Smart E1 port islocated.

Available Port - - Displays the Smart E1ports that are not bound toa clock domain.

Selected Port - - Displays the Smart E1ports that are bound to aclock domain.



A-495

A.9.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary PortsThis topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485monitoring port.

Navigation PathIn the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > AuxiliaryInterface from the Function Tree.


Port - - Displays the port thatfunctions as the auxiliaryport.

Interface Mode 1st external clock2nd external clock1st external time2nd external timeMONOrderwireS1/F1Commissioning serial port

1st external clock Specifies the workingmode of the auxiliary port.l If the running status of

the outdoor cabinetneeds to be monitored,set Interface Mode toMON.

l For an external timeinput/output port, setInterface Mode to 1stexternal time or 2ndexternal time.

A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary InterfacesThis topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_GeneralThis topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.

Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >

Orderwire from the Function Tree.2. Click the General tab.


Call Waiting Time(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waitingtime after the local station dials thenumber. If the calling station does notreceive the response message from thecalled station within the call waitingtime, it automatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in theorderwire subnet, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to five seconds. Ifmore than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to nine seconds.

l The call waiting time should be set to thesame for all the NEs.

Dialling Mode PulseDual-ToneFrequency

Dual-ToneFrequency

This parameter indicates the dialling modeof the orderwire phone.



A-497


Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephonenumber of the network-wide orderwireconference call.

l When an OptiX RTN 980 dials thetelephone number 888, the orderwirephones of all the NEs on the orderwiresubnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 980receives the call, the orderwire phoneson the other NEs do not ring. In this case,the orderwire point-to-multipoint groupcall changes to a point-to-point callbetween two NEs.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call should be the same forall the nodes on the same subnet.

l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call must have the samelength as the telephone number of theorderwire phone (phone 1) at the localsite.

Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwirephone number of the local station. Anaddressing call refers to a point-to-pointcall.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that you set the phonenumber to a three-digit number.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs in a sequential orderaccording to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.

AvailableOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the available portfor the orderwire phone.

SelectedOrderwire Port

- - This parameter indicates the selected portfor the orderwire phone.

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Orderwire from the Function Tree.

2. Click the Advanced tab.

Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones


OrderwireOccupied Bytes

E1E2

E1 l This parameter specifies the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwiresignals.

l Regardless the parameter value, theradio link always uses a customizedoverhead byte to transmit the orderwiresignals. Hence, this parameter should beset according to the occupied SDHoverhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.



2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.

Parameters


Available DataPath

- - l This parameter indicates the available F1data channel.

l Two data channels should be selected forthe configuration.

Number - - This parameter indicates the number of theF1 data port.

Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line portis selected, this parameter corresponds tothe F1 byte in the SDH frame at the lineport.

l If an IF port is selected, this parametercorresponds to the customized F1 byte inthe microwave frame at the IF port.



A-499


Data Channel 2 l If F1 is selected, this parametercorresponds to the F1/S1 interface on theAUX board. The F1/S1 interfacecomplies with ITU-T G.703 andoperates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.

A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data PortThis topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.



2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports


Overhead Byte SERIAL1 toSERIAL4

SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electricalline, the preset overhead byte is used totransmit the asynchronous data services.

l In the case of a radio link, a customizedserial overhead byte in the microwaveframe is used to transmit theasynchronous data services.

Broadcast DataSource

- No Data l When this parameter is set to theSERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on thecorresponding AUX board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDHoptical/electrical line port, the value ofOverhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,the customized Serial byte in themicrowave frame of this port is used.

AvailableBroadcast DataSink

- - This parameter indicates the availablebroadcast data sink.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Selected BroadcastData Sink

- - l When this parameter is set to theSERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on thecorresponding AUX board is used.

l When this parameter is set to the SDHoptical/electrical line port, the value ofOverhead Byte of this port is used.

l When this parameter is set to the IF port,the customized Serial byte in themicrowave frame of this port is used.

A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

Navigation PathSelect the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the FunctionTree.

Parameters for the General AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operationobject.

Relay ControlMode

Auto ControlManual Control

Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, thealarming relay is started upautomatically. Otherwise, the alarmingrelay is shut down.

l Manual Control: Relay Status in MajorAlarm(K0) and Relay Status inCritical Alarm(K1) need to be set.

Relay Status inMajor Alarm(K0)

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the statusof the relay is set manually for majoralarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON"status for major alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"status for major alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when RelayControl Mode is set to ManualControl.



A-501


Relay Status inCritical Alarm(K1)

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l This parameter indicates that the statusof the relay is set manually for criticalalarms.

l Enable: The relay is set to the enabledstatus for critical alarms.

l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabledstatus for critical alarms.

l This parameter is valid only when RelayControl Mode is set to ManualControl.

Parameters for the Input RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the channel.

Using Status UnusedUsed

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarminterface of the input relay is used.

Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/High LevelRelay Turns On/Low Level

Relay Turns Off/High Level

l If this parameter is set to Relay TurnsOff/High Level, an alarm is generatedwhen the relay is turned off.

l If this parameter is set to Relay TurnsOn/Low Level, an alarm is generatedwhen the relay is turned on.

l This parameter is valid only when UsingStatus is set to Used.

Alarm Severity Critical AlarmMajor AlarmMinor AlarmWarning Alarm

Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of thealarm that is generated at the input relay.

Parameters for the Output RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thename of the output channel.

Use or Not UnusedUsed

Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarminterface of the output relay is used.

Parameters for the Temperature AttributesParameter Value Range Default Value Description


Monitor Status - - This parameter indicates whether thetemperature attribute is monitored.

TemperatureUpper Threshold(DEG.C)

- - This parameter indicates the uppertemperature threshold of the board. Whenthe actual temperature is higher than thepreset value, an alarm is generated.

TemperatureLower Threshold(DEG.C)

- - This parameter indicates the lowertemperature threshold of the board. Whenthe actual temperature is lower than thepreset value, an alarm is generated.

Parameters for the Alarm RelayParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Alarm Severity Critical AlarmMajor AlarmMinor AlarmWarning Alarm

- This parameter indicates the severity of thealarm.

Alarm OutputChannel

CSK-1CSK-2CSK-3CSK-4

CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of theoutput alarm relay.



A-503

B Board Loopback Types

Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support

Board Loopback Type Remarks

SL1D/SL4D l Inloops at optical portsl Outloops at optical portsl Inloops on VC-4 pathsl Outloops on VC-4 paths

The SL4D board described inthis section refers to the logicalSL4D board to which thephysical CSHN board is mapped.

SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributaryports

l Outloops at E1 tributaryports

-

EM6T/EM6FEG2D

l Inloops at the MAC layer ofEthernet ports

l Inloops at the PHY layer ofEthernet ports

The EG2D is the logical Ethernetboard to which the physicalCSHN board is mapped.

IF1 l Inloops at IF portsl Outloops at IF portsl Inloops at composite portsl Outloops at composite

ports

-

IFU2/IFX2 l Inloops and outloops at IFports

l Inloops and outloops atmultiplexing ports

l Inloops at the MAC layer ofIF_ETH ports

-

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types


B-1

Board Loopback Type Remarks

ISU2/ISX2 l Inloops and outloops at IFports

l Inloops and outloops atmultiplexing ports

-

B Board Loopback TypesOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

C Indicators of Boards

Indicators of Boards

Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN





board.


Software is being loaded to the boardduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.


The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting processof the board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered onor being reset, the upper layersoftware is being initialized.

l When the board is running, thesoftware is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at100 ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description C Indicators of Boards


C-1


On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during thepower-on or resetting process of theboard.The logic file or upper layer software islost during the running process of theboard.The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.

On (red) The clock source is lost or a clockswitchover occurs.





ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.

Off In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.

LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port on the line is free ofR_LOS alarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line isreporting the R_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port on the line is freeof R_LOS alarms.




C Indicators of BoardsOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)







CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.

MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.

MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1














C-3













Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2






On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in theservices.

On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in theservices.





Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.

On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or majoralarms.

l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Blinks on (yellow)and off at 300 msintervals


RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Off The remote equipment is free of defects.

ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the active one.

l In an unprotected system, the board hasbeen activated.

Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the boardworks as the standby one.

l In an unprotected system, the board is notactivated.

Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2












C-5















Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2










Issue 03 (2011-04-10)























C-7

Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2

























Issue 03 (2011-04-10)






Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F







On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.



Software is being loaded to the board duringthe power-on or resetting process of theboard.


The board software is in BIOS boot stateduring the power-on or resetting process ofthe board.

On (green) l When the board is being powered on orbeing reset, the upper layer software isbeing initialized.

l When the board is running, the softwareis running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100ms intervals

The BOOTROM self-check fails during thepower-on or resetting process of the board.



C-9


On (red) The memory self-check fails or loadingupper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.The logic file or upper layer software is lostduring the running process of the board.The pluggable storage card is faulty.







NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of thecorresponding GE ports.

Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D












Issue 03 (2011-04-10)



LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of theSL1D is reporting theR_LOS alarm.

Off The first optical port of theSL1D is free of R_LOSalarms.

LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of theSL1D is reporting theR_LOS alarm.

Off The second optical port of theSL1D is free of R_LOSalarms.

Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D










Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1





C-11









Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX





board.





Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU


PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.

Off There is no power supply.

ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)


On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.

Off No alarm occurs.

Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN


FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.

On (red) The fan is faulty.

Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.



C-13

D Weight and Power Consumption of EachBoard

Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board

Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)

CSHN 1.60 kg < 36.6 W

IF1 0.72 kg < 12.0 W

IFU2 0.79 kg < 23.0 W

IFX2 0.80 kg < 33.0 W

ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W

ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W

EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W

EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W

SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W

ML1 0.45 kg < 7.0 W

MD1 0.50 kg < 12.2 W

SP3S 0.50 kg < 5.7 W

SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W

AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W

PIU 1.00 kg < 25.0 W

FAN 1.70 kg < 15.9 W (room temperature)< 103.5 W (high temperature)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board


D-1

Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)

Empty chassis(with only thebackplane)

7.10 kg -

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each BoardOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


D-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

E Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

E.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

E.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

E.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

E.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

E.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

E.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission SystemIDU Hardware Description E Glossary


E-1

E.1 0-9This section provides the terms starting with numbers.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

E.2 A-EThis section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.

A

ABR See available bit rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization

access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have accessto a resource.

ACL See access control list

adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to thechannel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.

ADC See analog to digital converter

add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signalscontained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

adjacent channelalternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

AF See assured forwarding

aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

E GlossaryOptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System


E-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the NetworkManagement System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view thedetails of the alarm.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based onthe filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarminformation. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed orstored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.

alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

AM See adaptive modulation

analog to digitalconverter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS See automatic protection switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic thatexceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward thetraffic instead of discarding the packets.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous inthe sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit

ATPC See automatic transmit power control

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used toensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU See administrative unit

automatic protectionswitching

Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switchto a standby facility to recover the traffic.

automatic transmitpower control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver

available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.



E-3

B

backward defectindication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: radio resource management, base station management, powercontrol, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages oneor more BTSs in an actual network.

base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.

basic input/outputsystem

A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output controlprograms, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system settinginformation. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.

BDI See backward defect indication

BE See best effort

BER See bit error rate

best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwardedfollowing the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of thenetwork and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the timeit reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet lossratio, and high reliability.

binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparentpolypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).

BIOS See basic input/output system

BIP See bit interleaved parity

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure thecommunications quality of a network.

bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by thetransmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that thefirst bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in thecovered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit ofall X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by settingthe BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of thesignal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position withinthe X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includesthe BIP-X.

BPDU See bridge protocol data unit




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

bridge protocol dataunit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.

BSC See base station controller

BTS See base transceiver station

buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking tocompensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of datacan be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In aprogram, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that willbe read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to storean advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.

C

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

cable tray N/A

cable trough N/A

CAR See committed access rate

CBR See constant bit rate

CBS See committed burst size

CC See connectivity check

CCC See circuit cross connect

CCDP See co-channel dual polarization

CCM See continuity check message

CE See customer edge

central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interpretsand executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and executeinstructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer'smain data-transfer path, the bus.

CES See circuit emulation service

CF See compact flash

CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol

channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between twoor more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmittedper second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits persecond. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).



E-5

CIR See committed information rate

circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

circuit emulationservice

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.

Cisco GroupManagement Protocol

N/A

CIST See common and internal spanning tree

CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

co-channel dualpolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.

coarse wavelengthdivision multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committedinformation rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that thisparameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might beforwarded.

committed informationrate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

common and internalspanning tree

The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logicalcontinuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTPto ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based onthe constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on preciseclocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.

CPU See central processing unit

CRC See cyclic redundancy check

cross polarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing

cyclic redundancycheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

D

data communicationnetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

data communicationschannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.

DC See direct current

DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C DC-return common (with ground)

DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)

DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)

DC-return common(with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return common(with ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.



E-7

DC-return isolate (withground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DCC See data communications channel

DCN See data communication network

DDF See digital distribution frame

DDN See digital data network

DE See discard eligible

differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

differentiated servicescode point

A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to applydifferentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServpolicy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet andother IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.

DiffServ See differentiated services

digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

digital distributionframe

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.

direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typicaldense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP See differentiated services code point




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation

E-LAN See Ethernet LAN

E-Line See Ethernet line

E-Tree See Ethernet-tree

EBS See excess burst size

ECC See embedded control channel

EF See expedited forwarding

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.

electromagneticinterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

embedded controlchannel

A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)information between NEs.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See electromagnetic interference

Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPL See Ethernet private line

EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service

equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching

ESD See electrostatic discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..



E-9

Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).

Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernetvirtual connection).

Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtualconnection).

Ethernet private LANservice

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over adedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, orMPLS server layer networks.

Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-pointconnections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.

Ethernet ringprotection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a sharedbridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet virtualprivate line

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over sharedbandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS serverlayer networks.

Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet VirtualConnection.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line

EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service

excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, thetraffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameterused to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet sizewhen the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parametermust be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than themaximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.

expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thusexpanding the capacity of the storage system.

expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services thatdemand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EFtraffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCPvalue of EF PHB is "101110".




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

E.3 F-JThis section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.

F

failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required functionto be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.

fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 timesfaster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and soon. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the followingthree types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core opticalfibers).

fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FD See frequency diversity

FDI See forward defect indication

FE See fast Ethernet

FEC See forward error correction

FFD fast failure detection

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

field programmablegate array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arrays.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unlessan equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on theprotection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.

forward defectindication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

forward errorcorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.



E-11

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA See field programmable gate array

fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network mediumthat cannot support the original size of the packet.

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in bothdirections, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-linetelephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heardat the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road withone lane for each direction.

G

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

GE See gigabit Ethernet

generic framingprocedure

A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has beenstandardized by ITU-T SG15.

generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.

GFP See generic framing procedure

gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options withgraphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

GTS See generic traffic shaping

GUI See graphical user interface

guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

H

HA See high availability

half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.

HDLC See high level data link control

hierarchical quality ofservice

A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling accordingto the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and theadministrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidthcan be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.

high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achievehigh availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takesover the system functions of the active module.

high level data linkcontrol

The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layerof the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame byadding a trailer and a header.

High Speed DownlinkPacket Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.

higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lowerorder path layers.

Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop representsa small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.

HP See higher order path

HQoS See hierarchical quality of service

HSB See hot standby

HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access



E-13

HSM hitless switch mode

HTB high tributary bus

hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.

I

ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol

IDU See indoor unit

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force

IF See intermediate frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generateroutes.

Intermediate System toIntermediate Systemrouting protocol

A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forwarddatagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.

internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

An international association that works to establish global standards for communicationsand information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely acceptedISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computersconnected by communications networks.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

InternationalTelecommunicationUnion-TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunicationstechnologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with aletter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. Forexample, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and opensystem communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.

Internet ControlMessage Protocol

A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction andother information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP softwareon one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See alsocommunications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).

Internet EngineeringTask Force

A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged withstudying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the InternetArchitecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groupsthat concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisherof the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

Internet protocolversion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Internet protocolversion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designedas the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 addresshas 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.

inverse multiplexingover ATM

The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higherbandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This isreferred to as an IMA group.

IP See Internet Protocol

IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6

IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6

IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See internal spanning tree

ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication StandardizationSector



E-15

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

E.4 K-OThis section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.

L

L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network

label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR iscomposed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible forallocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating andremoving the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groupsreceived in the label forwarding table.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See local area network

LAN See local area network

LAPS link access protocol-SDH

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork

A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packetswitched (IP/MPLS) network.

LB See loopback

LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme

LCT local craft terminal

line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals themaximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface toincrease bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE802.3ad.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

link capacityadjustment scheme

LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides acontrol mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet thebandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member linksthat have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is theresponsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.

Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.

LMSP linear multiplex section protection

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

LOF See Loss Of Frame

LOM loss of multiframe

loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See loss of pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.

loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

LP lower order path

LPT link-state pass through

LSP See label switched path



E-17

LSR See label switching router

M

MA See maintenance association

MAC See media access control

MAC See media access control

MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer

main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machineinteractive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarmsof different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basicnetwork operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

maintenanceassociation

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.

maintenanceassociation end point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. Thedevices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

managementinformation base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition existson other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switchcommand is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.

maximum transmissionunit

The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes onEthernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining thesize of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmittedacross networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the onethat all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networksinvolved.

MBS maximum burst size

MCF See message communication function

MD See maintenance domain

MDI See medium dependent interface

Mean Time BetweenFailures

The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measureof the reliability of the system.

Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

medium dependentinterface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.

MEP See maintenance association end point

MEP maintenance end point

messagecommunicationfunction

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs.

MIB See management information base

MIP maintenance intermediate point

mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements orcomponents.

MP See maintenance point

MPID maintenance point identification

MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering



E-19

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.

MS See multiplex section

MSP See multiplex section protection

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR See Mean Time To Repair

MTU See maximum transmission unit

Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

Multiprotocol LabelSwitching

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

multiprotocol labelswitching trafficengineering

N/A

N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.

NE See network element

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage thetelecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage andmaintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board whichmanages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCCboard.

Network ManagementSystem

A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.

network service accesspoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

network to networkinterface

An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a networkon its journey to its final destination.

NLP normal link pulse

NMS See Network Management System

NNI See network to network interface

node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands forone frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.

non-gateway networkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE See non-gateway network element

NSAP See network service access point

NSF not stop forwarding

O

OAM See operation, administration and maintenance

ODF See optical distribution frame

ODU See outdoor unit

OM Operation and maintenance

One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protectedtunnel at a PLR.

open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.



E-21

Open SystemsInterconnection

A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made bydifferent vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven differentcategories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message sourceand destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.

operation,administration andmaintenance

A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in anoperational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriberaccess network to users/subscribers.

optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source(or a detector).+

optical distributionframe

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSPF See open shortest path first

outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

E.5 P-TThis section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.

P

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left endof a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path isa certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in thenetwork management system, a user can test the performance of a network path betweena device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packetloss ratio or other aspects.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See printed circuit board




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy

PDU See protocol data unit

PE See provider edge

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committedinformation rate.

penultimate hoppopping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hopbehaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network shouldselect the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETFdefines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).

PHB See per-hop behavior

PHP See penultimate hop popping

PIR See peak information rate

plesiochronous digitalhierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PQ See priority queue

PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence

PRC primary reference clock

printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.



E-23

priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following threeoperations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and returnit (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): lookat the element with highest priority without removing it

protection groundcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.

provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

pseudo random binarysequence

A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of thevalues of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.

pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is establishedand maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW ismaintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

pseudo wire emulationedge-to-edge

A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributesof a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet SwitchedNetwork (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time DivisionMultiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the realsituation.

PSN See packet switched network

PTN packet transport network

PW See pseudo wire

PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

Q

QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tagof the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of thecarrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

QoS See quality of service

QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shiftkeying

A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation andthe phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth periodor 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots areevenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet lossratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of thetransmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of aservice provider to meet the demands of users.

R

radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.

radio networkcontroller

A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of theradio resources.

random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

RDI See remote defect indication

received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.

Received SignalStrength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).

RED See random early detection

Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction oferrors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmissionerrors at the receiver site.

REI See remote error indication

remote defectindication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.

remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to theoperation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control ofthe IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sourcessuch as InterNIC.



E-25

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.

RF See radio frequency

RFC See Request For Comments

RIP See Routing Information Protocol

RMON remote network monitoring

RMON remote network monitoring

RNC See radio network controller

Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destinationaddress, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM tothe designated account according to the information set in the route table.

Routing InformationProtocol

A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a routebased on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vectorprotocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and isknown to waste bandwidth.

routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RSL See received signal level

RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN radio transmission node

S

SD See space diversity

SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy

SEMF See synchronous equipment management function




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies theforwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLAmay include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreementas a whole or partially.

Service LevelAgreement *

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between serviceprovider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information aboutmeasuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operatingand support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider andcustomer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved thedocumented target measure.

SES See severely errored second

Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.

severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio ≥ X 10-3 or at least one defect. Timeinterval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratiogreater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).

SF See signal fail

SFP See small form-factor pluggable

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscribersignal cable.

signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (non-degrade defect) is active.

signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at agiven point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio andis usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can betransmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.

SLA See service level agreement

SLA* See Service Level Agreement *

Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

small form-factorpluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC See subnetwork connection



E-27

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See signal to noise ratio

space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundantnetwork to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prunea loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPNinformation by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.

STM See Synchronous Transport Module

STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1

STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.

subnetwork connectionprotection

A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protectionsubnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performancefalls below a required level.

SVC See static virtual circuit

switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. Thisbehavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clockinformation through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on theirclocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward thesynchronization information to downstream nodes.

synchronous digitalhierarchy

A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines thetransmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitablefor the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it usessynchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronousequipmentmanagement function

The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms intoobject-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.

synchronous transportmode-1

Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

SynchronousTransport Module

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

synchronous transportmodule of order N

A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.

T

tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such asTCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets aredropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI tag control information

TCP See Transmission Control Protocol

TDM See time division multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering

TEDB See traffic engineering database

TelecommunicationManagement Network

A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communicationsnetwork. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networksand services.



E-29

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time divisionmultiplexing

A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slotsin a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted overone channel.

time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS See tributary protection switch

traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the loadof the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic managementparameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize theutilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused byunbalanced loads.

traffic engineeringdatabase

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to knowthe features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which usesthe link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS containsome TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reservedbandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are ratherimportant. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area andgenerates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLSTE network.

Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guaranteethe performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of trafficin the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layerdevices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

Transmission ControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

tributary protectionswitch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM See two rate three color marker

TTL See time to live

TU tributary unit

Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

two rate three colormarker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.

E.6 U-ZThis section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.

U

U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.

UAS unavailable second

UBR See unspecified bit rate

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI See user network interface

unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(NetworkManagement system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data storedat the NMS side.

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (forexample, ATM switches).

V

V-UNI See virtual user-network interface

variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR See variable bit rate

VC See virtual container



E-31

VCC See virtual channel connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See virtual channel identifier

VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internalport of a data service processing board

virtual channelconnection

The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Alogical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.

virtual channelidentifier

A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used toidentify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches onits way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consistsof information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a blockframe structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.

virtual local areanetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to whichvirtual path the cell belongs.

virtual private LANservice

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network viaconnections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.

virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actualrouting device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances onthe device.

virtual user-networkinterface

A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform serviceclassification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN See virtual local area network

voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See voice over IP

VPI See virtual path identifier

VPLS See virtual private LAN service

VPN See virtual private network

VRF See virtual route forward




Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

W

wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.

WAN See wide area network

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network

weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. Thisscheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, accordingto their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priorityqueues can be scheduled.

weighted random earlydetection

A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.

weighted round Robin N/A

WFQ See weighted fair queuing

wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

WRED See weighted random early detection

WRR See weighted round Robin

WTR See wait to restore

X

XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation



E-33

rtn 980 idu hardware description-(v100r003c00_03)

Documents